Page 1
Page 2
Page 3
The Project Gutenberg eBook of The A B C of Relativity
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The A B C of Relativity
Author: Bertrand Russell
Release date: January 4, 2022 [eBook #67104]
Most recently updated: October 18, 2024
Language: English
Original publication: United States: Harper & Brothers, 1925
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/67104
Credits: Tim Lindell and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images
made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE A B C OF
RELATIVITY ***
HARPER’S MODERN SCIENCE SERIES
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and
most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions
whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms
of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at
www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you
will have to check the laws of the country where you are located
before using this eBook.
Title: The A B C of Relativity
Author: Bertrand Russell
Release date: January 4, 2022 [eBook #67104]
Most recently updated: October 18, 2024
Language: English
Original publication: United States: Harper & Brothers, 1925
Other information and formats: www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/67104
Credits: Tim Lindell and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at
https://www.pgdp.net (This book was produced from images
made available by the HathiTrust Digital Library.)
*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE A B C OF
RELATIVITY ***
HARPER’S MODERN SCIENCE SERIES
Page 4
THE A B C OF RELATIVITY
BY
BERTRAND RUSSELL
AUTHOR OF
“THE PRINCIPLES OF MATHEMATICS”
“PROPOSED ROADS TO FREEDOM”
AND “WHY MEN FIGHT”
PUBLISHERS
HARPER & BROTHERS
NEW YORK AND LONDON
THE A B C OF RELATIVITY
Copyright, 1925, by Harper & Brothers
Printed in the United States of America
BY
BERTRAND RUSSELL
AUTHOR OF
“THE PRINCIPLES OF MATHEMATICS”
“PROPOSED ROADS TO FREEDOM”
AND “WHY MEN FIGHT”
PUBLISHERS
HARPER & BROTHERS
NEW YORK AND LONDON
THE A B C OF RELATIVITY
Copyright, 1925, by Harper & Brothers
Printed in the United States of America
Page 5
Contents
CHAPTER PAGE
TOUCH AND SIGHT: THE EARTH AND THE HEAVENS
I. 1
II. WHAT HAPPENS AND WHAT IS OBSERVED 14
III. THE VELOCITY OF LIGHT 28
IV. CLOCKS AND FOOT RULES 43
V. SPACE-TIME 58
VI. THE SPECIAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY 71
VII. INTERVALS IN SPACE-TIME 91
VIII. EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION 111
IX. PROOFS OF EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION 131
X. MASS, MOMENTUM, ENERGY AND ACTION 144
XI. IS THE UNIVERSE FINITE? 163
XII. CONVENTIONS AND NATURAL LAWS 177
XIII. THE ABOLITION OF “FORCE” 192
XIV. WHAT IS MATTER? 206
XV. PHILOSOPHICAL CONSEQUENCES 219
CHAPTER PAGE
TOUCH AND SIGHT: THE EARTH AND THE HEAVENS
I. 1
II. WHAT HAPPENS AND WHAT IS OBSERVED 14
III. THE VELOCITY OF LIGHT 28
IV. CLOCKS AND FOOT RULES 43
V. SPACE-TIME 58
VI. THE SPECIAL THEORY OF RELATIVITY 71
VII. INTERVALS IN SPACE-TIME 91
VIII. EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION 111
IX. PROOFS OF EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION 131
X. MASS, MOMENTUM, ENERGY AND ACTION 144
XI. IS THE UNIVERSE FINITE? 163
XII. CONVENTIONS AND NATURAL LAWS 177
XIII. THE ABOLITION OF “FORCE” 192
XIV. WHAT IS MATTER? 206
XV. PHILOSOPHICAL CONSEQUENCES 219
Page 6
THE A B C OF RELATIVITY
Page 7
Page 8
CHAPTER ONE:
TOUCH AND SIGHT:
THE EARTH AND THE HEAVENS
E
verybody knows that Einstein has done something astonishing, but
very few people know exactly what it is that he has done. It is generally
recognized that he has revolutionized our conception of the physical
world, but his new conceptions are wrapped up in mathematical
technicalities. It is true that there are innumerable popular accounts of the
theory of relativity, but they generally cease to be intelligible just at the
point where they begin to say something important. The authors are hardly
to blame for this. Many of the new ideas can be expressed in non-
mathematical language, but they are none the less difficult on that account.
What is demanded is a change in our imaginative picture of the world—a
picture which has been handed down from remote, perhaps pre-human,
ancestors, and has been learned by each one of us in early childhood. A
change in our imagination is always difficult, especially when we are no
longer young. The same sort of change was demanded by Copernicus, when
he taught that the earth is not stationary and the heavens do not revolve
about it once a day. To us now there is no difficulty in this idea, because we
learned it before our mental habits had become fixed. Einstein’s ideas,
similarly, will seem easy to a generation which has grown up with them; but
for our generation a certain effort of imaginative reconstruction is
unavoidable.
In exploring the surface of the earth, we make use of all our senses,
more particularly of the senses of touch and sight. In measuring lengths,
parts of the human body are employed in pre-scientific ages: a “foot,” a
“cubit,” a “span” are defined in this way. For longer distances, we think of
the time it takes to walk from one place to another. We gradually learn to
judge distances roughly by the eye, but we rely upon touch for accuracy.
Moreover it is touch that gives us our sense of “reality.” Some things cannot
be touched: rainbows, reflections in looking-glasses, and so on. These
things puzzle children, whose metaphysical speculations are arrested by the
TOUCH AND SIGHT:
THE EARTH AND THE HEAVENS
E
verybody knows that Einstein has done something astonishing, but
very few people know exactly what it is that he has done. It is generally
recognized that he has revolutionized our conception of the physical
world, but his new conceptions are wrapped up in mathematical
technicalities. It is true that there are innumerable popular accounts of the
theory of relativity, but they generally cease to be intelligible just at the
point where they begin to say something important. The authors are hardly
to blame for this. Many of the new ideas can be expressed in non-
mathematical language, but they are none the less difficult on that account.
What is demanded is a change in our imaginative picture of the world—a
picture which has been handed down from remote, perhaps pre-human,
ancestors, and has been learned by each one of us in early childhood. A
change in our imagination is always difficult, especially when we are no
longer young. The same sort of change was demanded by Copernicus, when
he taught that the earth is not stationary and the heavens do not revolve
about it once a day. To us now there is no difficulty in this idea, because we
learned it before our mental habits had become fixed. Einstein’s ideas,
similarly, will seem easy to a generation which has grown up with them; but
for our generation a certain effort of imaginative reconstruction is
unavoidable.
In exploring the surface of the earth, we make use of all our senses,
more particularly of the senses of touch and sight. In measuring lengths,
parts of the human body are employed in pre-scientific ages: a “foot,” a
“cubit,” a “span” are defined in this way. For longer distances, we think of
the time it takes to walk from one place to another. We gradually learn to
judge distances roughly by the eye, but we rely upon touch for accuracy.
Moreover it is touch that gives us our sense of “reality.” Some things cannot
be touched: rainbows, reflections in looking-glasses, and so on. These
things puzzle children, whose metaphysical speculations are arrested by the
Page 9
information that what is in the looking glass is not “real.” Macbeth’s dagger
was unreal because it was not “sensible to feeling as to sight.” Not only our
geometry and physics, but our whole conception of what exists outside us,
is based upon the sense of touch. We carry this even into our metaphors: a
good speech is “solid,“ a bad speech is “gas,” because we feel that a gas is
not quite “real.”
In studying the heavens, we are debarred from all senses except sight.
We cannot touch the sun, or travel to it; we cannot walk round the moon, or
apply a foot rule to the Pleiades. Nevertheless, astronomers have
unhesitatingly applied the geometry and physics which they found
serviceable on the surface of the earth, and which they had based upon
touch and travel. In doing so, they brought down trouble on their heads,
which it has been left for Einstein to clear up. It has turned out that much of
what we learned from the sense of touch was unscientific prejudice, which
must be rejected if we are to have a true picture of the world.
An illustration may help us to understand how much is impossible to the
astronomer as compared to the man who is interested in things on the
surface of the earth. Let us suppose that a drug is administered to you which
makes you temporarily unconscious, and that when you wake you have lost
your memory but not your reasoning powers. Let us suppose further that
while you were unconscious you were carried into a balloon, which, when
you come to, is sailing with the wind in a dark night—the night of the fifth
of November if you are in England, or of the fourth of July if you are in
America. You can see fireworks which are being sent off from the ground,
from trains, and from aeroplanes traveling in all directions, but you cannot
see the ground or the trains or the aeroplanes be cause of the darkness.
What sort of picture of the world will you form? You will think that nothing
is permanent: there are only brief flashes of light, which, during their short
existence, travel through the void in the most various and bizarre curves.
You cannot touch these flashes of light, you can only see them. Obviously
your geometry and your physics and your metaphysics will be quite
different from those of ordinary mortals. If an ordinary mortal is with you in
the balloon, you will find his speech unintelligible. But if Einstein is with
you, you will understand him more easily than the ordinary mortal would,
because you will be free from a host of preconceptions which prevent most
people from understanding him.
was unreal because it was not “sensible to feeling as to sight.” Not only our
geometry and physics, but our whole conception of what exists outside us,
is based upon the sense of touch. We carry this even into our metaphors: a
good speech is “solid,“ a bad speech is “gas,” because we feel that a gas is
not quite “real.”
In studying the heavens, we are debarred from all senses except sight.
We cannot touch the sun, or travel to it; we cannot walk round the moon, or
apply a foot rule to the Pleiades. Nevertheless, astronomers have
unhesitatingly applied the geometry and physics which they found
serviceable on the surface of the earth, and which they had based upon
touch and travel. In doing so, they brought down trouble on their heads,
which it has been left for Einstein to clear up. It has turned out that much of
what we learned from the sense of touch was unscientific prejudice, which
must be rejected if we are to have a true picture of the world.
An illustration may help us to understand how much is impossible to the
astronomer as compared to the man who is interested in things on the
surface of the earth. Let us suppose that a drug is administered to you which
makes you temporarily unconscious, and that when you wake you have lost
your memory but not your reasoning powers. Let us suppose further that
while you were unconscious you were carried into a balloon, which, when
you come to, is sailing with the wind in a dark night—the night of the fifth
of November if you are in England, or of the fourth of July if you are in
America. You can see fireworks which are being sent off from the ground,
from trains, and from aeroplanes traveling in all directions, but you cannot
see the ground or the trains or the aeroplanes be cause of the darkness.
What sort of picture of the world will you form? You will think that nothing
is permanent: there are only brief flashes of light, which, during their short
existence, travel through the void in the most various and bizarre curves.
You cannot touch these flashes of light, you can only see them. Obviously
your geometry and your physics and your metaphysics will be quite
different from those of ordinary mortals. If an ordinary mortal is with you in
the balloon, you will find his speech unintelligible. But if Einstein is with
you, you will understand him more easily than the ordinary mortal would,
because you will be free from a host of preconceptions which prevent most
people from understanding him.
Page 10
The theory of relativity depends, to a considerable extent, upon getting
rid of notions which are useful in ordinary life but not to our drugged
balloonist. Circumstances on the surface of the earth, for various more or
less accidental reasons, suggest conceptions which turn out to be inaccurate,
although they have come to seem like necessities of thought. The most
important of these circumstances is that most objects on the earth’s surface
are fairly persistent and nearly stationary from a terrestrial point of view. If
this were not the case, the idea of going a journey would not seem so
definite as it does. If you want to travel from King’s Cross to Edinburgh,
you know that you will find King’s Cross where it always has been, that the
railway line will take the course that it did when you last made the journey,
and that Waverley Station in Edinburgh will not have walked up to the
Castle. You therefore say and think that you have traveled to Edinburgh, not
that Edinburgh has traveled to you, though the latter statement would be
just as accurate. The success of this common sense point of view depends
upon a number of things which are really of the nature of luck. Suppose all
the houses in London were perpetually moving about, like a swarm of bees;
suppose railways moved and changed their shapes like avalanches; and
finally suppose that material objects were perpetually being formed and
dissolved like clouds. There is nothing impossible in these suppositions:
something like them must have been verified when the earth was hotter than
it is now. But obviously what we call a journey to Edinburgh would have no
meaning in such a world. You would begin, no doubt, by asking the taxi-
driver: “Where is King’s Cross this morning?“ At the station you would
have to ask a similar question about Edinburgh, but the booking-office clerk
would reply: “What part of Edinburgh do you mean, Sir? Prince’s Street has
gone to Glasgow, the Castle has moved up into the Highlands, and
Waverley Station is under water in the middle of the Firth of Forth.” And on
the journey the stations would not be staying quiet, but some would be
travelling north, some south, some east or west, perhaps much faster than
the train. Under these conditions you could not say where you were at any
moment. Indeed the whole notion that one is always in some definite
“place” is due to the fortunate immovability of most of the large objects on
the earth’s surface. The idea of “place” is only a rough practical
approximation: there is nothing logically necessary about it, and it cannot
be made precise.
rid of notions which are useful in ordinary life but not to our drugged
balloonist. Circumstances on the surface of the earth, for various more or
less accidental reasons, suggest conceptions which turn out to be inaccurate,
although they have come to seem like necessities of thought. The most
important of these circumstances is that most objects on the earth’s surface
are fairly persistent and nearly stationary from a terrestrial point of view. If
this were not the case, the idea of going a journey would not seem so
definite as it does. If you want to travel from King’s Cross to Edinburgh,
you know that you will find King’s Cross where it always has been, that the
railway line will take the course that it did when you last made the journey,
and that Waverley Station in Edinburgh will not have walked up to the
Castle. You therefore say and think that you have traveled to Edinburgh, not
that Edinburgh has traveled to you, though the latter statement would be
just as accurate. The success of this common sense point of view depends
upon a number of things which are really of the nature of luck. Suppose all
the houses in London were perpetually moving about, like a swarm of bees;
suppose railways moved and changed their shapes like avalanches; and
finally suppose that material objects were perpetually being formed and
dissolved like clouds. There is nothing impossible in these suppositions:
something like them must have been verified when the earth was hotter than
it is now. But obviously what we call a journey to Edinburgh would have no
meaning in such a world. You would begin, no doubt, by asking the taxi-
driver: “Where is King’s Cross this morning?“ At the station you would
have to ask a similar question about Edinburgh, but the booking-office clerk
would reply: “What part of Edinburgh do you mean, Sir? Prince’s Street has
gone to Glasgow, the Castle has moved up into the Highlands, and
Waverley Station is under water in the middle of the Firth of Forth.” And on
the journey the stations would not be staying quiet, but some would be
travelling north, some south, some east or west, perhaps much faster than
the train. Under these conditions you could not say where you were at any
moment. Indeed the whole notion that one is always in some definite
“place” is due to the fortunate immovability of most of the large objects on
the earth’s surface. The idea of “place” is only a rough practical
approximation: there is nothing logically necessary about it, and it cannot
be made precise.
Page 11
If we were not much larger than an electron, we should not have this
impression of stability, which is only due to the grossness of our senses.
King’s Cross, which to us looks solid, would be too vast to be conceived
except by a few eccentric mathematicians. The bits of it that we could see
would consist of little tiny points of matter, never coming into contact with
each other, but perpetually whizzing round each other in an inconceivably
rapid ballet-dance. The world of our experience would be quite as mad as
the one in which the different parts of Edinburgh go for walks in different
directions. If—to take the opposite extreme—you were as large as the sun
and lived as long, with a corresponding slowness of perception, you would
again find a higgledy-piggledy universe without permanence—stars and
planets would come and go like morning mists, and nothing would remain
in a fixed position relatively to anything else. The notion of comparative
stability which forms part of our ordinary outlook is thus due to the fact that
we are about the size we are, and live on a planet of which the surface is no
longer very hot. If this were not the case, we should not find pre-relativity
physics intellectually satisfying. Indeed, we should never have invented
such theories. We should have had to arrive at relativity physics at one
bound, or remain ignorant of scientific laws. It is fortunate for us that we
were not faced with this alternative, since it is almost inconceivable that one
man could have done the work of Euclid, Galileo, Newton, and Einstein.
Yet without such an incredible genius physics could hardly have been
discovered in a world where the universal flux was obvious to non-
scientific observation.
In astronomy, although the sun, moon, and stars continue to exist year
after year, yet in other respects the world we have to deal with is very
different from that of everyday life. As already observed, we depend
exclusively on sight: the heavenly bodies cannot be touched, heard, smelt or
tasted. Everything in the heavens is moving relatively to everything else.
The earth is going round the sun, the sun is moving, very much faster than
an express train, towards a point in the constellation “Hercules,” the “fixed”
stars are scurrying hither and thither like a lot of frightened hens. There are
no well-marked places in the sky, like King’s Cross and Edinburgh. When
you travel from place to place on the earth, you say the train moves and not
the stations, because the stations preserve their topographical relations to
each other and the surrounding country. But in astronomy it is arbitrary
impression of stability, which is only due to the grossness of our senses.
King’s Cross, which to us looks solid, would be too vast to be conceived
except by a few eccentric mathematicians. The bits of it that we could see
would consist of little tiny points of matter, never coming into contact with
each other, but perpetually whizzing round each other in an inconceivably
rapid ballet-dance. The world of our experience would be quite as mad as
the one in which the different parts of Edinburgh go for walks in different
directions. If—to take the opposite extreme—you were as large as the sun
and lived as long, with a corresponding slowness of perception, you would
again find a higgledy-piggledy universe without permanence—stars and
planets would come and go like morning mists, and nothing would remain
in a fixed position relatively to anything else. The notion of comparative
stability which forms part of our ordinary outlook is thus due to the fact that
we are about the size we are, and live on a planet of which the surface is no
longer very hot. If this were not the case, we should not find pre-relativity
physics intellectually satisfying. Indeed, we should never have invented
such theories. We should have had to arrive at relativity physics at one
bound, or remain ignorant of scientific laws. It is fortunate for us that we
were not faced with this alternative, since it is almost inconceivable that one
man could have done the work of Euclid, Galileo, Newton, and Einstein.
Yet without such an incredible genius physics could hardly have been
discovered in a world where the universal flux was obvious to non-
scientific observation.
In astronomy, although the sun, moon, and stars continue to exist year
after year, yet in other respects the world we have to deal with is very
different from that of everyday life. As already observed, we depend
exclusively on sight: the heavenly bodies cannot be touched, heard, smelt or
tasted. Everything in the heavens is moving relatively to everything else.
The earth is going round the sun, the sun is moving, very much faster than
an express train, towards a point in the constellation “Hercules,” the “fixed”
stars are scurrying hither and thither like a lot of frightened hens. There are
no well-marked places in the sky, like King’s Cross and Edinburgh. When
you travel from place to place on the earth, you say the train moves and not
the stations, because the stations preserve their topographical relations to
each other and the surrounding country. But in astronomy it is arbitrary
Page 12
which you call the train and which the station: the question is to be decided
purely by convenience and as a matter of convention.
In this respect, it is interesting to contrast Einstein and Copernicus.
Before Copernicus, people thought that the earth stood still and the heavens
revolved about it once a day. Copernicus taught that “really” the earth
rotates once a day, and the daily revolution of sun and stars is only
“apparent.” Galileo and Newton endorsed this view, and many things were
thought to prove it—for example, the flattening of the earth at the poles,
and the fact that bodies are heavier there than at the equator. But in the
modern theory the question between Copernicus and his predecessors is
merely one of convenience; all motion is relative, and there is no difference
between the two statements: “the earth rotates once a day” and “the heavens
revolve about the earth once a day.” The two mean exactly the same thing,
just as it means the same thing if I say that a certain length is six feet or two
yards. Astronomy is easier if we take the sun as fixed than if we take the
earth, just as accounts are easier in a decimal coinage. But to say more for
Copernicus is to assume absolute motion, which is a fiction. All motion is
relative, and it is a mere convention to take one body as at rest. All such
conventions are equally legitimate, though not all are equally convenient.
There is another matter of great importance, in which astronomy differs
from terrestrial physics because of its exclusive dependence upon sight.
Both popular thought and old-fashioned physics used the notion of “force,”
which seemed intelligible because it was associated with familiar
sensations. When we are walking, we have sensations connected with our
muscles which we do not have when we are sitting still. In the days before
mechanical traction, although people could travel by sitting in their
carriages, they could see the horses exerting themselves and evidently
putting out “force” in the same way as human beings do. Everybody knew
from experience what it is to push or pull, or to be pushed or pulled. These
very familiar facts made “force” seem a natural basis for dynamics. But
Newton’s law of gravitation introduced a difficulty. The force between two
billiard balls appeared intelligible, because we know what it feels like to
bump into another person; but the force between the earth and the sun,
which are ninety-three million miles apart, was mysterious. Newton himself
regarded this “action at a distance” as impossible, and believed that there
was some hitherto undiscovered mechanism by which the sun’s influence
purely by convenience and as a matter of convention.
In this respect, it is interesting to contrast Einstein and Copernicus.
Before Copernicus, people thought that the earth stood still and the heavens
revolved about it once a day. Copernicus taught that “really” the earth
rotates once a day, and the daily revolution of sun and stars is only
“apparent.” Galileo and Newton endorsed this view, and many things were
thought to prove it—for example, the flattening of the earth at the poles,
and the fact that bodies are heavier there than at the equator. But in the
modern theory the question between Copernicus and his predecessors is
merely one of convenience; all motion is relative, and there is no difference
between the two statements: “the earth rotates once a day” and “the heavens
revolve about the earth once a day.” The two mean exactly the same thing,
just as it means the same thing if I say that a certain length is six feet or two
yards. Astronomy is easier if we take the sun as fixed than if we take the
earth, just as accounts are easier in a decimal coinage. But to say more for
Copernicus is to assume absolute motion, which is a fiction. All motion is
relative, and it is a mere convention to take one body as at rest. All such
conventions are equally legitimate, though not all are equally convenient.
There is another matter of great importance, in which astronomy differs
from terrestrial physics because of its exclusive dependence upon sight.
Both popular thought and old-fashioned physics used the notion of “force,”
which seemed intelligible because it was associated with familiar
sensations. When we are walking, we have sensations connected with our
muscles which we do not have when we are sitting still. In the days before
mechanical traction, although people could travel by sitting in their
carriages, they could see the horses exerting themselves and evidently
putting out “force” in the same way as human beings do. Everybody knew
from experience what it is to push or pull, or to be pushed or pulled. These
very familiar facts made “force” seem a natural basis for dynamics. But
Newton’s law of gravitation introduced a difficulty. The force between two
billiard balls appeared intelligible, because we know what it feels like to
bump into another person; but the force between the earth and the sun,
which are ninety-three million miles apart, was mysterious. Newton himself
regarded this “action at a distance” as impossible, and believed that there
was some hitherto undiscovered mechanism by which the sun’s influence
Page 13
was transmitted to the planets. However, no such mechanism was
discovered, and gravitation remained a puzzle. The fact is that the whole
conception of “force” is a mistake. The sun does not exert any force on the
planets; in Einstein’s law of gravitation, the planet only pays attention to
what it finds in its own neighborhood. The way in which this works will be
explained in a later chapter; for the present we are only concerned with the
necessity of abandoning the notion of “force,” which was due to misleading
conceptions derived from the sense of touch.
As physics has advanced, it has appeared more and more that sight is
less misleading than touch as a source of fundamental notions about matter.
The apparent simplicity in the collision of billiard balls is quite illusory. As
a matter of fact, the two billiard balls never touch at all; what really happens
is inconceivably complicated, but is more analogous to what happens when
a comet penetrates the solar system and goes away again than to what
common sense supposes to happen.
Most of what we have said hitherto was already recognized by
physicists before Einstein invented the theory of relativity. “Force” was
known to be merely a mathematical fiction, and it was generally held that
motion is a merely relative phenomenon—that is to say, when two bodies
are changing their relative position, we cannot say that one is moving while
the other is at rest, since the occurrence is merely a change in their relation
to each other. But a great labor was required in order to bring the actual
procedure of physics into harmony with these new convictions. Newton
believed in force and in absolute space and time; he embodied these beliefs
in his technical methods, and his methods remained those of later
physicists. Einstein invented a new technique, free from Newton’s
assumptions. But in order to do so he had to change fundamentally the old
ideas of space and time, which had been unchallenged from time
immemorial. This is what makes both the difficulty and the interest of his
theory. But before explaining it there are some preliminaries which are
indispensable. These will occupy the next two chapters.
discovered, and gravitation remained a puzzle. The fact is that the whole
conception of “force” is a mistake. The sun does not exert any force on the
planets; in Einstein’s law of gravitation, the planet only pays attention to
what it finds in its own neighborhood. The way in which this works will be
explained in a later chapter; for the present we are only concerned with the
necessity of abandoning the notion of “force,” which was due to misleading
conceptions derived from the sense of touch.
As physics has advanced, it has appeared more and more that sight is
less misleading than touch as a source of fundamental notions about matter.
The apparent simplicity in the collision of billiard balls is quite illusory. As
a matter of fact, the two billiard balls never touch at all; what really happens
is inconceivably complicated, but is more analogous to what happens when
a comet penetrates the solar system and goes away again than to what
common sense supposes to happen.
Most of what we have said hitherto was already recognized by
physicists before Einstein invented the theory of relativity. “Force” was
known to be merely a mathematical fiction, and it was generally held that
motion is a merely relative phenomenon—that is to say, when two bodies
are changing their relative position, we cannot say that one is moving while
the other is at rest, since the occurrence is merely a change in their relation
to each other. But a great labor was required in order to bring the actual
procedure of physics into harmony with these new convictions. Newton
believed in force and in absolute space and time; he embodied these beliefs
in his technical methods, and his methods remained those of later
physicists. Einstein invented a new technique, free from Newton’s
assumptions. But in order to do so he had to change fundamentally the old
ideas of space and time, which had been unchallenged from time
immemorial. This is what makes both the difficulty and the interest of his
theory. But before explaining it there are some preliminaries which are
indispensable. These will occupy the next two chapters.
Page 14
CHAPTER II:
WHAT HAPPENS AND
WHAT IS OBSERVED
A
certain type of superior person is fond of asserting that “everything is
relative.” This is, of course, nonsense, because, if everything were
relative, there would be nothing for it to be relative to. However,
without falling into metaphysical absurdities it is possible to maintain that
everything in the physical world is relative to an observer. This view, true or
not, is not that adopted by the “theory of relativity.” Perhaps the name is
unfortunate; certainly it has led philosophers and uneducated people into
confusions. They imagine that the new theory proves everything in the
physical world to be relative, whereas, on the contrary, it is wholly
concerned to exclude what is relative and arrive at a statement of physical
laws that shall in no way depend upon the circumstances of the observer. It
is true that these circumstances have been found to have more effect upon
what appears to the observer than they were formerly thought to have, but
at the same time Einstein showed how to discount this effect completely.
This was the source of almost everything that is surprising in his theory.
When two observers perceive what is regarded as one occurrence, there
are certain similarities, and also certain differences, between their
perceptions. The differences are obscured by the requirements of daily life,
because from a business point of view they are as a rule unimportant. But
both psychology and physics, from their different angles, are compelled to
emphasize the respects in which one man’s perception of a given
occurrence differs from another man’s. Some of these differences are due to
differences in the brains or minds of the observers, some to differences in
their sense organs, some to differences of physical situation: these three
kinds may be called respectively psychological, physiological, and physical.
A remark made in a language we know will be heard, whereas an equally
loud remark in an unknown language may pass entirely unnoticed. Of two
men in the Alps, one will perceive the beauty of the scenery while the other
will notice the waterfalls with a view to obtaining power from them. Such
WHAT HAPPENS AND
WHAT IS OBSERVED
A
certain type of superior person is fond of asserting that “everything is
relative.” This is, of course, nonsense, because, if everything were
relative, there would be nothing for it to be relative to. However,
without falling into metaphysical absurdities it is possible to maintain that
everything in the physical world is relative to an observer. This view, true or
not, is not that adopted by the “theory of relativity.” Perhaps the name is
unfortunate; certainly it has led philosophers and uneducated people into
confusions. They imagine that the new theory proves everything in the
physical world to be relative, whereas, on the contrary, it is wholly
concerned to exclude what is relative and arrive at a statement of physical
laws that shall in no way depend upon the circumstances of the observer. It
is true that these circumstances have been found to have more effect upon
what appears to the observer than they were formerly thought to have, but
at the same time Einstein showed how to discount this effect completely.
This was the source of almost everything that is surprising in his theory.
When two observers perceive what is regarded as one occurrence, there
are certain similarities, and also certain differences, between their
perceptions. The differences are obscured by the requirements of daily life,
because from a business point of view they are as a rule unimportant. But
both psychology and physics, from their different angles, are compelled to
emphasize the respects in which one man’s perception of a given
occurrence differs from another man’s. Some of these differences are due to
differences in the brains or minds of the observers, some to differences in
their sense organs, some to differences of physical situation: these three
kinds may be called respectively psychological, physiological, and physical.
A remark made in a language we know will be heard, whereas an equally
loud remark in an unknown language may pass entirely unnoticed. Of two
men in the Alps, one will perceive the beauty of the scenery while the other
will notice the waterfalls with a view to obtaining power from them. Such
Page 15
differences are psychological. The difference between a long-sighted and a
short-sighted man, or between a deaf man and a man who hears well, are
physiological. Neither of these kinds concerns us, and I have mentioned
them only in order to exclude them. The kind that concerns us is the purely
physical kind. Physical differences between two observers will be preserved
when the observers are replaced by cameras or phonographs, and can be
reproduced on the movies or the gramophone. If two men both listen to a
third man speaking, and one of them is nearer to the speaker than the other
is, the nearer one will hear louder and slightly earlier sounds than are heard
by the other. If two men both watch a tree falling, they see it from different
angles. Both these differences would be shown equally by recording
instruments: they are in no way due to idiosyncrasies in the observers, but
are part of the ordinary course of physical nature as we experience it.
The physicist, like the plain man, believes that his perceptions give him
knowledge about what is really occurring in the physical world, and not
only about his private experiences. Professionally, he regards the physical
world as “real,” not merely as something which human beings dream. An
eclipse of the sun, for instance, can be observed by any person who is
suitably situated, and is also observed by the photographic plates that are
exposed for the purpose. The physicist is persuaded that something has
really happened over and above the experiences of those who have looked
at the sun or at photographs of it. I have emphasized this point, which might
seem a trifle obvious, because some people imagine that Einstein has made
a difference in this respect. In fact he has made none.
But if the physicist is justified in this belief that a number of people can
observe the “same” physical occurrence, then clearly the physicist must be
concerned with those features which the occurrence has in common for all
observers, for the others cannot be regarded as belonging to the occurrence
itself. At least, the physicist must confine himself to the features which are
common to all “equally good” observers. The observer who uses a
microscope or a telescope is preferred to one who does not, because he sees
all that the latter sees and more too. A sensitive photographic plate may
“see” still more, and is then preferred to any eye. But such things as
differences of perspective, or differences of apparent size due to difference
of distance, are obviously not attributable to the object; they belong solely
to the point of view of the spectator. Common sense eliminates these in
short-sighted man, or between a deaf man and a man who hears well, are
physiological. Neither of these kinds concerns us, and I have mentioned
them only in order to exclude them. The kind that concerns us is the purely
physical kind. Physical differences between two observers will be preserved
when the observers are replaced by cameras or phonographs, and can be
reproduced on the movies or the gramophone. If two men both listen to a
third man speaking, and one of them is nearer to the speaker than the other
is, the nearer one will hear louder and slightly earlier sounds than are heard
by the other. If two men both watch a tree falling, they see it from different
angles. Both these differences would be shown equally by recording
instruments: they are in no way due to idiosyncrasies in the observers, but
are part of the ordinary course of physical nature as we experience it.
The physicist, like the plain man, believes that his perceptions give him
knowledge about what is really occurring in the physical world, and not
only about his private experiences. Professionally, he regards the physical
world as “real,” not merely as something which human beings dream. An
eclipse of the sun, for instance, can be observed by any person who is
suitably situated, and is also observed by the photographic plates that are
exposed for the purpose. The physicist is persuaded that something has
really happened over and above the experiences of those who have looked
at the sun or at photographs of it. I have emphasized this point, which might
seem a trifle obvious, because some people imagine that Einstein has made
a difference in this respect. In fact he has made none.
But if the physicist is justified in this belief that a number of people can
observe the “same” physical occurrence, then clearly the physicist must be
concerned with those features which the occurrence has in common for all
observers, for the others cannot be regarded as belonging to the occurrence
itself. At least, the physicist must confine himself to the features which are
common to all “equally good” observers. The observer who uses a
microscope or a telescope is preferred to one who does not, because he sees
all that the latter sees and more too. A sensitive photographic plate may
“see” still more, and is then preferred to any eye. But such things as
differences of perspective, or differences of apparent size due to difference
of distance, are obviously not attributable to the object; they belong solely
to the point of view of the spectator. Common sense eliminates these in
Page 16
judging of objects; physics has to carry the same process much further, but
the principle is the same.
I want to make it clear that I am not concerned with anything that can be
called inaccuracy. I am concerned with genuine physical differences
between occurrences each of which is a correct record of a certain event,
from its own point of view. When a man fires a gun, people who are not
quite close to him see the flash before they hear the report. This is not due
to any defect in their senses, but to the fact that sound travels more slowly
than light. Light travels so fast that, from the point of view of phenomena
on the surface of the earth, it may be regarded as instantaneous. Anything
that we can see on the earth happens practically at the moment when we see
it. In a second, light travels 300,000 kilometers (about 186,000 miles). It
travels from the sun to the earth in about eight minutes, and from the stars
to us in anything from three to a thousand years. But of course we cannot
place a clock in the sun, and send out a flash of light from it at 12 noon,
Greenwich Mean Time, and have it received at Greenwich at 12.08 p.m. Our
methods of estimating the speed of light have to be more or less indirect.
The only direct method would be that which we apply to sound when we
use an echo. We could send a flash to a mirror, and observe how long it took
for the reflection to reach us; this would give the time of the double journey
to the mirror and back. On the earth, however, the time would be so short
that a great deal of theoretical physics has to be utilized if this method is to
be employed—more even than is required for the employment of
astronomical data.
The problem of allowing for the spectator’s point of view, we may be
told, is one of which physics has at all times been fully aware; indeed it has
dominated astronomy ever since the time of Copernicus. This is true. But
principles are often acknowledged long before their full consequences are
drawn. Much of traditional physics is incompatible with the principle, in
spite of the fact that it was acknowledged theoretically by all physicists.
There existed a set of rules which caused uneasiness to the
philosophically minded, but were accepted by physicists because they
worked in practice. Locke had distinguished “secondary” qualities—colors,
noises, tastes, smells, etc.—as subjective, while allowing “primary”
qualities—shapes and positions and sizes—to be genuine properties of
physical objects. The physicist’s rules were such as would follow from this
the principle is the same.
I want to make it clear that I am not concerned with anything that can be
called inaccuracy. I am concerned with genuine physical differences
between occurrences each of which is a correct record of a certain event,
from its own point of view. When a man fires a gun, people who are not
quite close to him see the flash before they hear the report. This is not due
to any defect in their senses, but to the fact that sound travels more slowly
than light. Light travels so fast that, from the point of view of phenomena
on the surface of the earth, it may be regarded as instantaneous. Anything
that we can see on the earth happens practically at the moment when we see
it. In a second, light travels 300,000 kilometers (about 186,000 miles). It
travels from the sun to the earth in about eight minutes, and from the stars
to us in anything from three to a thousand years. But of course we cannot
place a clock in the sun, and send out a flash of light from it at 12 noon,
Greenwich Mean Time, and have it received at Greenwich at 12.08 p.m. Our
methods of estimating the speed of light have to be more or less indirect.
The only direct method would be that which we apply to sound when we
use an echo. We could send a flash to a mirror, and observe how long it took
for the reflection to reach us; this would give the time of the double journey
to the mirror and back. On the earth, however, the time would be so short
that a great deal of theoretical physics has to be utilized if this method is to
be employed—more even than is required for the employment of
astronomical data.
The problem of allowing for the spectator’s point of view, we may be
told, is one of which physics has at all times been fully aware; indeed it has
dominated astronomy ever since the time of Copernicus. This is true. But
principles are often acknowledged long before their full consequences are
drawn. Much of traditional physics is incompatible with the principle, in
spite of the fact that it was acknowledged theoretically by all physicists.
There existed a set of rules which caused uneasiness to the
philosophically minded, but were accepted by physicists because they
worked in practice. Locke had distinguished “secondary” qualities—colors,
noises, tastes, smells, etc.—as subjective, while allowing “primary”
qualities—shapes and positions and sizes—to be genuine properties of
physical objects. The physicist’s rules were such as would follow from this
Page 17
doctrine. Colors and noises were allowed to be subjective, but due to waves
proceeding with a definite velocity—that of light or sound as the case may
be—from their source to the eye or ear of the percipient. Apparent shapes
vary according to the laws of perspective, but these laws are simple and
make it easy to infer the “real” shapes from several visual apparent shapes;
moreover, the “real” shapes can be ascertained by touch in the case of
bodies in our neighborhood. The objective time of a physical occurrence
can be inferred from the time when we perceive it by allowing for the
velocity of transmission—of light or sound or nerve currents according to
circumstances. This was the view adopted by physicists in practice,
whatever qualms they may have had in unprofessional moments.
This view worked well enough until physicists became concerned with
much greater velocities than those that are common on the surface of the
earth. An express train travels about a mile in a minute; the planets travel a
few miles in a second. Comets, when they are near the sun, travel much
faster, and behave somewhat oddly; but they were puzzling in various ways.
Practically, the planets were the most swiftly moving bodies to which
dynamics could be adequately applied. With radio-activity a new range of
observations became possible. Individual electrons can be observed,
emanating from radium with a velocity not far short of that of light. The
behavior of bodies moving with these enormous speeds is not what the old
theories would lead us to expect. For one thing, mass seems to increase with
speed in a perfectly definite manner. When an electron is moving very fast,
a bigger force is required to have a given effect upon it than when it is
moving slowly. Then reasons were found for thinking that the size of a body
is affected by its motion—for example, if you take a cube and move it very
fast, it gets shorter in the direction of its motion, from the point of view of a
person who is not moving with it, though from its own point of view (i.e.
for an observer traveling with it) it remains just as it was. What was still
more astonishing was the discovery that lapse of time depends on motion;
that is to say, two perfectly accurate clocks, one of which is moving very
fast relatively to the other, will not continue to show the same time if they
come together again after a journey. It follows that what we discover by
means of clocks and foot rules, which used to be regarded as the acme of
impersonal science, is really in part dependent upon our private
circumstances, i.e. upon the way in which we are moving relatively to the
bodies measured.
proceeding with a definite velocity—that of light or sound as the case may
be—from their source to the eye or ear of the percipient. Apparent shapes
vary according to the laws of perspective, but these laws are simple and
make it easy to infer the “real” shapes from several visual apparent shapes;
moreover, the “real” shapes can be ascertained by touch in the case of
bodies in our neighborhood. The objective time of a physical occurrence
can be inferred from the time when we perceive it by allowing for the
velocity of transmission—of light or sound or nerve currents according to
circumstances. This was the view adopted by physicists in practice,
whatever qualms they may have had in unprofessional moments.
This view worked well enough until physicists became concerned with
much greater velocities than those that are common on the surface of the
earth. An express train travels about a mile in a minute; the planets travel a
few miles in a second. Comets, when they are near the sun, travel much
faster, and behave somewhat oddly; but they were puzzling in various ways.
Practically, the planets were the most swiftly moving bodies to which
dynamics could be adequately applied. With radio-activity a new range of
observations became possible. Individual electrons can be observed,
emanating from radium with a velocity not far short of that of light. The
behavior of bodies moving with these enormous speeds is not what the old
theories would lead us to expect. For one thing, mass seems to increase with
speed in a perfectly definite manner. When an electron is moving very fast,
a bigger force is required to have a given effect upon it than when it is
moving slowly. Then reasons were found for thinking that the size of a body
is affected by its motion—for example, if you take a cube and move it very
fast, it gets shorter in the direction of its motion, from the point of view of a
person who is not moving with it, though from its own point of view (i.e.
for an observer traveling with it) it remains just as it was. What was still
more astonishing was the discovery that lapse of time depends on motion;
that is to say, two perfectly accurate clocks, one of which is moving very
fast relatively to the other, will not continue to show the same time if they
come together again after a journey. It follows that what we discover by
means of clocks and foot rules, which used to be regarded as the acme of
impersonal science, is really in part dependent upon our private
circumstances, i.e. upon the way in which we are moving relatively to the
bodies measured.
Page 18
This shows that we have to draw a different line from that which is
customary in distinguishing between what belongs to the observer and what
belongs to the occurrence which he is observing. If a man is wearing blue
spectacles he knows that the blue look of everything is due to his
spectacles, and does not belong to what he is observing. But if he observes
two flashes of lightning, and notes the interval of time between his
observations; if he knows where the flashes took place, and allows, in each
case, for the time the light took to reach him—in that case, if his
chronometer is accurate, he naturally thinks that he has discovered the
actual interval of time between the two flashes, and not something merely
personal to himself. He is confirmed in this view by the fact that all other
careful observers to whom he has access agree with his estimates. This,
however, is only due to the fact that all these observers are on the earth, and
share its motion. Even two observers in aeroplanes moving in opposite
directions would have at the most a relative velocity of 400 miles an hour,
which is very little in comparison with 186,000 miles a second (the velocity
of light). If an electron shot out from a piece of radium with a velocity of
170,000 miles a second could observe the time between the two flashes, it
would arrive at a quite different estimate, after making full allowance for
the velocity of light. How do you know this? the reader may ask. You are
not an electron, you cannot move at these terrific speeds, no man of science
has ever made the observations which would prove the truth of your
assertion. Nevertheless, as we shall see in the sequel, there is good ground
for the assertion—ground, first of all, in experiment, and—what is
remarkable—ground in reasonings which could have been made at any
time, but were not made until experiments had shown that the old
reasonings must be wrong.
There is a general principle to which the theory of relativity appeals,
which turns out to be more powerful than anybody would suppose. If you
know that one man is twice as rich as another, this fact must appear equally
whether you estimate the wealth of both in pounds or dollars or francs or
any other currency. The numbers representing their fortunes will be
changed, but one number will always be double the other. The same sort of
thing, in more complicated forms, reappears in physics. Since all motion is
relative, you may take any body you like as your standard body of
reference, and estimate all other motions with reference to that one. If you
are in a train and walking to the dining-car, you naturally, for the moment,
customary in distinguishing between what belongs to the observer and what
belongs to the occurrence which he is observing. If a man is wearing blue
spectacles he knows that the blue look of everything is due to his
spectacles, and does not belong to what he is observing. But if he observes
two flashes of lightning, and notes the interval of time between his
observations; if he knows where the flashes took place, and allows, in each
case, for the time the light took to reach him—in that case, if his
chronometer is accurate, he naturally thinks that he has discovered the
actual interval of time between the two flashes, and not something merely
personal to himself. He is confirmed in this view by the fact that all other
careful observers to whom he has access agree with his estimates. This,
however, is only due to the fact that all these observers are on the earth, and
share its motion. Even two observers in aeroplanes moving in opposite
directions would have at the most a relative velocity of 400 miles an hour,
which is very little in comparison with 186,000 miles a second (the velocity
of light). If an electron shot out from a piece of radium with a velocity of
170,000 miles a second could observe the time between the two flashes, it
would arrive at a quite different estimate, after making full allowance for
the velocity of light. How do you know this? the reader may ask. You are
not an electron, you cannot move at these terrific speeds, no man of science
has ever made the observations which would prove the truth of your
assertion. Nevertheless, as we shall see in the sequel, there is good ground
for the assertion—ground, first of all, in experiment, and—what is
remarkable—ground in reasonings which could have been made at any
time, but were not made until experiments had shown that the old
reasonings must be wrong.
There is a general principle to which the theory of relativity appeals,
which turns out to be more powerful than anybody would suppose. If you
know that one man is twice as rich as another, this fact must appear equally
whether you estimate the wealth of both in pounds or dollars or francs or
any other currency. The numbers representing their fortunes will be
changed, but one number will always be double the other. The same sort of
thing, in more complicated forms, reappears in physics. Since all motion is
relative, you may take any body you like as your standard body of
reference, and estimate all other motions with reference to that one. If you
are in a train and walking to the dining-car, you naturally, for the moment,
Page 19
treat the train as fixed and estimate your motion by relation to it. But when
you think of the journey you are making, you think of the earth as fixed,
and say you are moving at the rate of sixty miles an hour. An astronomer
who is concerned with the solar system takes the sun as fixed, and regards
you as rotating and revolving; in comparison with this motion, that of the
train is so slow that it hardly counts. An astronomer who is interested in the
stellar universe may add the motion of the sun relatively to the average of
the stars. You cannot say that one of these ways of estimating your motion
is more correct than another; each is perfectly correct as soon as the
reference body is assigned. Now just as you can estimate a man’s fortune in
different currencies without altering its relations to the fortunes of other
men, so you can estimate a body’s motion by means of different reference
bodies without altering its relations to other motions. And as physics is
entirely concerned with relations, it must be possible to express all the laws
of physics by referring all motions to any given body as the standard.
We may put the matter in another way. Physics is intended to give
information about what really occurs in the physical world, and not only
about the private perceptions of separate observers. Physics must, therefore,
be concerned with those features which a physical process has in common
for all observers, since such features alone can be regarded as belonging to
the physical occurrence itself. This requires that the laws of phenomena
should be the same whether the phenomena are described as they appear to
one observer or as they appear to another. This single principle is the
generating motive of the whole theory of relativity.
Now what we have hitherto regarded as the spatial and temporal
properties of physical occurrences are found to be in large part dependent
upon the observer; only a residue can be attributed to the occurrences in
themselves, and only this residue can be involved in the formulation of any
physical law which is to have an à priori chance of being true. Einstein
found ready to his hand an instrument of pure mathematics, called the
theory of tensors, which enabled him to discover laws expressed in terms of
the objective residue and agreeing approximately with the old laws. Where
Einstein’s laws differed from the old ones, they have hitherto proved more
in accord with observation.
If there were no reality in the physical world, but only a number of
dreams dreamed by different people, we should not expect to find any laws
you think of the journey you are making, you think of the earth as fixed,
and say you are moving at the rate of sixty miles an hour. An astronomer
who is concerned with the solar system takes the sun as fixed, and regards
you as rotating and revolving; in comparison with this motion, that of the
train is so slow that it hardly counts. An astronomer who is interested in the
stellar universe may add the motion of the sun relatively to the average of
the stars. You cannot say that one of these ways of estimating your motion
is more correct than another; each is perfectly correct as soon as the
reference body is assigned. Now just as you can estimate a man’s fortune in
different currencies without altering its relations to the fortunes of other
men, so you can estimate a body’s motion by means of different reference
bodies without altering its relations to other motions. And as physics is
entirely concerned with relations, it must be possible to express all the laws
of physics by referring all motions to any given body as the standard.
We may put the matter in another way. Physics is intended to give
information about what really occurs in the physical world, and not only
about the private perceptions of separate observers. Physics must, therefore,
be concerned with those features which a physical process has in common
for all observers, since such features alone can be regarded as belonging to
the physical occurrence itself. This requires that the laws of phenomena
should be the same whether the phenomena are described as they appear to
one observer or as they appear to another. This single principle is the
generating motive of the whole theory of relativity.
Now what we have hitherto regarded as the spatial and temporal
properties of physical occurrences are found to be in large part dependent
upon the observer; only a residue can be attributed to the occurrences in
themselves, and only this residue can be involved in the formulation of any
physical law which is to have an à priori chance of being true. Einstein
found ready to his hand an instrument of pure mathematics, called the
theory of tensors, which enabled him to discover laws expressed in terms of
the objective residue and agreeing approximately with the old laws. Where
Einstein’s laws differed from the old ones, they have hitherto proved more
in accord with observation.
If there were no reality in the physical world, but only a number of
dreams dreamed by different people, we should not expect to find any laws
Page 20
connecting the dreams of one man with the dreams of another. It is the close
connection between the perceptions of one man and the (roughly)
simultaneous perceptions of another that makes us believe in a common
external origin of the different related perceptions. Physics accounts both
for the likenesses and for the differences between different people’s
perceptions of what we call the “same” occurrence. But in order to do this it
is first necessary for the physicist to find out just what are the likenesses.
They are not quite those traditionally assumed, because neither space nor
time separately can be taken as strictly objective. What is objective is a kind
of mixture of the two called “space-time.” To explain this is not easy, but
the attempt must be made; it will be begun in the next chapter.
connection between the perceptions of one man and the (roughly)
simultaneous perceptions of another that makes us believe in a common
external origin of the different related perceptions. Physics accounts both
for the likenesses and for the differences between different people’s
perceptions of what we call the “same” occurrence. But in order to do this it
is first necessary for the physicist to find out just what are the likenesses.
They are not quite those traditionally assumed, because neither space nor
time separately can be taken as strictly objective. What is objective is a kind
of mixture of the two called “space-time.” To explain this is not easy, but
the attempt must be made; it will be begun in the next chapter.
Page 21
CHAPTER III:
THE VELOCITY OF LIGHT
M ost of the curious things in the theory of relativity are connected with
the velocity of light. If the reader is to grasp the reasons for such a
serious theoretical reconstruction, he must have some idea of the facts
which made the old system break down.
The fact that light is transmitted with a definite velocity was first
established by astronomical observations. Jupiter’s moons are sometimes
eclipsed by Jupiter, and it is easy to calculate the times when this ought to
occur. It was found that when Jupiter was unusually near the earth an
eclipse of one of his moons would be observed a few minutes earlier than
was expected; and when Jupiter was unusually remote, a few minutes later
than was expected. It was found that these deviations could all be accounted
for by assuming that light has a certain velocity, so that what we observe to
be happening in Jupiter really happened a little while ago—longer ago
when Jupiter is distant than when it is near. Just the same velocity of light
was found to account for similar facts in regard to other parts of the solar
system. It was therefore accepted that light in vacuo always travels at a
certain constant rate, almost exactly 300,000 kilometers a second. (A
kilometer is about five-eighths of a mile.) When it became established that
light consists of waves, this velocity was that of propagation of waves in the
ether—at least they used to be in the ether, but now the ether has grown
somewhat shadowy, though the waves remain. This same velocity is that of
the waves used in wireless telegraphy (which are like light waves, only
longer) and in X-rays (which are like light waves, only shorter). It is
generally held nowadays to be the velocity with which gravitation is
propagated, though Eddington considers this not yet certain. (It used to be
thought that gravitation was propagated instantaneously, but this view is
now abandoned.)
So far, all is plain sailing. But as it became possible to make more
accurate measurements, difficulties began to accumulate. The waves were
supposed to be in the ether, and therefore their velocity ought to be relative
THE VELOCITY OF LIGHT
M ost of the curious things in the theory of relativity are connected with
the velocity of light. If the reader is to grasp the reasons for such a
serious theoretical reconstruction, he must have some idea of the facts
which made the old system break down.
The fact that light is transmitted with a definite velocity was first
established by astronomical observations. Jupiter’s moons are sometimes
eclipsed by Jupiter, and it is easy to calculate the times when this ought to
occur. It was found that when Jupiter was unusually near the earth an
eclipse of one of his moons would be observed a few minutes earlier than
was expected; and when Jupiter was unusually remote, a few minutes later
than was expected. It was found that these deviations could all be accounted
for by assuming that light has a certain velocity, so that what we observe to
be happening in Jupiter really happened a little while ago—longer ago
when Jupiter is distant than when it is near. Just the same velocity of light
was found to account for similar facts in regard to other parts of the solar
system. It was therefore accepted that light in vacuo always travels at a
certain constant rate, almost exactly 300,000 kilometers a second. (A
kilometer is about five-eighths of a mile.) When it became established that
light consists of waves, this velocity was that of propagation of waves in the
ether—at least they used to be in the ether, but now the ether has grown
somewhat shadowy, though the waves remain. This same velocity is that of
the waves used in wireless telegraphy (which are like light waves, only
longer) and in X-rays (which are like light waves, only shorter). It is
generally held nowadays to be the velocity with which gravitation is
propagated, though Eddington considers this not yet certain. (It used to be
thought that gravitation was propagated instantaneously, but this view is
now abandoned.)
So far, all is plain sailing. But as it became possible to make more
accurate measurements, difficulties began to accumulate. The waves were
supposed to be in the ether, and therefore their velocity ought to be relative
Page 22
to the ether. Now since the ether (if it exists) clearly offers no resistance to
the motions of the heavenly bodies, it would seem natural to suppose that it
does not share their motion. If the earth had to push a lot of ether before it,
in the sort of way that a steamer pushes water before it, one would expect a
resistance on the part of the ether analogous to that offered by the water to
the steamer. Therefore the general view was that the ether could pass
through bodies without difficulty, like air through a coarse sieve, only more
so. If this were the case, then the earth in its orbit must have a velocity
relative to the ether. If, at some point of its orbit, it happened to be moving
exactly with the ether, it must at other points be moving through it all the
faster. If you go for a circular walk on a windy day, you must be walking
against the wind part of the way, whatever wind may be blowing; the
principle in this case is the same. It follows that, if you choose two days six
months apart, when the earth in its orbit is moving in exactly opposite
directions, it must be moving against an ether wind on at least one of these
days.
Now if there is an ether wind, it is clear that, relatively to an observer on
the earth, light signals will seem to travel faster with the wind than across it,
and faster across it than against it. This is what Michelson and Morley set
themselves to test by their famous experiment. They sent out light signals in
two directions at right angles; each was reflected from a mirror, and came
back to the place from which both had been sent out. Now anybody can
verify, either by trial or by a little arithmetic, that it takes longer to row a
given distance on a river upstream and then back again, than it takes to row
the same distance across the stream and back again. Therefore, if there were
an ether wind, one of the two light signals, which consist of waves in the
ether, ought to have traveled to the mirror and back at a slower average rate
than the other. Michelson and Morley tried the experiment, they tried it in
various positions, they tried it again later. Their apparatus was quite
accurate enough to have detected the expected difference of speed or even a
much smaller difference, if it had existed, but not the smallest difference
could be observed. The result was a surprise to them as to everybody else;
but careful repetitions made doubt impossible. The experiment was first
made as long ago as 1881, and was repeated with more elaboration in 1887.
But it was many years before it could be rightly interpreted.
the motions of the heavenly bodies, it would seem natural to suppose that it
does not share their motion. If the earth had to push a lot of ether before it,
in the sort of way that a steamer pushes water before it, one would expect a
resistance on the part of the ether analogous to that offered by the water to
the steamer. Therefore the general view was that the ether could pass
through bodies without difficulty, like air through a coarse sieve, only more
so. If this were the case, then the earth in its orbit must have a velocity
relative to the ether. If, at some point of its orbit, it happened to be moving
exactly with the ether, it must at other points be moving through it all the
faster. If you go for a circular walk on a windy day, you must be walking
against the wind part of the way, whatever wind may be blowing; the
principle in this case is the same. It follows that, if you choose two days six
months apart, when the earth in its orbit is moving in exactly opposite
directions, it must be moving against an ether wind on at least one of these
days.
Now if there is an ether wind, it is clear that, relatively to an observer on
the earth, light signals will seem to travel faster with the wind than across it,
and faster across it than against it. This is what Michelson and Morley set
themselves to test by their famous experiment. They sent out light signals in
two directions at right angles; each was reflected from a mirror, and came
back to the place from which both had been sent out. Now anybody can
verify, either by trial or by a little arithmetic, that it takes longer to row a
given distance on a river upstream and then back again, than it takes to row
the same distance across the stream and back again. Therefore, if there were
an ether wind, one of the two light signals, which consist of waves in the
ether, ought to have traveled to the mirror and back at a slower average rate
than the other. Michelson and Morley tried the experiment, they tried it in
various positions, they tried it again later. Their apparatus was quite
accurate enough to have detected the expected difference of speed or even a
much smaller difference, if it had existed, but not the smallest difference
could be observed. The result was a surprise to them as to everybody else;
but careful repetitions made doubt impossible. The experiment was first
made as long ago as 1881, and was repeated with more elaboration in 1887.
But it was many years before it could be rightly interpreted.
Page 23
The supposition that the earth carries the neighboring ether with it in its
motion was found to be impossible, for a number of reasons. Consequently
a logical deadlock seemed to have arisen, from which at first physicists
sought to extricate themselves by very arbitrary hypotheses. The most
important of these was that of Fitzgerald, developed by Lorentz, and known
as the Fitzgerald contraction hypothesis.
According to this hypothesis, when a body is in motion it becomes
shortened in the direction of motion by a certain proportion depending upon
its velocity. The amount of the contraction was to be just enough to account
for the negative result of the Michelson-Morley experiment. The journey up
stream and down again was to have been really a shorter journey than the
one across the stream, and was to have been just so much shorter as would
enable the slower light wave to traverse it in the same time. Of course the
shortening could never be detected by measurement, because our measuring
rods would share it. A foot rule placed in the line of the earth’s motion
would be shorter than the same foot rule placed at right angles to the earth’s
motion. This point of view resembles nothing so much as the White
Knight’s “plan to dye my whiskers green, and always use so large a fan that
they could not be seen.” The odd thing was that the plan worked well
enough. Later on, when Einstein propounded his special theory of relativity
(1905), it was found that the theory was in a certain sense correct, but only
in a certain sense. That is to say, the supposed contraction is not a physical
fact, but a result of certain conventions of measurement which, when once
the right point of view has been found, are seen to be such as we are almost
compelled to adopt. But I do not wish yet to set forth Einstein’s solution of
the puzzle. For the present, it is the nature of the puzzle itself that I want to
make clear.
On the face of it, and apart from hypotheses ad hoc, the Michelson-
Morley experiment (in conjunction with others) showed that, relatively to
the earth, the velocity of light is the same in all directions, and that this is
equally true at all times of the year, although the direction of the earth’s
motion is always changing as it goes round the sun. Moreover, it appeared
that this is not a peculiarity of the earth, but is true of all bodies: if a light
signal is sent out from a body, that body will remain at the center of the
waves as they travel outwards, no matter how it may be moving—at least,
that will be the view of observers moving with the body. This was the plain
motion was found to be impossible, for a number of reasons. Consequently
a logical deadlock seemed to have arisen, from which at first physicists
sought to extricate themselves by very arbitrary hypotheses. The most
important of these was that of Fitzgerald, developed by Lorentz, and known
as the Fitzgerald contraction hypothesis.
According to this hypothesis, when a body is in motion it becomes
shortened in the direction of motion by a certain proportion depending upon
its velocity. The amount of the contraction was to be just enough to account
for the negative result of the Michelson-Morley experiment. The journey up
stream and down again was to have been really a shorter journey than the
one across the stream, and was to have been just so much shorter as would
enable the slower light wave to traverse it in the same time. Of course the
shortening could never be detected by measurement, because our measuring
rods would share it. A foot rule placed in the line of the earth’s motion
would be shorter than the same foot rule placed at right angles to the earth’s
motion. This point of view resembles nothing so much as the White
Knight’s “plan to dye my whiskers green, and always use so large a fan that
they could not be seen.” The odd thing was that the plan worked well
enough. Later on, when Einstein propounded his special theory of relativity
(1905), it was found that the theory was in a certain sense correct, but only
in a certain sense. That is to say, the supposed contraction is not a physical
fact, but a result of certain conventions of measurement which, when once
the right point of view has been found, are seen to be such as we are almost
compelled to adopt. But I do not wish yet to set forth Einstein’s solution of
the puzzle. For the present, it is the nature of the puzzle itself that I want to
make clear.
On the face of it, and apart from hypotheses ad hoc, the Michelson-
Morley experiment (in conjunction with others) showed that, relatively to
the earth, the velocity of light is the same in all directions, and that this is
equally true at all times of the year, although the direction of the earth’s
motion is always changing as it goes round the sun. Moreover, it appeared
that this is not a peculiarity of the earth, but is true of all bodies: if a light
signal is sent out from a body, that body will remain at the center of the
waves as they travel outwards, no matter how it may be moving—at least,
that will be the view of observers moving with the body. This was the plain
Page 24
and natural meaning of the experiments, and Einstein succeeded in
inventing a theory which accepted it. But at first it was thought logically
impossible to accept this plain and natural meaning.
A few illustrations will make it clear how very odd the facts are. When a
shell is fired, it moves faster than sound: the people at whom it is fired first
see the flash, then (if they are lucky) see the shell go by, and last of all hear
the report. It is clear that if you could put a scientific observer on the shell,
he would never hear the report, as the shell would burst and kill him before
the sound had overtaken him. But if sound worked on the same principles
as light, our observer would hear everything just as if he were at rest. In that
case, if a screen, suitable for producing echoes, were attached to the shell
and traveling with it, say a hundred yards in front of it, our observer would
hear the echo of the report from the screen after just the same interval of
time as if he and the shell were at rest. This, of course, is an experiment
which cannot be performed, but others which can be performed will show
the difference. We might find some place on a railway where there is an
echo from a place further along the railway—say a place where the railway
goes into a tunnel—and when a train is traveling along the railway, let a
man on the bank fire a gun. If the train is traveling towards the echo, the
passengers will hear the echo sooner than the man on the bank; if it is
traveling in the opposite direction, they will hear it later. But these are not
quite the circumstances of the Michelson-Morley experiment. The mirrors
in that experiment correspond to the echo, and the mirrors are moving with
the earth, so that echo ought to move with the train. Let us suppose that the
shot is fired from the guard’s van, and the echo comes from a screen on the
engine. We will suppose the distance from the guard’s van to the engine to
be the distance that sound can travel in a second (about one-fifth of a mile),
and the speed of the train to be one-twelfth of the speed of sound (about
sixty miles an hour). We now have an experiment which can be performed
by the people in the train. If the train were at rest, the guard would hear the
echo in two seconds; as it is, he will hear it in 2 and ²/₁₄₃ seconds. From this
difference, if he knows the velocity of sound, he can calculate the velocity
of the train, even if it is a foggy night so that he cannot see the banks. But if
sound behaved like light, he would hear the echo in two seconds however
fast the train might be traveling.
inventing a theory which accepted it. But at first it was thought logically
impossible to accept this plain and natural meaning.
A few illustrations will make it clear how very odd the facts are. When a
shell is fired, it moves faster than sound: the people at whom it is fired first
see the flash, then (if they are lucky) see the shell go by, and last of all hear
the report. It is clear that if you could put a scientific observer on the shell,
he would never hear the report, as the shell would burst and kill him before
the sound had overtaken him. But if sound worked on the same principles
as light, our observer would hear everything just as if he were at rest. In that
case, if a screen, suitable for producing echoes, were attached to the shell
and traveling with it, say a hundred yards in front of it, our observer would
hear the echo of the report from the screen after just the same interval of
time as if he and the shell were at rest. This, of course, is an experiment
which cannot be performed, but others which can be performed will show
the difference. We might find some place on a railway where there is an
echo from a place further along the railway—say a place where the railway
goes into a tunnel—and when a train is traveling along the railway, let a
man on the bank fire a gun. If the train is traveling towards the echo, the
passengers will hear the echo sooner than the man on the bank; if it is
traveling in the opposite direction, they will hear it later. But these are not
quite the circumstances of the Michelson-Morley experiment. The mirrors
in that experiment correspond to the echo, and the mirrors are moving with
the earth, so that echo ought to move with the train. Let us suppose that the
shot is fired from the guard’s van, and the echo comes from a screen on the
engine. We will suppose the distance from the guard’s van to the engine to
be the distance that sound can travel in a second (about one-fifth of a mile),
and the speed of the train to be one-twelfth of the speed of sound (about
sixty miles an hour). We now have an experiment which can be performed
by the people in the train. If the train were at rest, the guard would hear the
echo in two seconds; as it is, he will hear it in 2 and ²/₁₄₃ seconds. From this
difference, if he knows the velocity of sound, he can calculate the velocity
of the train, even if it is a foggy night so that he cannot see the banks. But if
sound behaved like light, he would hear the echo in two seconds however
fast the train might be traveling.
Page 25
Various other illustrations will help to show how extraordinary—from
the point of view of tradition and common sense—are the facts about the
velocity of light. Every one knows that if you are on an escalator you reach
the top sooner if you walk up than if you stand still. But if the escalator
moved with the velocity of light (which it does not do even in New York),
you would reach the top at exactly the same moment whether you walked
up or stood still. Again: if you are walking along a road at the rate of four
miles an hour, and a motor-car passes you going in the same direction at the
rate of forty miles an hour, if you and the motor-car both keep going the
distance between you after an hour will be thirty-six miles. But if the motor-
car met you, going in the opposite direction, the distance after an hour
would be forty-four miles. Now if the motor-car were traveling with the
velocity of light, it would make no difference whether it met or passed you:
in either case, it would, after a second, be 186,000 miles from you. It would
also be 186,000 miles from any other motor-car which happened to be
passing or meeting you less rapidly at the previous second. This seems
impossible: how can the car be at the same distance from a number of
different points along the road?
Let us take another illustration. When a fly touches the surface of a
stagnant pool, it causes ripples which move outwards in widening circles.
The center of the circle at any moment is the point of the pool touched by
the fly. If the fly moves about over the surface of the pool, it does not
remain at the center of the ripples. But if the ripples were waves of light,
and the fly were a skilled physicist, it would find that it always remained at
the center of the ripples, however it might move. Meanwhile a skilled
physicist sitting beside the pool would judge, as in the case of ordinary
ripples, that the center was not the fly, but the point of the pool touched by
the fly. And if another fly had touched the water at the same spot at the
same moment, it also would find that it remained at the center of the
ripples, even if it separated itself widely from the first fly. This is exactly
analogous to the Michelson-Morley experiment. The pool corresponds to
the ether; the fly corresponds to the earth; the contact of the fly and the pool
corresponds to the light signal which Messrs. Michelson and Morley send
out; and the ripples correspond to the light waves.
Such a state of affairs seems, at first sight, quite impossible. It is no
wonder that, although the Michelson-Morley experiment was made in 1881,
the point of view of tradition and common sense—are the facts about the
velocity of light. Every one knows that if you are on an escalator you reach
the top sooner if you walk up than if you stand still. But if the escalator
moved with the velocity of light (which it does not do even in New York),
you would reach the top at exactly the same moment whether you walked
up or stood still. Again: if you are walking along a road at the rate of four
miles an hour, and a motor-car passes you going in the same direction at the
rate of forty miles an hour, if you and the motor-car both keep going the
distance between you after an hour will be thirty-six miles. But if the motor-
car met you, going in the opposite direction, the distance after an hour
would be forty-four miles. Now if the motor-car were traveling with the
velocity of light, it would make no difference whether it met or passed you:
in either case, it would, after a second, be 186,000 miles from you. It would
also be 186,000 miles from any other motor-car which happened to be
passing or meeting you less rapidly at the previous second. This seems
impossible: how can the car be at the same distance from a number of
different points along the road?
Let us take another illustration. When a fly touches the surface of a
stagnant pool, it causes ripples which move outwards in widening circles.
The center of the circle at any moment is the point of the pool touched by
the fly. If the fly moves about over the surface of the pool, it does not
remain at the center of the ripples. But if the ripples were waves of light,
and the fly were a skilled physicist, it would find that it always remained at
the center of the ripples, however it might move. Meanwhile a skilled
physicist sitting beside the pool would judge, as in the case of ordinary
ripples, that the center was not the fly, but the point of the pool touched by
the fly. And if another fly had touched the water at the same spot at the
same moment, it also would find that it remained at the center of the
ripples, even if it separated itself widely from the first fly. This is exactly
analogous to the Michelson-Morley experiment. The pool corresponds to
the ether; the fly corresponds to the earth; the contact of the fly and the pool
corresponds to the light signal which Messrs. Michelson and Morley send
out; and the ripples correspond to the light waves.
Such a state of affairs seems, at first sight, quite impossible. It is no
wonder that, although the Michelson-Morley experiment was made in 1881,
Page 26
it was not rightly interpreted until 1905. Let us see what, exactly, we have
been saying. Take the man walking along a road and passed by a motor-car.
Suppose there are a number of people at the same point of the road, some
walking, some in motor-cars; suppose they are going at varying rates, some
in one direction and some in another. I say that if, at this moment, a light
flash is sent out from the place where they all are, the light waves will be
186,000 miles from each one of them after a second by his watch, although
the travelers will not any longer be all in the same place. At the end of a
second by your watch it will be 186,000 miles from you, and it will also be
186,000 miles from a person who met you when it was sent out, but was
moving in the opposite direction, after a second by his watch—assuming
both to be perfect watches. How can this be?
There is only one way of explaining such facts, and that is, to assume
that watches and clocks are affected by motion. I do not mean that they are
affected in ways that could be remedied by greater accuracy in construction;
I mean something much more fundamental. I mean that, if you say an hour
has elapsed between two events, and if you base this assertion upon ideally
careful measurements with ideally accurate chronometers, another equally
precise person, who has been moving rapidly relatively to you, may judge
that the time was more or less than an hour. You cannot say that one is right
and the other wrong, any more than you could if one used a clock showing
Greenwich time and another a clock showing New York time. How this
comes about, I shall explain in the next chapter.
There are other curious things about the velocity of light. One is, that no
material body can ever travel as fast as light, however great may be the
force to which it is exposed, and however long the force may act. An
illustration may help to make this clear. At exhibitions one sometimes sees a
series of moving platforms, going round and round in a circle. The outside
one goes at four miles an hour; the next goes four miles an hour faster than
the first; and so on. You can step across from each to the next; until you find
yourself going at a tremendous pace. Now you might think that, if the first
platform does four miles an hour, and the second does four miles an hour
relatively to the first, then the second does eight miles an hour relatively to
the ground. This is an error; it does a little less, though so little less that not
even the most careful measurements could detect the difference. I want to
make quite clear what it is that I mean. I will suppose that, in the morning,
been saying. Take the man walking along a road and passed by a motor-car.
Suppose there are a number of people at the same point of the road, some
walking, some in motor-cars; suppose they are going at varying rates, some
in one direction and some in another. I say that if, at this moment, a light
flash is sent out from the place where they all are, the light waves will be
186,000 miles from each one of them after a second by his watch, although
the travelers will not any longer be all in the same place. At the end of a
second by your watch it will be 186,000 miles from you, and it will also be
186,000 miles from a person who met you when it was sent out, but was
moving in the opposite direction, after a second by his watch—assuming
both to be perfect watches. How can this be?
There is only one way of explaining such facts, and that is, to assume
that watches and clocks are affected by motion. I do not mean that they are
affected in ways that could be remedied by greater accuracy in construction;
I mean something much more fundamental. I mean that, if you say an hour
has elapsed between two events, and if you base this assertion upon ideally
careful measurements with ideally accurate chronometers, another equally
precise person, who has been moving rapidly relatively to you, may judge
that the time was more or less than an hour. You cannot say that one is right
and the other wrong, any more than you could if one used a clock showing
Greenwich time and another a clock showing New York time. How this
comes about, I shall explain in the next chapter.
There are other curious things about the velocity of light. One is, that no
material body can ever travel as fast as light, however great may be the
force to which it is exposed, and however long the force may act. An
illustration may help to make this clear. At exhibitions one sometimes sees a
series of moving platforms, going round and round in a circle. The outside
one goes at four miles an hour; the next goes four miles an hour faster than
the first; and so on. You can step across from each to the next; until you find
yourself going at a tremendous pace. Now you might think that, if the first
platform does four miles an hour, and the second does four miles an hour
relatively to the first, then the second does eight miles an hour relatively to
the ground. This is an error; it does a little less, though so little less that not
even the most careful measurements could detect the difference. I want to
make quite clear what it is that I mean. I will suppose that, in the morning,
Page 27
when the apparatus is just about to start, three men with ideally accurate
chronometers stand in a row, one on the ground, one on the first platform,
and one on the second. The first platform moves at the rate of four miles an
hour with respect to the ground. Four miles an hour is 352 feet in a minute.
The man on the ground, after a minute by his watch, notes the place on the
ground opposite the man on the first platform, who has been standing still
while the platform carried him along. The man on the ground measures the
distance on the ground from himself to the point opposite the man on the
first platform, and finds it is 352 feet. The man on the first platform, after a
minute by his watch, notes the point on his platform opposite to the man on
the second platform. The man on the first platform measures the distance
from himself to the point opposite the man on the second platform; it is
again 352 feet. Problem: how far will the man on the ground judge that the
man on the second platform has traveled in a minute? That is to say, if the
man on the ground, after a minute by his watch, notes the place on the
ground opposite the man on the second platform, how far will this be from
the man on the ground? You would say, twice 352 feet, that is to say, 704
feet. But in fact it will be a little less, though so little less as to be
inappreciable. The discrepancy is owing to the fact that the two watches do
not keep perfect time, in spite of the fact that each is accurate from its
owner’s point of view. If you had a long series of such moving platforms,
each moving four miles an hour relatively to the one before it, you would
never reach a point where the last was moving with the velocity of light
relatively to the ground, not even if you had millions of them. The
discrepancy, which is very small for small velocities, becomes greater as the
velocity increases, and makes the velocity of light an unattainable limit.
How all this happens, is the next topic with which we must deal.
Note. The negative result of the Michelson-Morley experiment has recently
been called in question by Professor Dayton C. Miller, as a result of observations
by what is said to be an improved method. His claim is set forth by Professor
Silberstein in Nature, May 23, 1925, and discussed unfavorably by Eddington in
the issue of June 6. The matter is sub judice, but it seems highly questionable
whether the results bear out the interpretation which is put upon them.
chronometers stand in a row, one on the ground, one on the first platform,
and one on the second. The first platform moves at the rate of four miles an
hour with respect to the ground. Four miles an hour is 352 feet in a minute.
The man on the ground, after a minute by his watch, notes the place on the
ground opposite the man on the first platform, who has been standing still
while the platform carried him along. The man on the ground measures the
distance on the ground from himself to the point opposite the man on the
first platform, and finds it is 352 feet. The man on the first platform, after a
minute by his watch, notes the point on his platform opposite to the man on
the second platform. The man on the first platform measures the distance
from himself to the point opposite the man on the second platform; it is
again 352 feet. Problem: how far will the man on the ground judge that the
man on the second platform has traveled in a minute? That is to say, if the
man on the ground, after a minute by his watch, notes the place on the
ground opposite the man on the second platform, how far will this be from
the man on the ground? You would say, twice 352 feet, that is to say, 704
feet. But in fact it will be a little less, though so little less as to be
inappreciable. The discrepancy is owing to the fact that the two watches do
not keep perfect time, in spite of the fact that each is accurate from its
owner’s point of view. If you had a long series of such moving platforms,
each moving four miles an hour relatively to the one before it, you would
never reach a point where the last was moving with the velocity of light
relatively to the ground, not even if you had millions of them. The
discrepancy, which is very small for small velocities, becomes greater as the
velocity increases, and makes the velocity of light an unattainable limit.
How all this happens, is the next topic with which we must deal.
Note. The negative result of the Michelson-Morley experiment has recently
been called in question by Professor Dayton C. Miller, as a result of observations
by what is said to be an improved method. His claim is set forth by Professor
Silberstein in Nature, May 23, 1925, and discussed unfavorably by Eddington in
the issue of June 6. The matter is sub judice, but it seems highly questionable
whether the results bear out the interpretation which is put upon them.
Page 28
CHAPTER IV:
CLOCKS AND FOOT RULES
U ntil the advent of the special theory of relativity, no one had thought
that there could be any ambiguity in the statement that two events in
different places happened at the same time. It might be admitted that,
if the places were very far apart, there might be difficulty in finding out for
certain whether the events were simultaneous, but every one thought the
meaning of the question perfectly definite. It turned out, however, that this
was a mistake. Two events in distant places may appear simultaneous to one
observer who has taken all due precautions to insure accuracy (and, in
particular, has allowed for the velocity of light), while another equally
careful observer may judge that the first event preceded the second, and still
another may judge that the second preceded the first. This would happen if
the three observers were all moving rapidly relatively to each other. It
would not be the case that one of them would be right and the other two
wrong: they would all be equally right. The time order of events is in part
dependent upon the observer; it is not always and altogether an intrinsic
relation between the events themselves. Einstein has shown, not only that
this view accounts for the phenomena, but also that it is the one which
ought to have resulted from careful reasoning based upon the old data. In
actual fact, however, no one noticed the logical basis of the theory of
relativity until the odd results of experiment had given a jog to people’s
reasoning powers.
How should we naturally decide whether two events in different places
were simultaneous? One would naturally say: they are simultaneous if they
are seen simultaneously by a person who is exactly half-way between them.
(There is no difficulty about the simultaneity of two events in the same
place, such, for example, as seeing a light and hearing a noise.) Suppose
two flashes of lightning fall in two different places, say Greenwich
Observatory and Kew Observatory. Suppose that St. Paul’s is half-way
between them, and that the flashes appear simultaneous to an observer on
the dome of St. Paul’s. In that case, a man at Kew will see the Kew flash
CLOCKS AND FOOT RULES
U ntil the advent of the special theory of relativity, no one had thought
that there could be any ambiguity in the statement that two events in
different places happened at the same time. It might be admitted that,
if the places were very far apart, there might be difficulty in finding out for
certain whether the events were simultaneous, but every one thought the
meaning of the question perfectly definite. It turned out, however, that this
was a mistake. Two events in distant places may appear simultaneous to one
observer who has taken all due precautions to insure accuracy (and, in
particular, has allowed for the velocity of light), while another equally
careful observer may judge that the first event preceded the second, and still
another may judge that the second preceded the first. This would happen if
the three observers were all moving rapidly relatively to each other. It
would not be the case that one of them would be right and the other two
wrong: they would all be equally right. The time order of events is in part
dependent upon the observer; it is not always and altogether an intrinsic
relation between the events themselves. Einstein has shown, not only that
this view accounts for the phenomena, but also that it is the one which
ought to have resulted from careful reasoning based upon the old data. In
actual fact, however, no one noticed the logical basis of the theory of
relativity until the odd results of experiment had given a jog to people’s
reasoning powers.
How should we naturally decide whether two events in different places
were simultaneous? One would naturally say: they are simultaneous if they
are seen simultaneously by a person who is exactly half-way between them.
(There is no difficulty about the simultaneity of two events in the same
place, such, for example, as seeing a light and hearing a noise.) Suppose
two flashes of lightning fall in two different places, say Greenwich
Observatory and Kew Observatory. Suppose that St. Paul’s is half-way
between them, and that the flashes appear simultaneous to an observer on
the dome of St. Paul’s. In that case, a man at Kew will see the Kew flash
Page 29
first, and a man at Greenwich will see the Greenwich flash first, because of
the time taken by light to travel over the intervening distance. But all three,
if they are ideally accurate observers, will judge that the two flashes were
simultaneous, because they will make the necessary allowance for the time
of transmission of the light. (I am assuming a degree of accuracy far beyond
human powers.) Thus, so far as observers on the earth are concerned, the
definition of simultaneity will work well enough, so long as we are dealing
with events on the surface of the earth. It gives results which are consistent
with each other, and can be used for terrestrial physics in all problems in
which we can ignore the fact that the earth moves.
But our definition is no longer so satisfactory when we have two sets of
observers in rapid motion relatively to each other. Suppose we see what
would happen if we substitute sound for light, and defined two occurrences
as simultaneous when they are heard simultaneously by a man half-way
between them. This alters nothing in the principle, but makes the matter
easier owing to the much slower velocity of sound. Let us suppose that on a
foggy night two men belonging to a gang of brigands shoot the guard and
engine driver of a train. The guard is at the end of the train; the brigands are
on the line, and shoot their victims at close quarters. An old gentleman who
is exactly in the middle of the train hears the two shots simultaneously. You
would say, therefore, that the two shots were simultaneous. But a station
master who is exactly half-way between the two brigands hears the shot
which kills the guard first. An Australian millionaire uncle of the guard and
the engine driver (who are cousins) has left his whole fortune to the guard,
or, should he die first, to the engine driver. Vast sums are involved in the
question of which died first. The case goes to the House of Lords, and the
lawyers on both sides, having been educated at Oxford, are agreed that
either the old gentleman or the station master must have been mistaken. In
fact, both may perfectly well be right. The train travels away from the shot
at the guard, and towards the shot at the engine driver; therefore the noise of
the shot at the guard has farther to go before reaching the old gentleman
than the shot at the engine driver has. Therefore if the old gentleman is right
in saying that he heard the two reports simultaneously, the station master
must be right in saying that he heard the shot at the guard first.
We, who live on the earth, would naturally, in such a case, prefer the
view of simultaneity obtained from a person at rest on the earth to the view
the time taken by light to travel over the intervening distance. But all three,
if they are ideally accurate observers, will judge that the two flashes were
simultaneous, because they will make the necessary allowance for the time
of transmission of the light. (I am assuming a degree of accuracy far beyond
human powers.) Thus, so far as observers on the earth are concerned, the
definition of simultaneity will work well enough, so long as we are dealing
with events on the surface of the earth. It gives results which are consistent
with each other, and can be used for terrestrial physics in all problems in
which we can ignore the fact that the earth moves.
But our definition is no longer so satisfactory when we have two sets of
observers in rapid motion relatively to each other. Suppose we see what
would happen if we substitute sound for light, and defined two occurrences
as simultaneous when they are heard simultaneously by a man half-way
between them. This alters nothing in the principle, but makes the matter
easier owing to the much slower velocity of sound. Let us suppose that on a
foggy night two men belonging to a gang of brigands shoot the guard and
engine driver of a train. The guard is at the end of the train; the brigands are
on the line, and shoot their victims at close quarters. An old gentleman who
is exactly in the middle of the train hears the two shots simultaneously. You
would say, therefore, that the two shots were simultaneous. But a station
master who is exactly half-way between the two brigands hears the shot
which kills the guard first. An Australian millionaire uncle of the guard and
the engine driver (who are cousins) has left his whole fortune to the guard,
or, should he die first, to the engine driver. Vast sums are involved in the
question of which died first. The case goes to the House of Lords, and the
lawyers on both sides, having been educated at Oxford, are agreed that
either the old gentleman or the station master must have been mistaken. In
fact, both may perfectly well be right. The train travels away from the shot
at the guard, and towards the shot at the engine driver; therefore the noise of
the shot at the guard has farther to go before reaching the old gentleman
than the shot at the engine driver has. Therefore if the old gentleman is right
in saying that he heard the two reports simultaneously, the station master
must be right in saying that he heard the shot at the guard first.
We, who live on the earth, would naturally, in such a case, prefer the
view of simultaneity obtained from a person at rest on the earth to the view
Page 30
of a person traveling in a train. But in theoretical physics no such parochial
prejudices are permissible. A physicist on a comet, if there were one, would
have just as good a right to his view of simultaneity as an earthly physicist
has to his, but the results would differ, in just the same sort of way as in our
illustration of the train and the shots. The train is not any more “really” in
motion than the earth; there is no “really” about it. You might imagine a
rabbit and a hippopotamus arguing as to whether man is “really” a large
animal; each would think his own point of view the natural one, and the
other a pure flight of fancy. There is just as little substance in an argument
as to whether the earth or the train is “really” in motion. And, therefore,
when we are defining simultaneity between distant events, we have no right
to pick and choose among different bodies to be used in defining the point
half-way between the events. All bodies have an equal right to be chosen.
But if, for one body, the two events are simultaneous according to the
definition, there will be other bodies for which the first precedes the second,
and still others for which the second precedes the first. We cannot therefore
say unambiguously that two events in distant places are simultaneous. Such
a statement only acquires a definite meaning in relation to a definite
observer. It belongs to the subjective part of our observation of physical
phenomena, not to the objective part which is to enter into physical laws.
This question of time in different places is perhaps, for the imagination,
the most difficult aspect of the theory of relativity. We are accustomed to
the idea that everything can be dated. Historians make use of the fact that
there was an eclipse of the sun visible in China on August 29 in the year
776 B. C.[1] No doubt astronomers could tell the exact hour and minute
when the eclipse began to be total at any given spot in North China. And it
seems obvious that we can speak of the positions of the planets at a given
instant. The Newtonian theory enables us to calculate the distance between
the earth and (say) Jupiter at a given time by the Greenwich clocks; this
enables us to know how long light takes at that time to travel from Jupiter to
the earth—say half an hour; this enables us to infer that half an hour ago
Jupiter was where we see it now. All this seems obvious. But in fact it only
works in practice because the relative velocities of the planets are very
small compared with the velocity of light. When we judge that an event on
the earth and an event on Jupiter have happened at the same time—for
example, that Jupiter eclipsed one of his moons when the Greenwich clocks
showed twelve midnight—a person moving rapidly relatively to the earth
prejudices are permissible. A physicist on a comet, if there were one, would
have just as good a right to his view of simultaneity as an earthly physicist
has to his, but the results would differ, in just the same sort of way as in our
illustration of the train and the shots. The train is not any more “really” in
motion than the earth; there is no “really” about it. You might imagine a
rabbit and a hippopotamus arguing as to whether man is “really” a large
animal; each would think his own point of view the natural one, and the
other a pure flight of fancy. There is just as little substance in an argument
as to whether the earth or the train is “really” in motion. And, therefore,
when we are defining simultaneity between distant events, we have no right
to pick and choose among different bodies to be used in defining the point
half-way between the events. All bodies have an equal right to be chosen.
But if, for one body, the two events are simultaneous according to the
definition, there will be other bodies for which the first precedes the second,
and still others for which the second precedes the first. We cannot therefore
say unambiguously that two events in distant places are simultaneous. Such
a statement only acquires a definite meaning in relation to a definite
observer. It belongs to the subjective part of our observation of physical
phenomena, not to the objective part which is to enter into physical laws.
This question of time in different places is perhaps, for the imagination,
the most difficult aspect of the theory of relativity. We are accustomed to
the idea that everything can be dated. Historians make use of the fact that
there was an eclipse of the sun visible in China on August 29 in the year
776 B. C.[1] No doubt astronomers could tell the exact hour and minute
when the eclipse began to be total at any given spot in North China. And it
seems obvious that we can speak of the positions of the planets at a given
instant. The Newtonian theory enables us to calculate the distance between
the earth and (say) Jupiter at a given time by the Greenwich clocks; this
enables us to know how long light takes at that time to travel from Jupiter to
the earth—say half an hour; this enables us to infer that half an hour ago
Jupiter was where we see it now. All this seems obvious. But in fact it only
works in practice because the relative velocities of the planets are very
small compared with the velocity of light. When we judge that an event on
the earth and an event on Jupiter have happened at the same time—for
example, that Jupiter eclipsed one of his moons when the Greenwich clocks
showed twelve midnight—a person moving rapidly relatively to the earth
Page 31
would judge differently, assuming that both he and we had made the proper
allowance for the velocity of light. And naturally the disagreement about
simultaneity involves a disagreement about periods of time. If we judged
that two events on Jupiter were separated by twenty-four hours, another
person might judge that they were separated by a longer time, if he were
moving rapidly relatively to Jupiter and the earth.
The universal cosmic time which used to be taken for granted is thus no
longer admissible. For each body, there is a definite time order for the
events in its neighborhood; this may be called the “proper” time for that
body. Our own experience is governed by the proper time for our own body.
As we all remain very nearly stationary on the earth, the proper times of
different human beings agree, and can be lumped together as terrestrial
time. But this is only the time appropriate to large bodies on the earth. For
Beta-particles in laboratories, quite different times would be wanted; it is
because we insist upon using our own time that these particles seem to
increase in mass with rapid motion. From their own point of view, their
mass remains constant, and it is we who suddenly grow thin or corpulent.
The history of a physicist as observed by a Beta-particle would resemble
Gulliver’s travels.
The question now arises: what really is measured by a clock? When we
speak of a clock in the theory of relativity, we do not mean only clocks
made by human hands: we mean anything which goes through some regular
periodic performance. The earth is a clock, because it rotates once in every
twenty-three hours and fifty-six minutes. An atom is a clock, because the
electrons go round the nucleus a certain number of times in a second; its
properties as a clock are exhibited to us in its spectrum, which is due to
light waves of various frequencies. The world is full of periodic
occurrences, and fundamental mechanisms, such as atoms, show an
extraordinary similarity in different parts of the universe. Any one of these
periodic occurrences may be used for measuring time; the only advantage
of humanly manufactured clocks is that they are specially easy to observe.
One question is: If cosmic time is abandoned, what is really measured by a
clock in the wide sense that we have just given to the term?
Each clock gives a correct measure of its own “proper” time, which, as
we shall see presently, is an important physical quantity. But it does not
give an accurate measure of any physical quantity connected with events on
allowance for the velocity of light. And naturally the disagreement about
simultaneity involves a disagreement about periods of time. If we judged
that two events on Jupiter were separated by twenty-four hours, another
person might judge that they were separated by a longer time, if he were
moving rapidly relatively to Jupiter and the earth.
The universal cosmic time which used to be taken for granted is thus no
longer admissible. For each body, there is a definite time order for the
events in its neighborhood; this may be called the “proper” time for that
body. Our own experience is governed by the proper time for our own body.
As we all remain very nearly stationary on the earth, the proper times of
different human beings agree, and can be lumped together as terrestrial
time. But this is only the time appropriate to large bodies on the earth. For
Beta-particles in laboratories, quite different times would be wanted; it is
because we insist upon using our own time that these particles seem to
increase in mass with rapid motion. From their own point of view, their
mass remains constant, and it is we who suddenly grow thin or corpulent.
The history of a physicist as observed by a Beta-particle would resemble
Gulliver’s travels.
The question now arises: what really is measured by a clock? When we
speak of a clock in the theory of relativity, we do not mean only clocks
made by human hands: we mean anything which goes through some regular
periodic performance. The earth is a clock, because it rotates once in every
twenty-three hours and fifty-six minutes. An atom is a clock, because the
electrons go round the nucleus a certain number of times in a second; its
properties as a clock are exhibited to us in its spectrum, which is due to
light waves of various frequencies. The world is full of periodic
occurrences, and fundamental mechanisms, such as atoms, show an
extraordinary similarity in different parts of the universe. Any one of these
periodic occurrences may be used for measuring time; the only advantage
of humanly manufactured clocks is that they are specially easy to observe.
One question is: If cosmic time is abandoned, what is really measured by a
clock in the wide sense that we have just given to the term?
Each clock gives a correct measure of its own “proper” time, which, as
we shall see presently, is an important physical quantity. But it does not
give an accurate measure of any physical quantity connected with events on
Page 32
bodies that are moving rapidly in relation to it. It gives one datum towards
the discovery of a physical quantity connected with such events, but another
datum is required, and this has to be derived from measurement of distances
in space. Distances in space, like periods of time, are in general not
objective physical facts, but partly dependent upon the observer. How this
comes about must now be explained.
First of all, we have to think of the distance between two events, not
between two bodies. This follows at once from what we have found as
regards time. If two bodies are moving relatively to each other—and this is
really always the case—the distance between them will be continually
changing, so that we can only speak of the distance between them at a given
time. If you are in a train traveling towards Edinburgh, we can speak of
your distance from Edinburgh at a given time. But, as we said, different
observers will judge differently as to what is the “same” time for an event in
the train and an event in Edinburgh. This makes the measurement of
distances relative, in just the same way as the measurement of times has
been found to be relative. We commonly think that there are two separate
kinds of interval between two events, an interval in space and an interval in
time: between your departure from London and your arrival in Edinburgh,
there are 400 miles and ten hours. We have already seen that another
observer will judge the time differently; it is even more obvious that he will
judge the distance differently. An observer in the sun will think the motion
of the train quite trivial, and will judge that you have traveled the distance
traveled by the earth in its orbit and its diurnal rotation. On the other hand, a
flea in the railway carriage will judge that you have not moved at all in
space, but have afforded him a period of pleasure which he will measure by
his “proper” time, not by Greenwich Observatory. It cannot be said that you
or the sun dweller or the flea are mistaken: each is equally justified, and is
only wrong if he ascribes an objective validity to his subjective measures.
The distance in space between two events is, therefore, not in itself a
physical fact. But, as we shall see, there is a physical fact which can be
inferred from the distance in time together with the distance in space. This
is what is called the “interval” in space-time.
Taking any two events in the universe, there are two different
possibilities as to the relation between them. It may be physically possible
for a body to travel so as to be present at both events, or it may not. This
the discovery of a physical quantity connected with such events, but another
datum is required, and this has to be derived from measurement of distances
in space. Distances in space, like periods of time, are in general not
objective physical facts, but partly dependent upon the observer. How this
comes about must now be explained.
First of all, we have to think of the distance between two events, not
between two bodies. This follows at once from what we have found as
regards time. If two bodies are moving relatively to each other—and this is
really always the case—the distance between them will be continually
changing, so that we can only speak of the distance between them at a given
time. If you are in a train traveling towards Edinburgh, we can speak of
your distance from Edinburgh at a given time. But, as we said, different
observers will judge differently as to what is the “same” time for an event in
the train and an event in Edinburgh. This makes the measurement of
distances relative, in just the same way as the measurement of times has
been found to be relative. We commonly think that there are two separate
kinds of interval between two events, an interval in space and an interval in
time: between your departure from London and your arrival in Edinburgh,
there are 400 miles and ten hours. We have already seen that another
observer will judge the time differently; it is even more obvious that he will
judge the distance differently. An observer in the sun will think the motion
of the train quite trivial, and will judge that you have traveled the distance
traveled by the earth in its orbit and its diurnal rotation. On the other hand, a
flea in the railway carriage will judge that you have not moved at all in
space, but have afforded him a period of pleasure which he will measure by
his “proper” time, not by Greenwich Observatory. It cannot be said that you
or the sun dweller or the flea are mistaken: each is equally justified, and is
only wrong if he ascribes an objective validity to his subjective measures.
The distance in space between two events is, therefore, not in itself a
physical fact. But, as we shall see, there is a physical fact which can be
inferred from the distance in time together with the distance in space. This
is what is called the “interval” in space-time.
Taking any two events in the universe, there are two different
possibilities as to the relation between them. It may be physically possible
for a body to travel so as to be present at both events, or it may not. This
Page 33
depends upon the fact that no body can travel as fast as light. Suppose, for
example, that it were possible to send out a flash of light from the earth and
have it reflected back from the moon. The time between the sending of the
flash and the return of the reflection would be about two and a half seconds.
No body could travel so fast as to be present on the earth during any part of
those two and a half seconds and also present on the moon at the moment of
the arrival of the flash, because in order to do so the body would have to
travel faster than light. But theoretically a body could be present on the
earth at any time before or after those two and a half seconds and also
present on the moon at the time when the flash arrived. When it is
physically impossible for a body to travel so as to be present at both events,
we shall say that the interval[2] between the two events is “space-like”;
when it is physically possible for a body to be present at both events, we
shall say that the interval between the two events is “time-like.” When the
interval is “space-like,” it is possible for a body to move in such a way that
an observer on the body will judge the two events to be simultaneous. In
that case, the “interval” between the two events is what such an observer
will judge to be the distance in space between them. When the interval is
“time-like,” a body can be present at both events; in that case, the “interval”
between the two events is what an observer on the body will judge to be the
time between them, that is to say, it is his “proper” time between the two
events. There is a limiting case between the two, when the two events are
parts of one light flash—or, as we might say, when the one event is the
seeing of the other. In that case, the interval between the two events is zero.
There are thus three cases. (1) It may be possible for a ray of light to be
present at both events; this happens whenever one of them is the seeing of
the other. In this case the interval between the two events is zero. (2) It may
happen that no body can travel from one event to the other, because in order
to do so it would have to travel faster than light. In that case, it is always
physically possible for a body to travel in such a way that an observer on
the body would judge the two events to be simultaneous. The interval is
what he would judge to be the distance in space between the two events.
Such an interval is called “space-like.” (3) It may be physically possible for
a body to travel so as to be present at both events; in that case, the interval
between them is what an observer on such a body will judge to be the time
between them. Such an interval is called “time-like.”
example, that it were possible to send out a flash of light from the earth and
have it reflected back from the moon. The time between the sending of the
flash and the return of the reflection would be about two and a half seconds.
No body could travel so fast as to be present on the earth during any part of
those two and a half seconds and also present on the moon at the moment of
the arrival of the flash, because in order to do so the body would have to
travel faster than light. But theoretically a body could be present on the
earth at any time before or after those two and a half seconds and also
present on the moon at the time when the flash arrived. When it is
physically impossible for a body to travel so as to be present at both events,
we shall say that the interval[2] between the two events is “space-like”;
when it is physically possible for a body to be present at both events, we
shall say that the interval between the two events is “time-like.” When the
interval is “space-like,” it is possible for a body to move in such a way that
an observer on the body will judge the two events to be simultaneous. In
that case, the “interval” between the two events is what such an observer
will judge to be the distance in space between them. When the interval is
“time-like,” a body can be present at both events; in that case, the “interval”
between the two events is what an observer on the body will judge to be the
time between them, that is to say, it is his “proper” time between the two
events. There is a limiting case between the two, when the two events are
parts of one light flash—or, as we might say, when the one event is the
seeing of the other. In that case, the interval between the two events is zero.
There are thus three cases. (1) It may be possible for a ray of light to be
present at both events; this happens whenever one of them is the seeing of
the other. In this case the interval between the two events is zero. (2) It may
happen that no body can travel from one event to the other, because in order
to do so it would have to travel faster than light. In that case, it is always
physically possible for a body to travel in such a way that an observer on
the body would judge the two events to be simultaneous. The interval is
what he would judge to be the distance in space between the two events.
Such an interval is called “space-like.” (3) It may be physically possible for
a body to travel so as to be present at both events; in that case, the interval
between them is what an observer on such a body will judge to be the time
between them. Such an interval is called “time-like.”
Page 34
The interval between two events is a physical fact about them, not
dependent upon the particular circumstances of the observer.
There are two forms of the theory of relativity, the special and the
general. The former is in general only approximate, but is exact at great
distances from gravitating matter. When the special theory can be applied,
the interval can be calculated when we know the distance in space and the
distance in time between the two events, estimated by any observer. If the
distance in space is greater than the distance that light would have traveled
in the time, the separation is space-like. Then the following construction
gives the interval between the two events: Draw a line AB as long as the
distance that light would travel in the time; round A describe a circle whose
radius is the distance in space between the two events; through B draw BC
perpendicular to AB, meeting the circle in C. Then BC is the length of the
interval between the two events.
dependent upon the particular circumstances of the observer.
There are two forms of the theory of relativity, the special and the
general. The former is in general only approximate, but is exact at great
distances from gravitating matter. When the special theory can be applied,
the interval can be calculated when we know the distance in space and the
distance in time between the two events, estimated by any observer. If the
distance in space is greater than the distance that light would have traveled
in the time, the separation is space-like. Then the following construction
gives the interval between the two events: Draw a line AB as long as the
distance that light would travel in the time; round A describe a circle whose
radius is the distance in space between the two events; through B draw BC
perpendicular to AB, meeting the circle in C. Then BC is the length of the
interval between the two events.
Page 35
When the distance is time-like, use the same figure, but let AC be now
the distance that light would travel in the time, while AB is the distance in
space between the two events. The interval between them is now the time
that light would take to travel the distance BC.
Although AB and AC are different for different observers, BC is the
same length for all observers, subject to corrections made by the general
theory. It represents the one interval in “space-time” which replaces the two
intervals in space and time of the older physics. So far, this notion of
interval may appear somewhat mysterious, but as we proceed it will grow
less so, and its reason in the nature of things will gradually emerge.
the distance that light would travel in the time, while AB is the distance in
space between the two events. The interval between them is now the time
that light would take to travel the distance BC.
Although AB and AC are different for different observers, BC is the
same length for all observers, subject to corrections made by the general
theory. It represents the one interval in “space-time” which replaces the two
intervals in space and time of the older physics. So far, this notion of
interval may appear somewhat mysterious, but as we proceed it will grow
less so, and its reason in the nature of things will gradually emerge.
Page 36
CHAPTER V:
SPACE-TIME
E verybody who has ever heard of relativity knows the phrase “space-
time,” and knows that the correct thing is to use this phrase when
formerly we should have said “space and time.” But very few people
who are not mathematicians have any clear idea of what is meant by this
change of phraseology. Before dealing further with the special theory of
relativity, I want to try to convey to the reader what is involved in the new
phrase “space-time,” because that is, from a philosophical and imaginative
point of view, perhaps the most important of all the novelties that Einstein
has introduced.
Suppose you wish to say where and when some event has occurred—
say an explosion on an airship—you will have to mention four quantities,
say the latitude and longitude, the height above the ground, and the time.
According to the traditional view, the first three of these give the position in
space, while the fourth gives the position in time. The three quantities that
give the position in space may be assigned in all sorts of ways. You might,
for instance, take the plane of the equator, the plane of the meridian of
Greenwich, and the plane of the ninetieth meridian, and say how far the
airship was from each of these planes; these three distances would be what
are called “Cartesian co-ordinates,” after Descartes. You might take any
other three planes all at right angles to each other, and you would still have
Cartesian co-ordinates. Or you might take the distance from London to a
point vertically below the airship, the direction of this distance (northeast,
west-southwest, or whatever it might be), and the height of the airship
above the ground. There are an infinite number of such ways of fixing the
position in space, all equally legitimate; the choice between them is merely
one of convenience.
When people said that space had three dimensions, they meant just this:
that three quantities were necessary in order to specify the position of a
point in space, but that the method of assigning these quantities was wholly
arbitrary.
SPACE-TIME
E verybody who has ever heard of relativity knows the phrase “space-
time,” and knows that the correct thing is to use this phrase when
formerly we should have said “space and time.” But very few people
who are not mathematicians have any clear idea of what is meant by this
change of phraseology. Before dealing further with the special theory of
relativity, I want to try to convey to the reader what is involved in the new
phrase “space-time,” because that is, from a philosophical and imaginative
point of view, perhaps the most important of all the novelties that Einstein
has introduced.
Suppose you wish to say where and when some event has occurred—
say an explosion on an airship—you will have to mention four quantities,
say the latitude and longitude, the height above the ground, and the time.
According to the traditional view, the first three of these give the position in
space, while the fourth gives the position in time. The three quantities that
give the position in space may be assigned in all sorts of ways. You might,
for instance, take the plane of the equator, the plane of the meridian of
Greenwich, and the plane of the ninetieth meridian, and say how far the
airship was from each of these planes; these three distances would be what
are called “Cartesian co-ordinates,” after Descartes. You might take any
other three planes all at right angles to each other, and you would still have
Cartesian co-ordinates. Or you might take the distance from London to a
point vertically below the airship, the direction of this distance (northeast,
west-southwest, or whatever it might be), and the height of the airship
above the ground. There are an infinite number of such ways of fixing the
position in space, all equally legitimate; the choice between them is merely
one of convenience.
When people said that space had three dimensions, they meant just this:
that three quantities were necessary in order to specify the position of a
point in space, but that the method of assigning these quantities was wholly
arbitrary.
Page 37
With regard to time, the matter was thought to be quite different. The
only arbitrary elements in the reckoning of time were the unit, and the point
of time from which the reckoning started. One could reckon in Greenwich
time, or in Paris time, or in New York time; that made a difference as to the
point of departure. One could reckon in seconds, minutes, hours, days, or
years; that was a difference of unit. Both these were obvious and trivial
matters. There was nothing corresponding to the liberty of choice as to the
method of fixing position in space. And, in particular, it was thought that
the method of fixing position in space and the method of fixing position in
time could be made wholly independent of each other. For these reasons,
people regarded time and space as quite distinct.
The theory of relativity has changed this. There are now a number of
different ways of fixing position in time, which do not differ merely as to
the unit and the starting point. Indeed, as we have seen, if one event is
simultaneous with another in one reckoning, it will precede it in another,
and follow it in a third. Moreover, the space and time reckonings are no
longer independent of each other. If you alter the way of reckoning position
in space, you may also alter the time interval between two events. If you
alter the way of reckoning time, you may also alter the distance in space
between two events. Thus space and time are no longer independent, any
more than the three dimensions of space are. We still need four quantities to
determine the position of an event, but we cannot, as before, divide off one
of the four as quite independent of the other three.
It is not quite true to say that there is no longer any distinction between
time and space. As we have seen, there are time-like intervals and space-
like intervals. But the distinction is of a different sort from that which was
formerly assumed. There is no longer a universal time which can be applied
without ambiguity to any part of the universe; there are only the various
“proper” times of the various bodies in the universe, which agree
approximately for two bodies which are not in rapid relative motion, but
never agree exactly except for two bodies which are at rest relatively to
each other.
The picture of the world which is required for this new state of affairs is
as follows: Suppose an event E occurs to me, and simultaneously a flash of
light goes out from me in all directions. Anything that happens to any body
after the light from the flash has reached it is definitely after the event E in
only arbitrary elements in the reckoning of time were the unit, and the point
of time from which the reckoning started. One could reckon in Greenwich
time, or in Paris time, or in New York time; that made a difference as to the
point of departure. One could reckon in seconds, minutes, hours, days, or
years; that was a difference of unit. Both these were obvious and trivial
matters. There was nothing corresponding to the liberty of choice as to the
method of fixing position in space. And, in particular, it was thought that
the method of fixing position in space and the method of fixing position in
time could be made wholly independent of each other. For these reasons,
people regarded time and space as quite distinct.
The theory of relativity has changed this. There are now a number of
different ways of fixing position in time, which do not differ merely as to
the unit and the starting point. Indeed, as we have seen, if one event is
simultaneous with another in one reckoning, it will precede it in another,
and follow it in a third. Moreover, the space and time reckonings are no
longer independent of each other. If you alter the way of reckoning position
in space, you may also alter the time interval between two events. If you
alter the way of reckoning time, you may also alter the distance in space
between two events. Thus space and time are no longer independent, any
more than the three dimensions of space are. We still need four quantities to
determine the position of an event, but we cannot, as before, divide off one
of the four as quite independent of the other three.
It is not quite true to say that there is no longer any distinction between
time and space. As we have seen, there are time-like intervals and space-
like intervals. But the distinction is of a different sort from that which was
formerly assumed. There is no longer a universal time which can be applied
without ambiguity to any part of the universe; there are only the various
“proper” times of the various bodies in the universe, which agree
approximately for two bodies which are not in rapid relative motion, but
never agree exactly except for two bodies which are at rest relatively to
each other.
The picture of the world which is required for this new state of affairs is
as follows: Suppose an event E occurs to me, and simultaneously a flash of
light goes out from me in all directions. Anything that happens to any body
after the light from the flash has reached it is definitely after the event E in
Page 38
any system of reckoning time. Any event anywhere which I could have seen
before the event E occurred to me is definitely before the event E in any
system of reckoning time. But any event which happened in the intervening
time is not definitely either before or after the event E. To make the matter
definite: suppose I could observe a person in Sirius, and he could observe
me. Anything which he does, and which I see before the event E occurs to
me, is definitely before E; anything he does after he has seen the event E is
definitely after E. But anything that he does before he sees the event E, but
so that I see it after the event E has happened, is not definitely before or
after E. Since light takes many years to travel from Sirius to the earth, this
gives a period of twice as many years in Sirius which may be called
“contemporary” with E, since these years are not definitely before or after
E.
Dr. A. A. Robb, in his Theory of Time and Space, suggests a point of
view which may or may not be philosophically fundamental, but is at any
rate a help in understanding the state of affairs we have been describing. He
maintains that one event can only be said to be definitely before another if it
can influence that other in some way. Now influences spread from a center
at varying rates. Newspapers exercise an influence emanating from London
at an average rate of about twenty miles an hour—rather more for long
distances. Anything a man does because of what he reads in the newspaper
is clearly subsequent to the printing of the newspaper. Sounds travel much
faster: it would be possible to arrange a series of loud speakers along the
main roads, and have newspapers shouted from each to the next. But
telegraphing is quicker, and wireless telegraphy travels with the velocity of
light, so that nothing quicker can ever be hoped for. Now what a man does
in consequence of receiving a wireless message he does after the message
was sent; the meaning here is quite independent of conventions as to the
measurement of time. But anything that he does while the message is on its
way cannot be influenced by the sending of the message, and cannot
influence the sender until some little time after he sent the message. That is
to say, if two bodies are widely separated, neither can influence the other
except after a certain lapse of time; what happens before that time has
elapsed cannot affect the distant body. Suppose, for instance, that some
notable event happens on the sun: there is a period of sixteen minutes on the
earth during which no event on the earth can have influenced or been
influenced by the said notable event on the sun. This gives a substantial
before the event E occurred to me is definitely before the event E in any
system of reckoning time. But any event which happened in the intervening
time is not definitely either before or after the event E. To make the matter
definite: suppose I could observe a person in Sirius, and he could observe
me. Anything which he does, and which I see before the event E occurs to
me, is definitely before E; anything he does after he has seen the event E is
definitely after E. But anything that he does before he sees the event E, but
so that I see it after the event E has happened, is not definitely before or
after E. Since light takes many years to travel from Sirius to the earth, this
gives a period of twice as many years in Sirius which may be called
“contemporary” with E, since these years are not definitely before or after
E.
Dr. A. A. Robb, in his Theory of Time and Space, suggests a point of
view which may or may not be philosophically fundamental, but is at any
rate a help in understanding the state of affairs we have been describing. He
maintains that one event can only be said to be definitely before another if it
can influence that other in some way. Now influences spread from a center
at varying rates. Newspapers exercise an influence emanating from London
at an average rate of about twenty miles an hour—rather more for long
distances. Anything a man does because of what he reads in the newspaper
is clearly subsequent to the printing of the newspaper. Sounds travel much
faster: it would be possible to arrange a series of loud speakers along the
main roads, and have newspapers shouted from each to the next. But
telegraphing is quicker, and wireless telegraphy travels with the velocity of
light, so that nothing quicker can ever be hoped for. Now what a man does
in consequence of receiving a wireless message he does after the message
was sent; the meaning here is quite independent of conventions as to the
measurement of time. But anything that he does while the message is on its
way cannot be influenced by the sending of the message, and cannot
influence the sender until some little time after he sent the message. That is
to say, if two bodies are widely separated, neither can influence the other
except after a certain lapse of time; what happens before that time has
elapsed cannot affect the distant body. Suppose, for instance, that some
notable event happens on the sun: there is a period of sixteen minutes on the
earth during which no event on the earth can have influenced or been
influenced by the said notable event on the sun. This gives a substantial
Page 39
ground for regarding that period of sixteen minutes on the earth as neither
before nor after the event on the sun.
The paradoxes of the special theory of relativity are only paradoxes
because we are unaccustomed to the point of view, and in the habit of
taking things for granted when we have no right to do so. This is especially
true as regards the measurement of lengths. In daily life, our way of
measuring lengths is to apply a foot rule or some other measure. At the
moment when the foot rule is applied, it is at rest relatively to the body
which is being measured. Consequently the length that we arrive at by
measurement is the “proper” length, that is to say, the length as estimated
by an observer who shares the motion of the body. We never, in ordinary
life, have to tackle the problem of measuring a body which is in continual
motion. And even if we did, the velocities of visible bodies on the earth are
so small relatively to the earth that the anomalies dealt with by the theory of
relativity would not appear. But in astronomy, or in the investigation of
atomic structure, we are faced with problems which cannot be tackled in
this way. Not being Joshua, we cannot make the sun stand still while we
measure it; if we are to estimate its size, we must do so while it is in motion
relatively to us. And similarly if you want to estimate the size of an
electron, you have to do so while it is in rapid motion, because it never
stands still for a moment. This is the sort of problem with which the theory
of relativity is concerned. Measurement with a foot rule, when it is possible,
gives always the same result, because it gives the “proper” length of a body.
But when this method is not possible, we find that curious things happen,
particularly if the body to be measured is moving very fast relatively to the
observer. A figure like the one at the end of the previous chapter will help
us to understand the state of affairs.
before nor after the event on the sun.
The paradoxes of the special theory of relativity are only paradoxes
because we are unaccustomed to the point of view, and in the habit of
taking things for granted when we have no right to do so. This is especially
true as regards the measurement of lengths. In daily life, our way of
measuring lengths is to apply a foot rule or some other measure. At the
moment when the foot rule is applied, it is at rest relatively to the body
which is being measured. Consequently the length that we arrive at by
measurement is the “proper” length, that is to say, the length as estimated
by an observer who shares the motion of the body. We never, in ordinary
life, have to tackle the problem of measuring a body which is in continual
motion. And even if we did, the velocities of visible bodies on the earth are
so small relatively to the earth that the anomalies dealt with by the theory of
relativity would not appear. But in astronomy, or in the investigation of
atomic structure, we are faced with problems which cannot be tackled in
this way. Not being Joshua, we cannot make the sun stand still while we
measure it; if we are to estimate its size, we must do so while it is in motion
relatively to us. And similarly if you want to estimate the size of an
electron, you have to do so while it is in rapid motion, because it never
stands still for a moment. This is the sort of problem with which the theory
of relativity is concerned. Measurement with a foot rule, when it is possible,
gives always the same result, because it gives the “proper” length of a body.
But when this method is not possible, we find that curious things happen,
particularly if the body to be measured is moving very fast relatively to the
observer. A figure like the one at the end of the previous chapter will help
us to understand the state of affairs.
Page 40
Let us suppose that the body on which we wish to measure lengths is
moving relatively to ourselves, and that in one second it moves the distance
OM. Let us draw a circle round O whose radius is the distance that light
travels in a second. Through M draw MP perpendicular to OM, meeting the
circle in P. Thus OP is the distance that light travels in a second. The ratio
of OP to OM is the ratio of the velocity of light to the velocity of the body.
The ratio of OP to MP is the ratio in which apparent lengths are altered by
the motion. That is to say, if the observer judges that two points in the line
of motion on the moving body are at a distance from each other represented
by MP, a person moving with the body would judge that they were at a
distance represented (on the same scale) by OP. Distances on the moving
body at right angles to the line of motion are not affected by the motion.
The whole thing is reciprocal; that is to say, if an observer moving with the
body were to measure lengths on the previous observer’s body, they would
be altered in just the same proportion. When two bodies are moving
moving relatively to ourselves, and that in one second it moves the distance
OM. Let us draw a circle round O whose radius is the distance that light
travels in a second. Through M draw MP perpendicular to OM, meeting the
circle in P. Thus OP is the distance that light travels in a second. The ratio
of OP to OM is the ratio of the velocity of light to the velocity of the body.
The ratio of OP to MP is the ratio in which apparent lengths are altered by
the motion. That is to say, if the observer judges that two points in the line
of motion on the moving body are at a distance from each other represented
by MP, a person moving with the body would judge that they were at a
distance represented (on the same scale) by OP. Distances on the moving
body at right angles to the line of motion are not affected by the motion.
The whole thing is reciprocal; that is to say, if an observer moving with the
body were to measure lengths on the previous observer’s body, they would
be altered in just the same proportion. When two bodies are moving
Page 41
relatively to each other, lengths on either appear shorter to the other than to
themselves. This is the Fitzgerald contraction, which was first invented to
account for the result of the Michelson-Morley experiment. But it now
emerges naturally from the fact that the two observers do not make the
same judgment of simultaneity.
The way in which simultaneity comes in is this: We say that two points
on a body are a foot apart when we can simultaneously apply one end of a
foot rule to the one and the other end to the other. If, now, two people
disagree about simultaneity, and the body is in motion, they will obviously
get different results from their measurements. Thus the trouble about time is
at the bottom of the trouble about distance.
The ratio of OP to MP is the essential thing in all these matters. Times
and lengths and masses are all altered in this proportion when the body
concerned is in motion relatively to the observer. It will be seen that, if OM
is very much smaller than OP, that is to say, if the body is moving very
much more slowly than light, MP and OP are very nearly equal, so that the
alterations produced by the motion are very small. But if OM is nearly as
large as OP, that is to say, if the body is moving nearly as fast as light, MP
becomes very small compared to OP, and the effects become very great.
The apparent increase of mass in swiftly moving particles had been
observed, and the right formula had been found, before Einstein invented
his special theory of relativity. In fact, Lorentz had arrived at the formulæ
called the “Lorentz transformation,” which embody the whole mathematical
essence of the special theory of relativity. But it was Einstein who showed
that the whole thing was what we ought to have expected, and not a set of
makeshift devices to account for surprising experimental results.
Nevertheless, it must not be forgotten that experimental results were the
original motive of the whole theory, and have remained the ground for
undertaking the tremendous logical reconstruction involved in Einstein’s
theories.
We may now recapitulate the reasons which have made it necessary to
substitute “space-time” for space and time. The old separation of space and
time rested upon the belief that there was no ambiguity in saying that two
events in distant places happened at the same time; consequently it was
thought that we could describe the topography of the universe at a given
instant in purely spatial terms. But now that simultaneity has become
themselves. This is the Fitzgerald contraction, which was first invented to
account for the result of the Michelson-Morley experiment. But it now
emerges naturally from the fact that the two observers do not make the
same judgment of simultaneity.
The way in which simultaneity comes in is this: We say that two points
on a body are a foot apart when we can simultaneously apply one end of a
foot rule to the one and the other end to the other. If, now, two people
disagree about simultaneity, and the body is in motion, they will obviously
get different results from their measurements. Thus the trouble about time is
at the bottom of the trouble about distance.
The ratio of OP to MP is the essential thing in all these matters. Times
and lengths and masses are all altered in this proportion when the body
concerned is in motion relatively to the observer. It will be seen that, if OM
is very much smaller than OP, that is to say, if the body is moving very
much more slowly than light, MP and OP are very nearly equal, so that the
alterations produced by the motion are very small. But if OM is nearly as
large as OP, that is to say, if the body is moving nearly as fast as light, MP
becomes very small compared to OP, and the effects become very great.
The apparent increase of mass in swiftly moving particles had been
observed, and the right formula had been found, before Einstein invented
his special theory of relativity. In fact, Lorentz had arrived at the formulæ
called the “Lorentz transformation,” which embody the whole mathematical
essence of the special theory of relativity. But it was Einstein who showed
that the whole thing was what we ought to have expected, and not a set of
makeshift devices to account for surprising experimental results.
Nevertheless, it must not be forgotten that experimental results were the
original motive of the whole theory, and have remained the ground for
undertaking the tremendous logical reconstruction involved in Einstein’s
theories.
We may now recapitulate the reasons which have made it necessary to
substitute “space-time” for space and time. The old separation of space and
time rested upon the belief that there was no ambiguity in saying that two
events in distant places happened at the same time; consequently it was
thought that we could describe the topography of the universe at a given
instant in purely spatial terms. But now that simultaneity has become
Page 42
relative to a particular observer, this is no longer possible. What is, for one
observer, a description of the state of the world at a given instant, is, for
another observer, a series of events at various different times, whose
relations are not merely spatial but also temporal. For the same reason, we
are concerned with events, rather than with bodies. In the old theory, it was
possible to consider a number of bodies all at the same instant, and since the
time was the same for all of them it could be ignored. But now we cannot
do that if we are to obtain an objective account of physical occurrences. We
must mention the date at which a body is to be considered, and thus we
arrive at an “event,” that is to say, something which happens at a given
time. When we know the time and place of an event in one observer’s
system of reckoning, we can calculate its time and place according to
another observer. But we must know the time as well as the place, because
we can no longer ask what is its place for the new observer at the “same”
time as for the old observer. There is no such thing as the “same” time for
different observers, unless they are at rest relatively to each other. We need
four measurements to fix a position, and four measurements fix the position
of an event in space-time, not merely of a body in space. Three
measurements are not enough to fix any position. That is the essence of
what is meant by the substitution of space-time for space and time.
observer, a description of the state of the world at a given instant, is, for
another observer, a series of events at various different times, whose
relations are not merely spatial but also temporal. For the same reason, we
are concerned with events, rather than with bodies. In the old theory, it was
possible to consider a number of bodies all at the same instant, and since the
time was the same for all of them it could be ignored. But now we cannot
do that if we are to obtain an objective account of physical occurrences. We
must mention the date at which a body is to be considered, and thus we
arrive at an “event,” that is to say, something which happens at a given
time. When we know the time and place of an event in one observer’s
system of reckoning, we can calculate its time and place according to
another observer. But we must know the time as well as the place, because
we can no longer ask what is its place for the new observer at the “same”
time as for the old observer. There is no such thing as the “same” time for
different observers, unless they are at rest relatively to each other. We need
four measurements to fix a position, and four measurements fix the position
of an event in space-time, not merely of a body in space. Three
measurements are not enough to fix any position. That is the essence of
what is meant by the substitution of space-time for space and time.
Page 43
CHAPTER VI:
THE SPECIAL THEORY
OF RELATIVITY
T
he special theory of relativity arose as a way of accounting for the facts
of electromagnetism. We have here a somewhat curious history. In the
eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries the theory of electricity was
wholly dominated by the Newtonian analogy. Two electric charges attract
each other if they are of different kinds, one positive and one negative, but
repel each other if they are of the same kind; in each case, the force varies
as the inverse square of the distance, as in the case of gravitation. This force
was conceived as an action at a distance, until Faraday, by a number of
remarkable experiments, demonstrated the effect of the intervening
medium. Faraday was no mathematician; Clerk Maxwell first gave a
mathematical form to the results suggested by Faraday’s experiments.
Moreover Clerk Maxwell gave grounds for thinking that light is an
electromagnetic phenomenon, consisting of electromagnetic waves. The
medium for the transmission of electromagnetic effects could therefore be
taken to be the ether, which had long been assumed for the transmission of
light. The correctness of Maxwell’s theory of light was proved by the
experiments of Hertz in manufacturing electromagnetic waves; these
experiments afforded the basis for wireless telegraphy. So far, we have a
record of triumphant progress, in which theory and experiment alternately
assume the leading role. At the time of Hertz’s experiments, the ether
seemed securely established, and in just as strong a position as any other
scientific hypothesis not capable of direct verification. But a new set of
facts began to be discovered, and gradually the whole picture was changed.
The movement which culminated with Hertz was a movement for
making everything continuous. The ether was continuous, the waves in it
were continuous, and it was hoped that matter would be found to consist of
some continuous structure in the ether. Then came the discovery of the
electron, a small finite unit of negative electricity, and the proton, a small
finite unit of positive electricity. The most modern view is that electricity is
THE SPECIAL THEORY
OF RELATIVITY
T
he special theory of relativity arose as a way of accounting for the facts
of electromagnetism. We have here a somewhat curious history. In the
eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries the theory of electricity was
wholly dominated by the Newtonian analogy. Two electric charges attract
each other if they are of different kinds, one positive and one negative, but
repel each other if they are of the same kind; in each case, the force varies
as the inverse square of the distance, as in the case of gravitation. This force
was conceived as an action at a distance, until Faraday, by a number of
remarkable experiments, demonstrated the effect of the intervening
medium. Faraday was no mathematician; Clerk Maxwell first gave a
mathematical form to the results suggested by Faraday’s experiments.
Moreover Clerk Maxwell gave grounds for thinking that light is an
electromagnetic phenomenon, consisting of electromagnetic waves. The
medium for the transmission of electromagnetic effects could therefore be
taken to be the ether, which had long been assumed for the transmission of
light. The correctness of Maxwell’s theory of light was proved by the
experiments of Hertz in manufacturing electromagnetic waves; these
experiments afforded the basis for wireless telegraphy. So far, we have a
record of triumphant progress, in which theory and experiment alternately
assume the leading role. At the time of Hertz’s experiments, the ether
seemed securely established, and in just as strong a position as any other
scientific hypothesis not capable of direct verification. But a new set of
facts began to be discovered, and gradually the whole picture was changed.
The movement which culminated with Hertz was a movement for
making everything continuous. The ether was continuous, the waves in it
were continuous, and it was hoped that matter would be found to consist of
some continuous structure in the ether. Then came the discovery of the
electron, a small finite unit of negative electricity, and the proton, a small
finite unit of positive electricity. The most modern view is that electricity is
Page 44
never found except in the form of electrons and protons; all electrons have
the same amount of negative electricity, and all protons have an exactly
equal and opposite amount of positive electricity. It appeared that an electric
current, which had been thought of as a continuous phenomenon, consists
of electrons traveling one way and positive ions traveling the other way; it
is no more strictly continuous than the stream of people going up and down
an escalator. Then came the discovery of quanta, which seems to show a
fundamental discontinuity in all such natural processes as can be measured
with sufficient precision. Thus physics has had to digest new facts and face
new problems.
But the problems raised by the electron and the quantum are not those
that the theory of relativity can solve, at any rate at present; as yet, it throws
no light upon the discontinuities which exist in nature. The problems solved
by the special theory of relativity are typified by the Michelson-Morley
experiment. Assuming the correctness of Maxwell’s theory of
electromagnetism, there should have been certain discoverable effects of
motion through the ether; in fact, there were none. Then there was the
observed fact that a body in very rapid motion appears to increase its mass;
the increase is in the ratio of OP to MP in the figure in the preceding
chapter. Facts of this sort gradually accumulated, until it became imperative
to find some theory which would account for them all.
Maxwell’s theory reduced itself to certain equations, known as
“Maxwell’s equations.” Through all the revolutions which physics has
undergone in the last fifty years, these equations have remained standing;
indeed they have continually grown in importance as well as in certainty—
for Maxwell’s arguments in their favor were so shaky that the correctness of
his results must almost be ascribed to intuition. Now these equations were,
of course, obtained from experiments in terrestrial laboratories, but there
was a tacit assumption that the motion of the earth through the ether could
be ignored. In certain cases, such as the Michelson-Morley experiment, this
ought not to have been possible without measurable error; but it turned out
to be always possible. Physicists were faced with the odd difficulty that
Maxwell’s equations were more accurate than they should be. A very
similar difficulty was explained by Galileo at the very beginning of modern
physics. Most people think that if you let a weight drop it will fall
vertically. But if you try the experiment in the cabin of a moving ship, the
the same amount of negative electricity, and all protons have an exactly
equal and opposite amount of positive electricity. It appeared that an electric
current, which had been thought of as a continuous phenomenon, consists
of electrons traveling one way and positive ions traveling the other way; it
is no more strictly continuous than the stream of people going up and down
an escalator. Then came the discovery of quanta, which seems to show a
fundamental discontinuity in all such natural processes as can be measured
with sufficient precision. Thus physics has had to digest new facts and face
new problems.
But the problems raised by the electron and the quantum are not those
that the theory of relativity can solve, at any rate at present; as yet, it throws
no light upon the discontinuities which exist in nature. The problems solved
by the special theory of relativity are typified by the Michelson-Morley
experiment. Assuming the correctness of Maxwell’s theory of
electromagnetism, there should have been certain discoverable effects of
motion through the ether; in fact, there were none. Then there was the
observed fact that a body in very rapid motion appears to increase its mass;
the increase is in the ratio of OP to MP in the figure in the preceding
chapter. Facts of this sort gradually accumulated, until it became imperative
to find some theory which would account for them all.
Maxwell’s theory reduced itself to certain equations, known as
“Maxwell’s equations.” Through all the revolutions which physics has
undergone in the last fifty years, these equations have remained standing;
indeed they have continually grown in importance as well as in certainty—
for Maxwell’s arguments in their favor were so shaky that the correctness of
his results must almost be ascribed to intuition. Now these equations were,
of course, obtained from experiments in terrestrial laboratories, but there
was a tacit assumption that the motion of the earth through the ether could
be ignored. In certain cases, such as the Michelson-Morley experiment, this
ought not to have been possible without measurable error; but it turned out
to be always possible. Physicists were faced with the odd difficulty that
Maxwell’s equations were more accurate than they should be. A very
similar difficulty was explained by Galileo at the very beginning of modern
physics. Most people think that if you let a weight drop it will fall
vertically. But if you try the experiment in the cabin of a moving ship, the
Page 45
weight falls, in relation to the cabin, just as if the ship were at rest; for
instance, if it starts from the middle of the ceiling it will drop onto the
middle of the floor. That is to say, from the point of view of an observer on
the shore it does not fall vertically, since it shares the motion of the ship. So
long as the ship’s motion is steady, everything goes on inside the ship as if
the ship were not moving. Galileo explained how this happens, to the great
indignation of the disciples of Aristotle. In orthodox physics, which is
derived from Galileo, a uniform motion in a straight line has no
discoverable effects. This was, in its day, as astonishing a form of relativity
as that of Einstein is to us. Einstein, in the special theory of relativity, set to
work to show how electromagnetic phenomena could be unaffected by
uniform motion through the ether if there be an ether. This was a more
difficult problem, which could not be solved by merely adhering to the
principles of Galileo.
The really difficult effort required for solving this problem was in
regard to time. It was necessary to introduce the notion of “proper” time
which we have already considered, and to abandon the old belief in one
universal time. The quantitative laws of electromagnetic phenomena are
expressed in Maxwell’s equations, and these equations are found to be true
for any observer, however he may be moving.[3] It is a straight-forward
mathematical problem to find out what differences there must be between
the measures applied by one observer and the measures applied by another,
if, in spite of their relative motion, they are to find the same equations
verified. The answer is contained in the “Lorentz transformation,” found as
a formula by Lorentz, but interpreted and made intelligible by Einstein.
The Lorentz transformation tells us what estimate of distances and
periods of time will be made by an observer whose relative motion is
known, when we are given those of another observer. We may suppose that
you are in a train on a railway which travels due east. You have been
traveling for a time which, by the clocks at the station from which you
started, is t. At a distance x from your starting point, as measured by the
people on the line, an event occurs at this moment—say the line is struck by
lightning. You have been traveling all the time with a uniform velocity v.
The question is: How far from you will you judge that this event has taken
place, and how long after you started will it be by your watch, assuming
instance, if it starts from the middle of the ceiling it will drop onto the
middle of the floor. That is to say, from the point of view of an observer on
the shore it does not fall vertically, since it shares the motion of the ship. So
long as the ship’s motion is steady, everything goes on inside the ship as if
the ship were not moving. Galileo explained how this happens, to the great
indignation of the disciples of Aristotle. In orthodox physics, which is
derived from Galileo, a uniform motion in a straight line has no
discoverable effects. This was, in its day, as astonishing a form of relativity
as that of Einstein is to us. Einstein, in the special theory of relativity, set to
work to show how electromagnetic phenomena could be unaffected by
uniform motion through the ether if there be an ether. This was a more
difficult problem, which could not be solved by merely adhering to the
principles of Galileo.
The really difficult effort required for solving this problem was in
regard to time. It was necessary to introduce the notion of “proper” time
which we have already considered, and to abandon the old belief in one
universal time. The quantitative laws of electromagnetic phenomena are
expressed in Maxwell’s equations, and these equations are found to be true
for any observer, however he may be moving.[3] It is a straight-forward
mathematical problem to find out what differences there must be between
the measures applied by one observer and the measures applied by another,
if, in spite of their relative motion, they are to find the same equations
verified. The answer is contained in the “Lorentz transformation,” found as
a formula by Lorentz, but interpreted and made intelligible by Einstein.
The Lorentz transformation tells us what estimate of distances and
periods of time will be made by an observer whose relative motion is
known, when we are given those of another observer. We may suppose that
you are in a train on a railway which travels due east. You have been
traveling for a time which, by the clocks at the station from which you
started, is t. At a distance x from your starting point, as measured by the
people on the line, an event occurs at this moment—say the line is struck by
lightning. You have been traveling all the time with a uniform velocity v.
The question is: How far from you will you judge that this event has taken
place, and how long after you started will it be by your watch, assuming
Page 46
that your watch is correct from the point of view of an observer on the
train?
Our solution of this problem has to satisfy certain conditions. It has to
bring out the result that the velocity of light is the same for all observers,
however they may be moving. And it has to make physical phenomena—in
particular, those of electromagnetism—obey the same laws for different
observers, however they may find their measures of distances and times
affected by their motion. And it has to make all such effects on
measurement reciprocal. That is to say, if you are in a train and your motion
affects your estimate of distances outside the train, there must be an exactly
similar change in the estimate which people outside the train make of
distances inside it. These conditions are sufficient to determine the solution
of the problem, but the method of obtaining the solution cannot be
explained without more mathematics than is possible in the present work.
Before dealing with the matter in general terms, let us take an example.
Let us suppose that you are in a train on a long straight railway, and that
you are traveling at three-fifths of the velocity of light. Suppose that you
measure the length of your train, and find that it is a hundred yards.
Suppose that the people who catch a glimpse of you as you pass succeed, by
skilful scientific methods, in taking observations which enable them to
calculate the length of your train. If they do their work correctly, they will
find that it is eighty yards long. Everything in the train will seem to them
shorter in the direction of the train than it does to you. Dinner plates, which
you see as ordinary circular plates, will look to the outsider as if they were
oval: they will seem only four-fifths as broad in the direction in which the
train is moving as in the direction of the breadth of the train. And all this is
reciprocal. Suppose you see out of the window a man carrying a fishing rod
which, by his measurement, is fifteen feet long. If he is holding it upright,
you will see it as he does; so you will if he is holding it horizontally at right
angles to the railway. But if he is pointing it along the railway, it will seem
to you to be only twelve feet long. All lengths in the direction of motion are
diminished by twenty per cent, both for those who look into the train from
outside and for those who look out of the train from inside.
But the effects in regard to time are even more strange. This matter has
been explained with almost ideal lucidity by Eddington in Space, Time and
train?
Our solution of this problem has to satisfy certain conditions. It has to
bring out the result that the velocity of light is the same for all observers,
however they may be moving. And it has to make physical phenomena—in
particular, those of electromagnetism—obey the same laws for different
observers, however they may find their measures of distances and times
affected by their motion. And it has to make all such effects on
measurement reciprocal. That is to say, if you are in a train and your motion
affects your estimate of distances outside the train, there must be an exactly
similar change in the estimate which people outside the train make of
distances inside it. These conditions are sufficient to determine the solution
of the problem, but the method of obtaining the solution cannot be
explained without more mathematics than is possible in the present work.
Before dealing with the matter in general terms, let us take an example.
Let us suppose that you are in a train on a long straight railway, and that
you are traveling at three-fifths of the velocity of light. Suppose that you
measure the length of your train, and find that it is a hundred yards.
Suppose that the people who catch a glimpse of you as you pass succeed, by
skilful scientific methods, in taking observations which enable them to
calculate the length of your train. If they do their work correctly, they will
find that it is eighty yards long. Everything in the train will seem to them
shorter in the direction of the train than it does to you. Dinner plates, which
you see as ordinary circular plates, will look to the outsider as if they were
oval: they will seem only four-fifths as broad in the direction in which the
train is moving as in the direction of the breadth of the train. And all this is
reciprocal. Suppose you see out of the window a man carrying a fishing rod
which, by his measurement, is fifteen feet long. If he is holding it upright,
you will see it as he does; so you will if he is holding it horizontally at right
angles to the railway. But if he is pointing it along the railway, it will seem
to you to be only twelve feet long. All lengths in the direction of motion are
diminished by twenty per cent, both for those who look into the train from
outside and for those who look out of the train from inside.
But the effects in regard to time are even more strange. This matter has
been explained with almost ideal lucidity by Eddington in Space, Time and
Page 47
Gravitation. He supposes an aviator traveling, relatively to the earth, at a
speed of 161,000 miles a second, and he says:
“If we observed the aviator carefully we should infer that he was
unusually slow in his movements; and events in the conveyance moving
with him would be similarly retarded—as though time had forgotten to go
on. His cigar lasts twice as long as one of ours. I said ‘infer’ deliberately;
we should see a still more extravagant slowing down of time; but that is
easily explained, because the aviator is rapidly increasing his distance from
us and the light impressions take longer and longer to reach us. The more
moderate retardation referred to remains after we have allowed for the time
of transmission of light. But here again reciprocity comes in, because in the
aviator’s opinion it is we who are traveling at 161,000 miles a second past
him; and when he has made all allowances, he finds that it is we who are
sluggish. Our cigar lasts twice as long as his.”
What a situation for envy! Each man thinks that the other’s cigar lasts
twice as long as his own. It may, however, be some consolation to reflect
that the other man’s visits to the dentist also last twice as long.
This question of time is rather intricate, owing to the fact that events
which one man judges to be simultaneous another considers to be separated
by a lapse of time. In order to try to make clear how time is affected, I shall
revert to our railway train traveling due east at a rate three-fifths of that of
light. For the sake of illustration, I assume that the earth is large and flat,
instead of small and round.
If we take events which happen at a fixed point on the earth, and ask
ourselves how long after the beginning of the journey they will seem to be
to the traveler, the answer is that there will be that retardation that
Eddington speaks of, which means in this case that what seems an hour in
the life of the stationary person is judged to be an hour and a quarter by the
man who observes him from the train. Reciprocally, what seems an hour in
the life of the person in the train is judged by the man observing him from
outside to be an hour and a quarter. Each makes periods of time observed in
the life of the other a quarter as long again as they are to the person who
lives through them. The proportion is the same in regard to times as in
regard to lengths.
speed of 161,000 miles a second, and he says:
“If we observed the aviator carefully we should infer that he was
unusually slow in his movements; and events in the conveyance moving
with him would be similarly retarded—as though time had forgotten to go
on. His cigar lasts twice as long as one of ours. I said ‘infer’ deliberately;
we should see a still more extravagant slowing down of time; but that is
easily explained, because the aviator is rapidly increasing his distance from
us and the light impressions take longer and longer to reach us. The more
moderate retardation referred to remains after we have allowed for the time
of transmission of light. But here again reciprocity comes in, because in the
aviator’s opinion it is we who are traveling at 161,000 miles a second past
him; and when he has made all allowances, he finds that it is we who are
sluggish. Our cigar lasts twice as long as his.”
What a situation for envy! Each man thinks that the other’s cigar lasts
twice as long as his own. It may, however, be some consolation to reflect
that the other man’s visits to the dentist also last twice as long.
This question of time is rather intricate, owing to the fact that events
which one man judges to be simultaneous another considers to be separated
by a lapse of time. In order to try to make clear how time is affected, I shall
revert to our railway train traveling due east at a rate three-fifths of that of
light. For the sake of illustration, I assume that the earth is large and flat,
instead of small and round.
If we take events which happen at a fixed point on the earth, and ask
ourselves how long after the beginning of the journey they will seem to be
to the traveler, the answer is that there will be that retardation that
Eddington speaks of, which means in this case that what seems an hour in
the life of the stationary person is judged to be an hour and a quarter by the
man who observes him from the train. Reciprocally, what seems an hour in
the life of the person in the train is judged by the man observing him from
outside to be an hour and a quarter. Each makes periods of time observed in
the life of the other a quarter as long again as they are to the person who
lives through them. The proportion is the same in regard to times as in
regard to lengths.
Page 48
But when, instead of comparing events at the same place on the earth,
we compare events at widely separated places, the results are still more odd.
Let us now take all the events along the railway which, from the point of
view of a person who is stationary on the earth, happen at a given instant,
say the instant when the observer in the train passes the stationary person.
Of these events, those which occur at points towards which the train is
moving will seem to the traveler to have already happened, while those
which occur at points behind the train will, for him, be still in the future.
When I say that events in the forward direction will seem to have already
happened, I am saying something not strictly accurate, because he will not
yet have seen them; but when he does see them, he will, after allowing for
the velocity of light, come to the conclusion that they must have happened
before the moment in question. An event which happens in the forward
direction along the railway, and which the stationary observer judges to be
now (or rather, will judge to have been now when he comes to know of it),
if it occurs at a distance along the line which light could travel in a second,
will be judged by the traveler to have occurred three-quarters of a second
ago. If it occurs at a distance from the two observers which the man on the
earth judges that light could travel in a year, the traveler will judge (when
he comes to know of it) that it occurred nine months earlier than the
moment when he passed the earth dweller. And generally, he will ante-date
events in the forward direction along the railway by three-quarters of the
time that it would take light to travel from them to the man on the earth
whom he is just passing, and who holds that these events are happening
now—or rather, will hold that they happened now when the light from them
reaches him. Events happening on the railway behind the train will be post-
dated by an exactly equal amount.
We have thus a two-fold correction to make in the date of an event when
we pass from the terrestrial observer to the traveler. We must first take five-
fourths of the time as estimated by the earth dweller, and then subtract
three-fourths of the time that it would take light to travel from the event in
question to the earth dweller.
Take some event in a distant part of the universe, which becomes visible
to the earth dweller and the traveler just as they pass each other. The earth
dweller, if he knows how far off the event occurred, can judge how long
ago it occurred, since he knows the speed of light. If the event occurred in
we compare events at widely separated places, the results are still more odd.
Let us now take all the events along the railway which, from the point of
view of a person who is stationary on the earth, happen at a given instant,
say the instant when the observer in the train passes the stationary person.
Of these events, those which occur at points towards which the train is
moving will seem to the traveler to have already happened, while those
which occur at points behind the train will, for him, be still in the future.
When I say that events in the forward direction will seem to have already
happened, I am saying something not strictly accurate, because he will not
yet have seen them; but when he does see them, he will, after allowing for
the velocity of light, come to the conclusion that they must have happened
before the moment in question. An event which happens in the forward
direction along the railway, and which the stationary observer judges to be
now (or rather, will judge to have been now when he comes to know of it),
if it occurs at a distance along the line which light could travel in a second,
will be judged by the traveler to have occurred three-quarters of a second
ago. If it occurs at a distance from the two observers which the man on the
earth judges that light could travel in a year, the traveler will judge (when
he comes to know of it) that it occurred nine months earlier than the
moment when he passed the earth dweller. And generally, he will ante-date
events in the forward direction along the railway by three-quarters of the
time that it would take light to travel from them to the man on the earth
whom he is just passing, and who holds that these events are happening
now—or rather, will hold that they happened now when the light from them
reaches him. Events happening on the railway behind the train will be post-
dated by an exactly equal amount.
We have thus a two-fold correction to make in the date of an event when
we pass from the terrestrial observer to the traveler. We must first take five-
fourths of the time as estimated by the earth dweller, and then subtract
three-fourths of the time that it would take light to travel from the event in
question to the earth dweller.
Take some event in a distant part of the universe, which becomes visible
to the earth dweller and the traveler just as they pass each other. The earth
dweller, if he knows how far off the event occurred, can judge how long
ago it occurred, since he knows the speed of light. If the event occurred in
Page 49
the direction towards which the traveler is moving, the traveler will infer
that it happened twice as long ago as the earth dweller thinks. But if it
occurred in the direction from which he has come, he will argue that it
happened only half as long ago as the earth dweller thinks. If the traveler
moves at a different speed, these proportions will be different.
Suppose now that (as sometimes occurs) two new stars have suddenly
flared up, and have just become visible to the traveler and to the earth
dweller whom he is passing. Let one of them be in the direction towards
which the train is traveling, the other in the direction from which it has
come. Suppose that the earth dweller is able, in some way, to estimate the
distance of the two stars, and to infer that light takes fifty years to reach him
from the one in the direction towards which the traveler is moving, and one
hundred years to reach him from the other. He will then argue that the
explosion which produced the new star in the forward direction occurred
fifty years ago, while the explosion which produced the other new star
occurred a hundred years ago. The traveler will exactly reverse these
figures: he will infer that the forward explosion occurred a hundred years
ago, and the backward one fifty years ago. I assume that both argue
correctly on correct physical data. In fact, both are right, unless they
imagine that the other must be wrong. It should be noted that both will have
the same estimate of the velocity of light, because their estimates of the
distances of the two new stars will vary in exactly the same proportion as
their estimates of the times since the explosions. Indeed, one of the main
motives of this whole theory is to secure that the velocity of light shall be
the same for all observers, however they may be moving. This fact,
established by experiment, was incompatible with the old theories, and
made it absolutely necessary to admit something startling. The theory of
relativity is just as little startling as is compatible with the facts. Indeed,
after a time, it ceases to seem startling at all.
There is another feature of very great importance in the theory we have
been considering, and that is that, although distances and times vary for
different observers, we can derive from them the quantity called “interval,”
which is the same for all observers. The “interval,” in the special theory of
relativity, is obtained as follows: Take the square of the distance between
two events, and the square of the distance traveled by light in the time
between the two events; subtract the lesser of these from the greater, and the
that it happened twice as long ago as the earth dweller thinks. But if it
occurred in the direction from which he has come, he will argue that it
happened only half as long ago as the earth dweller thinks. If the traveler
moves at a different speed, these proportions will be different.
Suppose now that (as sometimes occurs) two new stars have suddenly
flared up, and have just become visible to the traveler and to the earth
dweller whom he is passing. Let one of them be in the direction towards
which the train is traveling, the other in the direction from which it has
come. Suppose that the earth dweller is able, in some way, to estimate the
distance of the two stars, and to infer that light takes fifty years to reach him
from the one in the direction towards which the traveler is moving, and one
hundred years to reach him from the other. He will then argue that the
explosion which produced the new star in the forward direction occurred
fifty years ago, while the explosion which produced the other new star
occurred a hundred years ago. The traveler will exactly reverse these
figures: he will infer that the forward explosion occurred a hundred years
ago, and the backward one fifty years ago. I assume that both argue
correctly on correct physical data. In fact, both are right, unless they
imagine that the other must be wrong. It should be noted that both will have
the same estimate of the velocity of light, because their estimates of the
distances of the two new stars will vary in exactly the same proportion as
their estimates of the times since the explosions. Indeed, one of the main
motives of this whole theory is to secure that the velocity of light shall be
the same for all observers, however they may be moving. This fact,
established by experiment, was incompatible with the old theories, and
made it absolutely necessary to admit something startling. The theory of
relativity is just as little startling as is compatible with the facts. Indeed,
after a time, it ceases to seem startling at all.
There is another feature of very great importance in the theory we have
been considering, and that is that, although distances and times vary for
different observers, we can derive from them the quantity called “interval,”
which is the same for all observers. The “interval,” in the special theory of
relativity, is obtained as follows: Take the square of the distance between
two events, and the square of the distance traveled by light in the time
between the two events; subtract the lesser of these from the greater, and the
Page 50
result is defined as the square of the interval between the events. The
interval is the same for all observers, and represents a genuine physical
relation between the two events, which the time and the distance do not. We
have already given a geometrical construction for the interval at the end of
Chapter IV; this gives the same result as the above rule. The interval is
“time-like” when the time between the events is longer than light would
take to travel from the place of the one to the place of the other; in the
contrary case it is “space-like.” When the time between the two events is
exactly equal to the time taken by light to travel from one to the other, the
interval is zero; the two events are then situated on parts of one light ray,
unless no light happens to be passing that way.
When we come to the general theory of relativity, we shall have to
generalize the notion of interval. The more deeply we penetrate into the
structure of the world, the more important this concept becomes; we are
tempted to say that it is the reality of which distances and periods of time
are confused representations. The theory of relativity has altered our view
of the fundamental structure of the world; that is the source both of its
difficulty and of its importance.
The remainder of this chapter may be omitted by readers who have not
even the most elementary acquaintance with geometry or algebra. But for
the benefit of those whose education has not been entirely neglected, I will
add a few explanations of the general formula of which I have hitherto
given only particular examples. The general formula in question is the
“Lorentz transformation,” which tells, when one body is moving in a given
manner relatively to another, how to infer the measures of lengths and times
appropriate to the one body from those appropriate to the other. Before
giving the algebraical formulæ, I will give a geometrical construction. As
before, we will suppose that there are two observers, whom we will call O
and O′, one of whom is stationary on the earth while the other is traveling at
a uniform speed along a straight railway. At the beginning of the time
considered, the two observers were at the same point of the railway, but
now they are separated by a certain distance. A flash of lightning strikes a
point X on the railway, and O judges that at the moment when the flash
takes place the observer in the train has reached the point O′. The problem
is: how far will O′ judge that he is from the flash, and how long after the
beginning of the journey (when he was at O) will he judge that the flash
interval is the same for all observers, and represents a genuine physical
relation between the two events, which the time and the distance do not. We
have already given a geometrical construction for the interval at the end of
Chapter IV; this gives the same result as the above rule. The interval is
“time-like” when the time between the events is longer than light would
take to travel from the place of the one to the place of the other; in the
contrary case it is “space-like.” When the time between the two events is
exactly equal to the time taken by light to travel from one to the other, the
interval is zero; the two events are then situated on parts of one light ray,
unless no light happens to be passing that way.
When we come to the general theory of relativity, we shall have to
generalize the notion of interval. The more deeply we penetrate into the
structure of the world, the more important this concept becomes; we are
tempted to say that it is the reality of which distances and periods of time
are confused representations. The theory of relativity has altered our view
of the fundamental structure of the world; that is the source both of its
difficulty and of its importance.
The remainder of this chapter may be omitted by readers who have not
even the most elementary acquaintance with geometry or algebra. But for
the benefit of those whose education has not been entirely neglected, I will
add a few explanations of the general formula of which I have hitherto
given only particular examples. The general formula in question is the
“Lorentz transformation,” which tells, when one body is moving in a given
manner relatively to another, how to infer the measures of lengths and times
appropriate to the one body from those appropriate to the other. Before
giving the algebraical formulæ, I will give a geometrical construction. As
before, we will suppose that there are two observers, whom we will call O
and O′, one of whom is stationary on the earth while the other is traveling at
a uniform speed along a straight railway. At the beginning of the time
considered, the two observers were at the same point of the railway, but
now they are separated by a certain distance. A flash of lightning strikes a
point X on the railway, and O judges that at the moment when the flash
takes place the observer in the train has reached the point O′. The problem
is: how far will O′ judge that he is from the flash, and how long after the
beginning of the journey (when he was at O) will he judge that the flash
Page 51
took place? We are supposed to know O′s estimates, and we want to
calculate those of O′.
In the time that, according to O, has elapsed since the beginning of the
journey, let OC be the distance that light would have traveled along the
railway. Describe a circle about O, with OC as radius, and through O′ draw
a perpendicular to the railway, meeting the circle in D. On OD take a point
Y such that OY is equal to OX (X is the point of the railway where the
lightning strikes). Draw YM perpendicular to the railway, and OS
perpendicular to OD. Let YM and OS meet in S. Also let DO′ produced
and OS produced meet in R. Through X and C draw perpendiculars to the
railway meeting OS produced in Q and Z respectively. Then RQ (as
measured by O) is the distance at which O′ will believe himself to be from
the flash, not O′X as it would be according to the old view. And whereas O
thinks that, in the time from the beginning of the journey to the flash, light
would travel a distance OC, O′ thinks that the time elapsed is that required
calculate those of O′.
In the time that, according to O, has elapsed since the beginning of the
journey, let OC be the distance that light would have traveled along the
railway. Describe a circle about O, with OC as radius, and through O′ draw
a perpendicular to the railway, meeting the circle in D. On OD take a point
Y such that OY is equal to OX (X is the point of the railway where the
lightning strikes). Draw YM perpendicular to the railway, and OS
perpendicular to OD. Let YM and OS meet in S. Also let DO′ produced
and OS produced meet in R. Through X and C draw perpendiculars to the
railway meeting OS produced in Q and Z respectively. Then RQ (as
measured by O) is the distance at which O′ will believe himself to be from
the flash, not O′X as it would be according to the old view. And whereas O
thinks that, in the time from the beginning of the journey to the flash, light
would travel a distance OC, O′ thinks that the time elapsed is that required
Page 52
for light to travel the distance SZ (as measured by O). The interval as
measured by O is got by subtracting the square on OX from the square on
OC; the interval as measured by O′ is got by subtracting the square on RQ
from the square on SZ. A little very elementary geometry shows that these
are equal.
The algebraical formulæ embodied in the above construction are as
follows: From the point of view of O, let an event occur at a distance x
along the railway, and at a time t after the beginning of the journey (when
O′ was at O). From the point of view of O′, let the same event occur at a
distance x′ along the railway, and at a time t′ after the beginning of the
journey. Let c be the velocity of light, and v the velocity of O′ relative to O.
Put
c
β = ————
√ (c² - v²)
Then
x′ = β(x - vt)
vx
t′ = β t-—
c²
This is the Lorentz transformation, from which everything in this
chapter can be deduced.
measured by O is got by subtracting the square on OX from the square on
OC; the interval as measured by O′ is got by subtracting the square on RQ
from the square on SZ. A little very elementary geometry shows that these
are equal.
The algebraical formulæ embodied in the above construction are as
follows: From the point of view of O, let an event occur at a distance x
along the railway, and at a time t after the beginning of the journey (when
O′ was at O). From the point of view of O′, let the same event occur at a
distance x′ along the railway, and at a time t′ after the beginning of the
journey. Let c be the velocity of light, and v the velocity of O′ relative to O.
Put
c
β = ————
√ (c² - v²)
Then
x′ = β(x - vt)
vx
t′ = β t-—
c²
This is the Lorentz transformation, from which everything in this
chapter can be deduced.
Page 53
CHAPTER VII:
INTERVALS IN SPACE-TIME
T he special theory of relativity, which we have been considering
hitherto, solved completely a certain definite problem: to account for
the experimental fact that, when two bodies are in uniform relative
motion, all the laws of physics, both those of ordinary dynamics and those
connected with electricity and magnetism, are exactly the same for the two
bodies. “Uniform” motion, here, means motion in a straight line with
constant velocity. But although one problem was solved by the special
theory, another was immediately suggested: what if the motion of the two
bodies is not uniform? Suppose, for instance, that one is the earth while the
other is a falling stone. The stone has an accelerated motion: it is
continually falling faster and faster. Nothing in the special theory enables us
to say that the laws of physical phenomena will be the same for an observer
on the stone as for one on the earth. This is particularly awkward, as the
earth itself is, in an extended sense, a falling body: It has at every moment
an acceleration[4] towards the sun, which makes it go round the sun instead
of moving in a straight line. As our knowledge of physics is derived from
experiments on the earth, we cannot rest satisfied with a theory in which the
observer is supposed to have no acceleration. The general theory of
relativity removes this restriction, and allows the observer to be moving in
any way, straight or crooked, uniformly or with an acceleration. In the
course of removing the restriction, Einstein was led to his new law of
gravitation, which we shall consider presently. The work was
extraordinarily difficult, and occupied him for ten years. The special theory
dates from 1905, the general theory from 1915.
It is obvious from experiences with which we are all familiar that an
accelerated motion is much more difficult to deal with than a uniform one.
When you are in a train which is traveling steadily, the motion is not
noticeable so long as you do not look out of the window; but when the
brakes are applied suddenly you are precipitated forwards, and you become
aware that something is happening without having to notice anything
INTERVALS IN SPACE-TIME
T he special theory of relativity, which we have been considering
hitherto, solved completely a certain definite problem: to account for
the experimental fact that, when two bodies are in uniform relative
motion, all the laws of physics, both those of ordinary dynamics and those
connected with electricity and magnetism, are exactly the same for the two
bodies. “Uniform” motion, here, means motion in a straight line with
constant velocity. But although one problem was solved by the special
theory, another was immediately suggested: what if the motion of the two
bodies is not uniform? Suppose, for instance, that one is the earth while the
other is a falling stone. The stone has an accelerated motion: it is
continually falling faster and faster. Nothing in the special theory enables us
to say that the laws of physical phenomena will be the same for an observer
on the stone as for one on the earth. This is particularly awkward, as the
earth itself is, in an extended sense, a falling body: It has at every moment
an acceleration[4] towards the sun, which makes it go round the sun instead
of moving in a straight line. As our knowledge of physics is derived from
experiments on the earth, we cannot rest satisfied with a theory in which the
observer is supposed to have no acceleration. The general theory of
relativity removes this restriction, and allows the observer to be moving in
any way, straight or crooked, uniformly or with an acceleration. In the
course of removing the restriction, Einstein was led to his new law of
gravitation, which we shall consider presently. The work was
extraordinarily difficult, and occupied him for ten years. The special theory
dates from 1905, the general theory from 1915.
It is obvious from experiences with which we are all familiar that an
accelerated motion is much more difficult to deal with than a uniform one.
When you are in a train which is traveling steadily, the motion is not
noticeable so long as you do not look out of the window; but when the
brakes are applied suddenly you are precipitated forwards, and you become
aware that something is happening without having to notice anything
Page 54
outside the train. Similarly in a lift everything seems ordinary while it is
moving steadily, but at starting and stopping, when its motion is
accelerated, you have odd sensations in the pit of the stomach. (We call a
motion “accelerated” when it is getting slower as well as when it is getting
quicker; when it is getting slower the acceleration is negative.) The same
thing applies to dropping a weight in the cabin of a ship. So long as the ship
is moving uniformly, the weight will behave, relatively to the cabin, just as
if the ship were at rest: if it starts from the middle of the ceiling, it will hit
the middle of the floor. But if there is an acceleration everything is changed.
If the boat is increasing its speed very rapidly, the weight will seem to an
observer in the cabin to fall in a curve directed towards the stern; if the
speed is being rapidly diminished, the curve will be directed towards the
bow. All these facts are familiar, and they led Galileo and Newton to regard
an accelerated motion as something radically different, in its own nature,
from a uniform motion. But this distinction could only be maintained by
regarding motion as absolute, not relative. If all motion is relative, the earth
is accelerated relatively to the lift just as truly as the lift relatively to the
earth. Yet the people on the ground have no sensations in the pits of their
stomachs when the lift starts to go up. This illustrates the difficulty of our
problem. In fact, though few physicists in modern times have believed in
absolute motion, the technique of mathematical physics still embodied
Newton’s belief in it, and a revolution in method was required to obtain a
technique free from this assumption. This revolution was accomplished in
Einstein’s general theory of relativity.
It is somewhat optional where we begin in explaining the new ideas
which Einstein introduced, but perhaps we shall do best by taking the
conception of “interval.” This conception, as it appears in the special theory
of relativity, is already a generalization of the traditional notion of distance
in space and time; but it is necessary to generalize it still further. However,
it is necessary first to explain a certain amount of history, and for this
purpose we must go back as far as Pythagoras.
Pythagoras, like many of the greatest characters in history, perhaps
never existed: he is a semi-mythical character, who combined mathematics
and priestcraft in uncertain proportions. I shall, however, assume that he
existed, and that he discovered the theorem attributed to him. He was
roughly a contemporary of Confucius and Buddha; he founded a religious
moving steadily, but at starting and stopping, when its motion is
accelerated, you have odd sensations in the pit of the stomach. (We call a
motion “accelerated” when it is getting slower as well as when it is getting
quicker; when it is getting slower the acceleration is negative.) The same
thing applies to dropping a weight in the cabin of a ship. So long as the ship
is moving uniformly, the weight will behave, relatively to the cabin, just as
if the ship were at rest: if it starts from the middle of the ceiling, it will hit
the middle of the floor. But if there is an acceleration everything is changed.
If the boat is increasing its speed very rapidly, the weight will seem to an
observer in the cabin to fall in a curve directed towards the stern; if the
speed is being rapidly diminished, the curve will be directed towards the
bow. All these facts are familiar, and they led Galileo and Newton to regard
an accelerated motion as something radically different, in its own nature,
from a uniform motion. But this distinction could only be maintained by
regarding motion as absolute, not relative. If all motion is relative, the earth
is accelerated relatively to the lift just as truly as the lift relatively to the
earth. Yet the people on the ground have no sensations in the pits of their
stomachs when the lift starts to go up. This illustrates the difficulty of our
problem. In fact, though few physicists in modern times have believed in
absolute motion, the technique of mathematical physics still embodied
Newton’s belief in it, and a revolution in method was required to obtain a
technique free from this assumption. This revolution was accomplished in
Einstein’s general theory of relativity.
It is somewhat optional where we begin in explaining the new ideas
which Einstein introduced, but perhaps we shall do best by taking the
conception of “interval.” This conception, as it appears in the special theory
of relativity, is already a generalization of the traditional notion of distance
in space and time; but it is necessary to generalize it still further. However,
it is necessary first to explain a certain amount of history, and for this
purpose we must go back as far as Pythagoras.
Pythagoras, like many of the greatest characters in history, perhaps
never existed: he is a semi-mythical character, who combined mathematics
and priestcraft in uncertain proportions. I shall, however, assume that he
existed, and that he discovered the theorem attributed to him. He was
roughly a contemporary of Confucius and Buddha; he founded a religious
Page 55
sect, which thought it wicked to eat beans, and a school of mathematicians,
who took a particular interest in right-angled triangles. The theorem of
Pythagoras (the forty-seventh proposition of Euclid) states that the sum of
the squares on the two shorter sides of a right-angled triangle is equal to the
square on the side opposite the right angle. No proposition in the whole of
mathematics has had such a distinguished history. We all learned to “prove”
it in youth. It is true that the “proof” proved nothing, and that the only way
to prove it is by experiment. It is also the case that the proposition is not
quite true—it is only approximately true. But everything in geometry, and
subsequently in physics, has been derived from it by successive
generalizations. The latest of these generalizations is the general theory of
relativity.
The theorem of Pythagoras was itself, in all probability, a generalization
of an Egyptian rule of thumb. In Egypt, it had been known for ages that a
triangle whose sides are 3, 4, and 5 units of length is a right-angled triangle;
the Egyptians used this knowledge practically in measuring their fields.
Now if the sides of a triangle are 3, 4, and 5 inches, the squares on these
sides will contain respectively 9, 16, and 25 square inches; and 9 and 16
added together make 25. Three times three is written “3²”; four times four,
“4²”; five times five, “5².” So that we have
3² + 4² = 5².
It is supposed that Pythagoras noticed this fact, after he had learned
from the Egyptians that a triangle whose sides are 3, 4 and 5 has a right
angle. He found that this could be generalized, and so arrived at his famous
theorem: In a right-angled triangle, the square on the side opposite the right
angle is equal to the sum of the squares on the other two sides.
who took a particular interest in right-angled triangles. The theorem of
Pythagoras (the forty-seventh proposition of Euclid) states that the sum of
the squares on the two shorter sides of a right-angled triangle is equal to the
square on the side opposite the right angle. No proposition in the whole of
mathematics has had such a distinguished history. We all learned to “prove”
it in youth. It is true that the “proof” proved nothing, and that the only way
to prove it is by experiment. It is also the case that the proposition is not
quite true—it is only approximately true. But everything in geometry, and
subsequently in physics, has been derived from it by successive
generalizations. The latest of these generalizations is the general theory of
relativity.
The theorem of Pythagoras was itself, in all probability, a generalization
of an Egyptian rule of thumb. In Egypt, it had been known for ages that a
triangle whose sides are 3, 4, and 5 units of length is a right-angled triangle;
the Egyptians used this knowledge practically in measuring their fields.
Now if the sides of a triangle are 3, 4, and 5 inches, the squares on these
sides will contain respectively 9, 16, and 25 square inches; and 9 and 16
added together make 25. Three times three is written “3²”; four times four,
“4²”; five times five, “5².” So that we have
3² + 4² = 5².
It is supposed that Pythagoras noticed this fact, after he had learned
from the Egyptians that a triangle whose sides are 3, 4 and 5 has a right
angle. He found that this could be generalized, and so arrived at his famous
theorem: In a right-angled triangle, the square on the side opposite the right
angle is equal to the sum of the squares on the other two sides.
Page 56
Similarly in three dimensions: if you take a right-angled solid block, the
square on the diagonal (the dotted line in the figure) is equal to the sum of
the squares on the three sides.
This is as far as the ancients got in this matter.
square on the diagonal (the dotted line in the figure) is equal to the sum of
the squares on the three sides.
This is as far as the ancients got in this matter.
Page 57
The next step of importance is due to Descartes, who made the theorem
of Pythagoras the basis of his method of analytical geometry. Suppose you
wish to map out systematically all the places on a plain—we will suppose it
small enough to make it possible to ignore the fact that the earth is round.
We will suppose that you live in the middle of the plain. One of the simplest
ways of describing the position of a place is to say: starting from my house,
go first such and such a distance east, then such and such a distance north
(or it may be west in the first case, and south in the second). This tells you
exactly where the place is. In the rectangular cities of America, it is the
natural method to adopt: in New York you will be told to go so many blocks
east (or west) and then so many blocks north (or south). The distance you
have to go east is called x, and the distance you have to go north is called y.
(If you have to go west, x is negative; if you have to go south, y is
negative.) Let O be your starting point (the “origin”); let OM be the
distance you go east, and MP the distance you go north. How far are you
from home in a direct line when you reach P? The theorem of Pythagoras
gives the answer. The square on OP is the sum of the squares on OM and
MP. If OM is four miles, and MP is three miles, OP is 5 miles. If OM is
12 miles and MP is 5 miles, OP is 13 miles, because 12² + 5² = 13². So that
if you adopt Descartes’ method of mapping, the theorem of Pythagoras is
of Pythagoras the basis of his method of analytical geometry. Suppose you
wish to map out systematically all the places on a plain—we will suppose it
small enough to make it possible to ignore the fact that the earth is round.
We will suppose that you live in the middle of the plain. One of the simplest
ways of describing the position of a place is to say: starting from my house,
go first such and such a distance east, then such and such a distance north
(or it may be west in the first case, and south in the second). This tells you
exactly where the place is. In the rectangular cities of America, it is the
natural method to adopt: in New York you will be told to go so many blocks
east (or west) and then so many blocks north (or south). The distance you
have to go east is called x, and the distance you have to go north is called y.
(If you have to go west, x is negative; if you have to go south, y is
negative.) Let O be your starting point (the “origin”); let OM be the
distance you go east, and MP the distance you go north. How far are you
from home in a direct line when you reach P? The theorem of Pythagoras
gives the answer. The square on OP is the sum of the squares on OM and
MP. If OM is four miles, and MP is three miles, OP is 5 miles. If OM is
12 miles and MP is 5 miles, OP is 13 miles, because 12² + 5² = 13². So that
if you adopt Descartes’ method of mapping, the theorem of Pythagoras is
Page 58
essential in giving you the distance from place to place. In three dimensions
the thing is exactly analogous. Suppose that, instead of wanting merely to
fix positions on the plain, you want to fix stations for captive balloons
above it, you will then have to add a third quantity, the height at which the
balloon is to be. If you call the height z, and if r is the direct distance from
O to the balloon, you will have
r² = x² + y² + z²,
and from this you can calculate r when you know x, y, and z. For example,
if you can get to the balloon by going 12 miles east, 4 miles north, and then
3 miles up, your distance from the balloon in a straight line is 13 miles,
because
12 × 12 = 144,
4 × 4 = 16,
3 × 3 = 9,
144 + 16 + 9 = 169 = 13 × 13.
But now suppose that, instead of taking a small piece of the earth’s
surface which can be regarded as flat, you consider making a map of the
world. An accurate map of the world on flat paper is impossible. A globe
can be accurate, in the sense that everything is produced to scale, but a flat
map cannot be. I am not talking of practical difficulties, I am talking of a
theoretical impossibility. For example: the northern halves of the meridian
of Greenwich and the ninetieth meridian of west longitude, together with
the piece of the equator between them, make a triangle whose sides are all
equal and whose angles are all right angles. On a flat surface, a triangle of
that sort would be impossible. On the other hand, it is possible to make a
square on a flat surface, but on a sphere it is impossible. Suppose you try on
the earth: walk 100 miles west, then 100 miles north, then 100 miles east,
then 100 miles south. You might think this would make a square, but it
wouldn’t, because you would not at the end have come back to your starting
point. If you have time, you may convince yourself of this by experiment. If
not, you can easily see that it must be so. When you are nearer the pole, 100
the thing is exactly analogous. Suppose that, instead of wanting merely to
fix positions on the plain, you want to fix stations for captive balloons
above it, you will then have to add a third quantity, the height at which the
balloon is to be. If you call the height z, and if r is the direct distance from
O to the balloon, you will have
r² = x² + y² + z²,
and from this you can calculate r when you know x, y, and z. For example,
if you can get to the balloon by going 12 miles east, 4 miles north, and then
3 miles up, your distance from the balloon in a straight line is 13 miles,
because
12 × 12 = 144,
4 × 4 = 16,
3 × 3 = 9,
144 + 16 + 9 = 169 = 13 × 13.
But now suppose that, instead of taking a small piece of the earth’s
surface which can be regarded as flat, you consider making a map of the
world. An accurate map of the world on flat paper is impossible. A globe
can be accurate, in the sense that everything is produced to scale, but a flat
map cannot be. I am not talking of practical difficulties, I am talking of a
theoretical impossibility. For example: the northern halves of the meridian
of Greenwich and the ninetieth meridian of west longitude, together with
the piece of the equator between them, make a triangle whose sides are all
equal and whose angles are all right angles. On a flat surface, a triangle of
that sort would be impossible. On the other hand, it is possible to make a
square on a flat surface, but on a sphere it is impossible. Suppose you try on
the earth: walk 100 miles west, then 100 miles north, then 100 miles east,
then 100 miles south. You might think this would make a square, but it
wouldn’t, because you would not at the end have come back to your starting
point. If you have time, you may convince yourself of this by experiment. If
not, you can easily see that it must be so. When you are nearer the pole, 100
Page 59
miles takes you through more longitude than when you are nearer the
equator, so that in doing your 100 miles east (if you are in the northern
hemisphere) you get to a point further east than that from which you started.
As you walk due south after this, you remain further east than your starting
point, and end up at a different place from that in which you began.
Suppose, to take another illustration, that you start on the equator 4,000
miles east of the Greenwich meridian; you travel till you reach the
meridian, then you travel northwards along it for 4,000 miles, through
Greenwich and up to the neighborhood of the Shetland Islands; then you
travel eastward for 4,000 miles, and then 4,000 miles south. This will take
you to the equator at a point 4,000 miles further east than the point from
which you started.
In a sense, what we have just been saying is not quite fair, because,
except on the equator, traveling due east is not the shortest route from a
place to another place due east of it. A ship traveling (say) from New York
to Lisbon, which is nearly due east, will start by going a certain distance
northward. It will sail on a “great circle,” that is to say, a circle whose
centre is the centre of the earth. This is the nearest approach to a straight
line that can be drawn on the surface of the earth. Meridians of longitude
are great circles, and so is the equator, but the other parallels of latitude are
not. We ought, therefore, to have supposed that, when you reach the
Shetland Islands, you travel 4,000 miles, not due east, but along a great
circle which lands you at a point due east of the Shetland Islands. This,
however, only reinforces our conclusion: you will end at a point even
further east of your starting point than before.
What are the differences between the geometry on a sphere and the
geometry on a plane? If you make a triangle on the earth, whose sides are
great circles, you will not find that the angles of the triangle add up to two
right angles: they will add up to rather more. The amount by which they
exceed two right angles is proportional to the size of the triangle. On a
small triangle such as you could make with strings on your lawn, or even on
a triangle formed by three ships which can just see each other, the angles
will add up to so little more than two right angles that you will not be able
to detect the difference. But if you take the triangle made by the equator, the
Greenwich meridian, and the ninetieth meridian, the angles add up to three
right angles. And you can get triangles in which the angles add up to
equator, so that in doing your 100 miles east (if you are in the northern
hemisphere) you get to a point further east than that from which you started.
As you walk due south after this, you remain further east than your starting
point, and end up at a different place from that in which you began.
Suppose, to take another illustration, that you start on the equator 4,000
miles east of the Greenwich meridian; you travel till you reach the
meridian, then you travel northwards along it for 4,000 miles, through
Greenwich and up to the neighborhood of the Shetland Islands; then you
travel eastward for 4,000 miles, and then 4,000 miles south. This will take
you to the equator at a point 4,000 miles further east than the point from
which you started.
In a sense, what we have just been saying is not quite fair, because,
except on the equator, traveling due east is not the shortest route from a
place to another place due east of it. A ship traveling (say) from New York
to Lisbon, which is nearly due east, will start by going a certain distance
northward. It will sail on a “great circle,” that is to say, a circle whose
centre is the centre of the earth. This is the nearest approach to a straight
line that can be drawn on the surface of the earth. Meridians of longitude
are great circles, and so is the equator, but the other parallels of latitude are
not. We ought, therefore, to have supposed that, when you reach the
Shetland Islands, you travel 4,000 miles, not due east, but along a great
circle which lands you at a point due east of the Shetland Islands. This,
however, only reinforces our conclusion: you will end at a point even
further east of your starting point than before.
What are the differences between the geometry on a sphere and the
geometry on a plane? If you make a triangle on the earth, whose sides are
great circles, you will not find that the angles of the triangle add up to two
right angles: they will add up to rather more. The amount by which they
exceed two right angles is proportional to the size of the triangle. On a
small triangle such as you could make with strings on your lawn, or even on
a triangle formed by three ships which can just see each other, the angles
will add up to so little more than two right angles that you will not be able
to detect the difference. But if you take the triangle made by the equator, the
Greenwich meridian, and the ninetieth meridian, the angles add up to three
right angles. And you can get triangles in which the angles add up to
Page 60
anything up to six right angles. All this you could discover by
measurements on the surface of the earth, without having to take account of
anything in the rest of space.
The theorem of Pythagoras also will fail for distances on a sphere. From
the point of view of a traveler bound to the earth, the distance between two
places is their great circle distance, that is to say, the shortest journey that a
man can make without leaving the surface of the earth. Now suppose you
take three bits of great circles which make a triangle, and suppose one of
them is at right angles to another—to be definite, let one be the equator and
one a bit of the meridian of Greenwich going northward from the equator.
Suppose you go 3,000 miles along the equator, and then 4,000 miles due
north; how far will you be from your starting point, estimating the distance
along a great circle? If you were on a plane, your distance would be 5,000
miles, as we saw before. In fact, however, your great circle distance will be
considerably less than this. In a right-angled triangle on a sphere, the square
on the side opposite the right angle is less than the sum of the squares on
the other two sides.
These differences between the geometry on a sphere and the geometry
on a plane are intrinsic differences; that is to say, they enable you to find out
whether the surface on which you live is like a plane or like a sphere,
without requiring that you should take account of anything outside the
surface. Such considerations led to the next step of importance in our
subject, which was taken by Gauss, who flourished a hundred years ago. He
studied the theory of surfaces, and showed how to develop it by means of
measurements on the surfaces themselves, without going outside them. In
order to fix the position of a point in space, we need three measurements;
but in order to fix the position of a point on a surface we need only two—
for example, a point on the earth’s surface is fixed when we know its
latitude and longitude.
Now Gauss found that, whatever system of measurement you adopt, and
whatever the nature of the surface, there is always a way of calculating the
distance between two not very distant points of the surface, when you know
the quantities which fix their positions. The formula for the distance is a
generalization of the formula of Pythagoras: it tells you the square of the
distance in terms of the squares of the differences between the measure
quantities which fix the points, and also the product of these two quantities.
measurements on the surface of the earth, without having to take account of
anything in the rest of space.
The theorem of Pythagoras also will fail for distances on a sphere. From
the point of view of a traveler bound to the earth, the distance between two
places is their great circle distance, that is to say, the shortest journey that a
man can make without leaving the surface of the earth. Now suppose you
take three bits of great circles which make a triangle, and suppose one of
them is at right angles to another—to be definite, let one be the equator and
one a bit of the meridian of Greenwich going northward from the equator.
Suppose you go 3,000 miles along the equator, and then 4,000 miles due
north; how far will you be from your starting point, estimating the distance
along a great circle? If you were on a plane, your distance would be 5,000
miles, as we saw before. In fact, however, your great circle distance will be
considerably less than this. In a right-angled triangle on a sphere, the square
on the side opposite the right angle is less than the sum of the squares on
the other two sides.
These differences between the geometry on a sphere and the geometry
on a plane are intrinsic differences; that is to say, they enable you to find out
whether the surface on which you live is like a plane or like a sphere,
without requiring that you should take account of anything outside the
surface. Such considerations led to the next step of importance in our
subject, which was taken by Gauss, who flourished a hundred years ago. He
studied the theory of surfaces, and showed how to develop it by means of
measurements on the surfaces themselves, without going outside them. In
order to fix the position of a point in space, we need three measurements;
but in order to fix the position of a point on a surface we need only two—
for example, a point on the earth’s surface is fixed when we know its
latitude and longitude.
Now Gauss found that, whatever system of measurement you adopt, and
whatever the nature of the surface, there is always a way of calculating the
distance between two not very distant points of the surface, when you know
the quantities which fix their positions. The formula for the distance is a
generalization of the formula of Pythagoras: it tells you the square of the
distance in terms of the squares of the differences between the measure
quantities which fix the points, and also the product of these two quantities.
Page 61
When you know this formula, you can discover all the intrinsic properties
of the surface, that is to say, all those which do not depend upon its relations
to points outside the surface. You can discover, for example, whether the
angles of a triangle add up to two right angles, or more, or less, or more in
some cases and less in others.
But when we speak of a “triangle,” we must explain what we mean,
because on most surfaces there are no straight lines. On a sphere, we shall
replace straight lines by great circles, which are the nearest possible
approach to straight lines. In general, we shall take, instead of straight lines,
the lines that give the shortest route on the surface from place to place. Such
lines are called “geodesics.” On the earth, the geodesics are great circles. In
general, they are the shortest way of traveling from point to point if you are
unable to leave the surface. They take the place of straight lines in the
intrinsic geometry of a surface. When we inquire whether the angles of a
triangle add up to two right angles or not, we mean to speak of a triangle
whose sides are geodesics. And when we speak of the distance between two
points, we mean the distance along a geodesic.
The next step in our generalizing process is rather difficult: it is the
transition to non-Euclidean geometry. We live in a world in which space has
three dimensions, and our empirical knowledge of space is based upon
measurement of small distances and of angles. (When I speak of small
distances, I mean distances that are small compared to those in astronomy;
all distances on the earth are small in this sense.) It was formerly thought
that we could be sure à priori that space is Euclidean—for instance, that the
angles of a triangle add up to two right angles. But it came to be recognized
that we could not prove this by reasoning; if it was to be known, it must be
known as the result of measurements. Before Einstein, it was thought that
measurements confirm Euclidean geometry within the limits of exactitude
attainable; now this is no longer thought. It is still true that we can, by what
may be called a natural artifice, cause Euclidean geometry to seem true
throughout a small region, such as the earth; but in explaining gravitation
Einstein is led to the view that over large regions where there is matter we
cannot regard space as Euclidean. The reasons for this will concern us later.
What concerns us now is the way in which non-Euclidean geometry results
from a generalization of the work of Gauss.
of the surface, that is to say, all those which do not depend upon its relations
to points outside the surface. You can discover, for example, whether the
angles of a triangle add up to two right angles, or more, or less, or more in
some cases and less in others.
But when we speak of a “triangle,” we must explain what we mean,
because on most surfaces there are no straight lines. On a sphere, we shall
replace straight lines by great circles, which are the nearest possible
approach to straight lines. In general, we shall take, instead of straight lines,
the lines that give the shortest route on the surface from place to place. Such
lines are called “geodesics.” On the earth, the geodesics are great circles. In
general, they are the shortest way of traveling from point to point if you are
unable to leave the surface. They take the place of straight lines in the
intrinsic geometry of a surface. When we inquire whether the angles of a
triangle add up to two right angles or not, we mean to speak of a triangle
whose sides are geodesics. And when we speak of the distance between two
points, we mean the distance along a geodesic.
The next step in our generalizing process is rather difficult: it is the
transition to non-Euclidean geometry. We live in a world in which space has
three dimensions, and our empirical knowledge of space is based upon
measurement of small distances and of angles. (When I speak of small
distances, I mean distances that are small compared to those in astronomy;
all distances on the earth are small in this sense.) It was formerly thought
that we could be sure à priori that space is Euclidean—for instance, that the
angles of a triangle add up to two right angles. But it came to be recognized
that we could not prove this by reasoning; if it was to be known, it must be
known as the result of measurements. Before Einstein, it was thought that
measurements confirm Euclidean geometry within the limits of exactitude
attainable; now this is no longer thought. It is still true that we can, by what
may be called a natural artifice, cause Euclidean geometry to seem true
throughout a small region, such as the earth; but in explaining gravitation
Einstein is led to the view that over large regions where there is matter we
cannot regard space as Euclidean. The reasons for this will concern us later.
What concerns us now is the way in which non-Euclidean geometry results
from a generalization of the work of Gauss.
Page 62
There is no reason why we should not have the same circumstances in
three-dimensional space as we have, for example, on the surface of a
sphere. It might happen that the angles of a triangle would always add up to
more than two right angles, and that the excess would be proportional to the
size of the triangle. It might happen that the distance between two points
would be given by a formula analogous to what we have on the surface of a
sphere, but involving three quantities instead of two. Whether this does
happen or not, can only be discovered by actual measurements. There are an
infinite number of such possibilities.
This line of argument was developed by Riemann, in his dissertation
“On the hypotheses which underlie geometry” (1854), which applied
Gauss’s work on surfaces to different kinds of three-dimensional spaces. He
showed that all the essential characteristics of a kind of space could be
deduced from the formula for small distances. He assumed that, from the
small distances in three given directions which would together carry you
from one point to another not far from it, the distances between the two
points could be calculated. For instance, if you know that you can get from
one point to another by first moving a certain distance east, then a certain
distance north, and finally a certain distance straight up in the air, you are to
be able to calculate the distance from the one point to the other. And the
rule for the calculation is to be an extension of the theorem of Pythagoras,
in the sense that you arrive at the square of the required distance by adding
together multiples of the squares of the component distances, together
possibly with multiples of their products. From certain characteristics in the
formula, you can tell what sort of space you have to deal with. These
characteristics do not depend upon the particular method you have adopted
for determining the positions of points.
In order to arrive at what we want for the theory of relativity, we now
have one more generalization to make: we have to substitute the “interval”
between events for the distance between points. This takes us to space-time.
We have already seen that, in the special theory of relativity, the square of
the interval is found by subtracting the square of the distance between the
events from the square of the distance that light would travel in the time
between them. In the general theory, we do not assume this special form of
interval, except at a great distance from matter. Elsewhere, we assume to
begin with a general form, like that which Riemann used for distances.
three-dimensional space as we have, for example, on the surface of a
sphere. It might happen that the angles of a triangle would always add up to
more than two right angles, and that the excess would be proportional to the
size of the triangle. It might happen that the distance between two points
would be given by a formula analogous to what we have on the surface of a
sphere, but involving three quantities instead of two. Whether this does
happen or not, can only be discovered by actual measurements. There are an
infinite number of such possibilities.
This line of argument was developed by Riemann, in his dissertation
“On the hypotheses which underlie geometry” (1854), which applied
Gauss’s work on surfaces to different kinds of three-dimensional spaces. He
showed that all the essential characteristics of a kind of space could be
deduced from the formula for small distances. He assumed that, from the
small distances in three given directions which would together carry you
from one point to another not far from it, the distances between the two
points could be calculated. For instance, if you know that you can get from
one point to another by first moving a certain distance east, then a certain
distance north, and finally a certain distance straight up in the air, you are to
be able to calculate the distance from the one point to the other. And the
rule for the calculation is to be an extension of the theorem of Pythagoras,
in the sense that you arrive at the square of the required distance by adding
together multiples of the squares of the component distances, together
possibly with multiples of their products. From certain characteristics in the
formula, you can tell what sort of space you have to deal with. These
characteristics do not depend upon the particular method you have adopted
for determining the positions of points.
In order to arrive at what we want for the theory of relativity, we now
have one more generalization to make: we have to substitute the “interval”
between events for the distance between points. This takes us to space-time.
We have already seen that, in the special theory of relativity, the square of
the interval is found by subtracting the square of the distance between the
events from the square of the distance that light would travel in the time
between them. In the general theory, we do not assume this special form of
interval, except at a great distance from matter. Elsewhere, we assume to
begin with a general form, like that which Riemann used for distances.
Page 63
Moreover, like Riemann, Einstein only assumes his formula for
neighboring events, that is to say, events which have only a small interval
between them. What goes beyond these initial assumptions depends upon
observation of the actual motion of bodies, in ways which we shall explain
in later chapters.
We may now sum up and re-state the process we have been describing.
In three dimensions, the position of a point relatively to a fixed point (the
“origin”) can be determined by assigning three quantities (“co-ordinates”).
For example, the position of a balloon relatively to your house is fixed if
you know that you will reach it by going first a given distance due east,
then another given distance due north, then a third given distance straight
up. When, as in this case, the three co-ordinates are three distances all at
right angles to each other, which, taken successively, transport you from the
origin to the point in question, the square of the direct distance to the point
in question is got by adding up the squares of the three co-ordinates. In all
cases, whether in Euclidean or in non-Euclidean spaces, it is got by adding
multiples of the squares and products of the co-ordinates according to an
assignable rule. The co-ordinates may be any quantities which fix the
position of a point, provided that neighboring points must have neighboring
quantities for their co-ordinates. In the general theory of relativity, we add a
fourth co-ordinate to give the time, and our formula gives “interval” instead
of spatial distance; moreover we assume the accuracy of our formula for
small distances only. We assume further that, at great distances from matter,
the formula approximates more and more closely to the formula for interval
which is used in the special theory.
We are now at last in a position to tackle Einstein’s theory of
gravitation.
neighboring events, that is to say, events which have only a small interval
between them. What goes beyond these initial assumptions depends upon
observation of the actual motion of bodies, in ways which we shall explain
in later chapters.
We may now sum up and re-state the process we have been describing.
In three dimensions, the position of a point relatively to a fixed point (the
“origin”) can be determined by assigning three quantities (“co-ordinates”).
For example, the position of a balloon relatively to your house is fixed if
you know that you will reach it by going first a given distance due east,
then another given distance due north, then a third given distance straight
up. When, as in this case, the three co-ordinates are three distances all at
right angles to each other, which, taken successively, transport you from the
origin to the point in question, the square of the direct distance to the point
in question is got by adding up the squares of the three co-ordinates. In all
cases, whether in Euclidean or in non-Euclidean spaces, it is got by adding
multiples of the squares and products of the co-ordinates according to an
assignable rule. The co-ordinates may be any quantities which fix the
position of a point, provided that neighboring points must have neighboring
quantities for their co-ordinates. In the general theory of relativity, we add a
fourth co-ordinate to give the time, and our formula gives “interval” instead
of spatial distance; moreover we assume the accuracy of our formula for
small distances only. We assume further that, at great distances from matter,
the formula approximates more and more closely to the formula for interval
which is used in the special theory.
We are now at last in a position to tackle Einstein’s theory of
gravitation.
Page 64
CHAPTER VIII:
EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION
B efore tackling Einstein’s new law, it is as well to convince ourselves,
on logical grounds, that Newton’s law of gravitation cannot be quite
right.
Newton said that between any two particles of matter there is a force
which is proportional to the product of their masses and inversely
proportional to the square of their distance. That is to say, ignoring for the
present the question of mass, if there is a certain attraction when the
particles are a mile apart, there will be a quarter as much attraction when
they are two miles apart, a ninth as much when they are three miles apart,
and so on: the attraction diminishes much faster than the distance increases.
Now, of course, Newton, when he spoke of the distance, meant the distance
at a given time: He thought there could be no ambiguity about time. But we
have seen that this was a mistake. What one observer judges to be the same
moment on the earth and the sun, another will judge to be two different
moments. “Distance at a given moment” is therefore a subjective
conception, which can hardly enter into a cosmic law. Of course, we could
make our law unambiguous by saying that we are going to estimate times as
they are estimated by Greenwich Observatory. But we can hardly believe
that the accidental circumstances of the earth deserve to be taken so
seriously. And the estimate of distance, also, will vary for different
observers. We cannot, therefore, allow that Newton’s form of the law of
gravitation can be quite correct, since it will give different results according
to which of many equally legitimate conventions we adopt. This is as
absurd as it would be if the question whether one man had murdered
another were to depend upon whether they were described by their
Christian names or their surnames. It is obvious that physical laws must be
the same whether distances are measured in miles or in kilometers, and we
are concerned with what is essentially only an extension of the same
principle.
EINSTEIN’S LAW OF GRAVITATION
B efore tackling Einstein’s new law, it is as well to convince ourselves,
on logical grounds, that Newton’s law of gravitation cannot be quite
right.
Newton said that between any two particles of matter there is a force
which is proportional to the product of their masses and inversely
proportional to the square of their distance. That is to say, ignoring for the
present the question of mass, if there is a certain attraction when the
particles are a mile apart, there will be a quarter as much attraction when
they are two miles apart, a ninth as much when they are three miles apart,
and so on: the attraction diminishes much faster than the distance increases.
Now, of course, Newton, when he spoke of the distance, meant the distance
at a given time: He thought there could be no ambiguity about time. But we
have seen that this was a mistake. What one observer judges to be the same
moment on the earth and the sun, another will judge to be two different
moments. “Distance at a given moment” is therefore a subjective
conception, which can hardly enter into a cosmic law. Of course, we could
make our law unambiguous by saying that we are going to estimate times as
they are estimated by Greenwich Observatory. But we can hardly believe
that the accidental circumstances of the earth deserve to be taken so
seriously. And the estimate of distance, also, will vary for different
observers. We cannot, therefore, allow that Newton’s form of the law of
gravitation can be quite correct, since it will give different results according
to which of many equally legitimate conventions we adopt. This is as
absurd as it would be if the question whether one man had murdered
another were to depend upon whether they were described by their
Christian names or their surnames. It is obvious that physical laws must be
the same whether distances are measured in miles or in kilometers, and we
are concerned with what is essentially only an extension of the same
principle.
Page 65
Our measurements are conventional to an even greater extent than is
admitted by the special theory of relativity. Moreover, every measurement
is a physical process carried out with physical material; the result is
certainly an experimental datum, but may not be susceptible of the simple
interpretation which we ordinarily assign to it. We are, therefore, not going
to assume to begin with that we know how to measure anything. We assume
that there is a certain physical quantity, called “interval,” which is a relation
between two events that are not widely separated; but we do not assume in
advance that we know how to measure it, beyond taking it for granted that it
is given by some generalization of the theorem of Pythagoras such as we
spoke of in the preceding chapter.
We do assume, however, that events have an order, and that this order is
four-dimensional. We assume, that is to say, that we know what we mean by
saying that a certain event is nearer to another than to a third, so that before
making accurate measurements we can speak of the “neighborhood” of an
event; and we assume that, in order to assign the position of an event in
space-time, four quantities (co-ordinates) are necessary—e.g. in our former
case of an explosion on an airship, latitude, longitude, altitude and time. But
we assume nothing about the way in which these co-ordinates are assigned,
except that neighboring co-ordinates are assigned to neighboring events.
The way in which these numbers, called co-ordinates, are to be assigned
is neither wholly arbitrary nor a result of careful measurement—it lies in an
intermediate region. While you are making any continuous journey, your
co-ordinates must never alter by sudden jumps. In America one finds that
the houses between (say) Fourteenth Street and Fifteenth Street are likely to
have numbers between 1400 and 1500, while those between Fifteenth Street
and Sixteenth Street have numbers between 1500 and 1600, even if the
1400’s were not used up. This would not do for our purposes, because there
is a sudden jump when we pass from one block to the next. Or again we
might assign the time co-ordinate in the following way: take the time that
elapses between two successive births of people called Smith; an event
occurring between the births of the 3000th and the 3001st Smith known to
history shall have a co-ordinate lying between 3000 and 3001; the fractional
part of its co-ordinate shall be the fraction of a year that has elapsed since
the birth of the 3000th Smith. (Obviously there could never be as much as a
year between two successive additions to the Smith family.) This way of
admitted by the special theory of relativity. Moreover, every measurement
is a physical process carried out with physical material; the result is
certainly an experimental datum, but may not be susceptible of the simple
interpretation which we ordinarily assign to it. We are, therefore, not going
to assume to begin with that we know how to measure anything. We assume
that there is a certain physical quantity, called “interval,” which is a relation
between two events that are not widely separated; but we do not assume in
advance that we know how to measure it, beyond taking it for granted that it
is given by some generalization of the theorem of Pythagoras such as we
spoke of in the preceding chapter.
We do assume, however, that events have an order, and that this order is
four-dimensional. We assume, that is to say, that we know what we mean by
saying that a certain event is nearer to another than to a third, so that before
making accurate measurements we can speak of the “neighborhood” of an
event; and we assume that, in order to assign the position of an event in
space-time, four quantities (co-ordinates) are necessary—e.g. in our former
case of an explosion on an airship, latitude, longitude, altitude and time. But
we assume nothing about the way in which these co-ordinates are assigned,
except that neighboring co-ordinates are assigned to neighboring events.
The way in which these numbers, called co-ordinates, are to be assigned
is neither wholly arbitrary nor a result of careful measurement—it lies in an
intermediate region. While you are making any continuous journey, your
co-ordinates must never alter by sudden jumps. In America one finds that
the houses between (say) Fourteenth Street and Fifteenth Street are likely to
have numbers between 1400 and 1500, while those between Fifteenth Street
and Sixteenth Street have numbers between 1500 and 1600, even if the
1400’s were not used up. This would not do for our purposes, because there
is a sudden jump when we pass from one block to the next. Or again we
might assign the time co-ordinate in the following way: take the time that
elapses between two successive births of people called Smith; an event
occurring between the births of the 3000th and the 3001st Smith known to
history shall have a co-ordinate lying between 3000 and 3001; the fractional
part of its co-ordinate shall be the fraction of a year that has elapsed since
the birth of the 3000th Smith. (Obviously there could never be as much as a
year between two successive additions to the Smith family.) This way of
Page 66
assigning the time co-ordinate is perfectly definite, but it is not admissible
for our purposes, because there will be sudden jumps between events just
before the birth of a Smith and events just after, so that in a continuous
journey your time co-ordinate will not change continuously. It is assumed
that, independently of measurement, we know what a continuous journey is.
And when your position in space-time changes continuously, each of your
four co-ordinates must change continuously. One, two, or three of them
may not change at all; but whatever change does occur must be smooth,
without sudden jumps. This explains what is not allowable in assigning co-
ordinates.
To explain all the changes that are legitimate in your co-ordinates,
suppose you take a large piece of soft india-rubber. While it is in an
unstretched condition, measure little squares on it, each one-tenth of an inch
each way. Put in little tiny pins at the corners of the squares. We can take as
two of the co-ordinates of one of these pins the number of pins passed in
going to the right from a given pin until we come just below the pin in
question, and then the number of pins we pass on the way up to this pin. In
the figure, let O be the pin we start from and P the pin to which we are
going to assign co-ordinates. P is in the fifth column and the third row, so
its co-ordinates in the plane of the india-rubber are to be 5 and 3.
for our purposes, because there will be sudden jumps between events just
before the birth of a Smith and events just after, so that in a continuous
journey your time co-ordinate will not change continuously. It is assumed
that, independently of measurement, we know what a continuous journey is.
And when your position in space-time changes continuously, each of your
four co-ordinates must change continuously. One, two, or three of them
may not change at all; but whatever change does occur must be smooth,
without sudden jumps. This explains what is not allowable in assigning co-
ordinates.
To explain all the changes that are legitimate in your co-ordinates,
suppose you take a large piece of soft india-rubber. While it is in an
unstretched condition, measure little squares on it, each one-tenth of an inch
each way. Put in little tiny pins at the corners of the squares. We can take as
two of the co-ordinates of one of these pins the number of pins passed in
going to the right from a given pin until we come just below the pin in
question, and then the number of pins we pass on the way up to this pin. In
the figure, let O be the pin we start from and P the pin to which we are
going to assign co-ordinates. P is in the fifth column and the third row, so
its co-ordinates in the plane of the india-rubber are to be 5 and 3.
Page 67
Fig. 1.
Fig. 2.
Now take the india-rubber and stretch it and twist it as much as you like.
Let the pins now be in the shape they have in Fig. 2. The divisions now no
longer represent distances according to our usual notions, but they will still
do just as well as co-ordinates. We may still take P as having the co-
ordinates 5 and 3 in the plane of the india-rubber; and we may still regard
the india-rubber as being in a plane, even if we have twisted it out of what
we should ordinarily call a plane. Such continuous distortions do not matter.
To take another illustration: instead of using a steel measuring rod to fix
our co-ordinates, let us use a live eel, which is wriggling all the time. The
Fig. 2.
Now take the india-rubber and stretch it and twist it as much as you like.
Let the pins now be in the shape they have in Fig. 2. The divisions now no
longer represent distances according to our usual notions, but they will still
do just as well as co-ordinates. We may still take P as having the co-
ordinates 5 and 3 in the plane of the india-rubber; and we may still regard
the india-rubber as being in a plane, even if we have twisted it out of what
we should ordinarily call a plane. Such continuous distortions do not matter.
To take another illustration: instead of using a steel measuring rod to fix
our co-ordinates, let us use a live eel, which is wriggling all the time. The
Page 68
distance from the tail to the head of the eel is to count as one from the point
of view of co-ordinates, whatever shape the creature may be assuming at
the moment. The eel is continuous, and its wriggles are continuous, so it
may be taken as our unit of distance in assigning co-ordinates. Beyond the
requirement of continuity, the method of assigning co-ordinates is purely
conventional, and therefore a live eel is just as good as a steel rod.
We are apt to think that, for really careful measurements, it is better to
use a steel rod than a live eel. This is a mistake: not because the eel tells us
what the steel rod was thought to tell, but because the steel rod really tells
no more than the eel obviously does. The point is, not that eels are really
rigid, but that steel rods really wriggle. To an observer in just one possible
state of motion, the eel would appear rigid, while the steel rod would seem
to wriggle just as the eel does to us. For everybody moving differently both
from this observer and ourselves, both the eel and the rod would seem to
wriggle. And there is no saying that one observer is right and another
wrong. In such matters, what is seen does not belong solely to the physical
process observed, but also to the standpoint of the observer. Measurements
of distances and times do not directly reveal properties of the things
measured, but relations of the things to the measurer. What observation can
tell us about the physical world is therefore more abstract than we have
hitherto believed.
It is important to realize that geometry, as taught in schools since Greek
times, ceases to exist as a separate science, and becomes merged in physics.
The two fundamental notions in elementary geometry were the straight line
and the circle. What appears to you as a straight road, whose parts all exist
now, may appear to another observer to be like the flight of a rocket, some
kind of curve whose parts come into existence successively. The circle
depends upon measurement of distances, since it consists of all the points at
a given distance from its center. And measurement of distances, as we have
seen, is a subjective affair, depending upon the way in which the observer is
moving. The failure of the circle to have objective validity was
demonstrated by the Michelson-Morley experiment, and is thus, in a sense,
the starting point of the whole theory of relativity. Rigid bodies, which we
need for measurement, are only rigid for certain observers; for others, they
will be constantly changing all their dimensions. It is only our obstinately
of view of co-ordinates, whatever shape the creature may be assuming at
the moment. The eel is continuous, and its wriggles are continuous, so it
may be taken as our unit of distance in assigning co-ordinates. Beyond the
requirement of continuity, the method of assigning co-ordinates is purely
conventional, and therefore a live eel is just as good as a steel rod.
We are apt to think that, for really careful measurements, it is better to
use a steel rod than a live eel. This is a mistake: not because the eel tells us
what the steel rod was thought to tell, but because the steel rod really tells
no more than the eel obviously does. The point is, not that eels are really
rigid, but that steel rods really wriggle. To an observer in just one possible
state of motion, the eel would appear rigid, while the steel rod would seem
to wriggle just as the eel does to us. For everybody moving differently both
from this observer and ourselves, both the eel and the rod would seem to
wriggle. And there is no saying that one observer is right and another
wrong. In such matters, what is seen does not belong solely to the physical
process observed, but also to the standpoint of the observer. Measurements
of distances and times do not directly reveal properties of the things
measured, but relations of the things to the measurer. What observation can
tell us about the physical world is therefore more abstract than we have
hitherto believed.
It is important to realize that geometry, as taught in schools since Greek
times, ceases to exist as a separate science, and becomes merged in physics.
The two fundamental notions in elementary geometry were the straight line
and the circle. What appears to you as a straight road, whose parts all exist
now, may appear to another observer to be like the flight of a rocket, some
kind of curve whose parts come into existence successively. The circle
depends upon measurement of distances, since it consists of all the points at
a given distance from its center. And measurement of distances, as we have
seen, is a subjective affair, depending upon the way in which the observer is
moving. The failure of the circle to have objective validity was
demonstrated by the Michelson-Morley experiment, and is thus, in a sense,
the starting point of the whole theory of relativity. Rigid bodies, which we
need for measurement, are only rigid for certain observers; for others, they
will be constantly changing all their dimensions. It is only our obstinately
Page 69
earth-bound imagination that makes us suppose a geometry separate from
physics to be possible.
That is why we do not trouble to give physical significance to our co-
ordinates from the start. Formerly, the co-ordinates used in physics were
supposed to be carefully measured distances; now we realize that this care
at the start is thrown away. It is at a later stage that care is required. Our co-
ordinates now are hardly more than a systematic way of cataloguing events.
But mathematics provides, in the method of tensors, such an immensely
powerful technique that we can use co-ordinates assigned in this apparently
careless way just as effectively as if we had applied the whole apparatus of
minutely accurate measurement in arriving at them. The advantage of being
haphazard at the start is that we avoid making surreptitious physical
assumptions, which we can hardly help making, if we suppose that our co-
ordinates have initially some particular physical significance.
We assume that, if two events are close together (but not necessarily
otherwise), there is an interval between them which can be calculated from
the differences between their co-ordinates by some such formula as we
considered in the preceding chapter. That is to say, we take the squares and
products of the differences of co-ordinates, we multiply them by suitable
amounts (which in general will vary from place to place), and we add the
results together. The sum obtained is the square of the interval. We do not
assume in advance that we know the amounts by which the squares and
products must be multiplied; this is going to be discovered by observing
physical phenomena. We know, however, certain things. We know that the
old Newtonian physics is very nearly accurate when our co-ordinates have
been chosen in a certain way. We know that the special theory of relativity
is still more nearly accurate for suitable co-ordinates. From such facts we
can infer certain things about our new co-ordinates, which, in a logical
deduction, appear as postulates of the new theory.
As such postulates we take:
1. That every body travels in a geodesic in space-time,
except in so far as electromagnetic forces act upon
it.
2. That a light ray travels so that the interval between
two parts of it is zero.
physics to be possible.
That is why we do not trouble to give physical significance to our co-
ordinates from the start. Formerly, the co-ordinates used in physics were
supposed to be carefully measured distances; now we realize that this care
at the start is thrown away. It is at a later stage that care is required. Our co-
ordinates now are hardly more than a systematic way of cataloguing events.
But mathematics provides, in the method of tensors, such an immensely
powerful technique that we can use co-ordinates assigned in this apparently
careless way just as effectively as if we had applied the whole apparatus of
minutely accurate measurement in arriving at them. The advantage of being
haphazard at the start is that we avoid making surreptitious physical
assumptions, which we can hardly help making, if we suppose that our co-
ordinates have initially some particular physical significance.
We assume that, if two events are close together (but not necessarily
otherwise), there is an interval between them which can be calculated from
the differences between their co-ordinates by some such formula as we
considered in the preceding chapter. That is to say, we take the squares and
products of the differences of co-ordinates, we multiply them by suitable
amounts (which in general will vary from place to place), and we add the
results together. The sum obtained is the square of the interval. We do not
assume in advance that we know the amounts by which the squares and
products must be multiplied; this is going to be discovered by observing
physical phenomena. We know, however, certain things. We know that the
old Newtonian physics is very nearly accurate when our co-ordinates have
been chosen in a certain way. We know that the special theory of relativity
is still more nearly accurate for suitable co-ordinates. From such facts we
can infer certain things about our new co-ordinates, which, in a logical
deduction, appear as postulates of the new theory.
As such postulates we take:
1. That every body travels in a geodesic in space-time,
except in so far as electromagnetic forces act upon
it.
2. That a light ray travels so that the interval between
two parts of it is zero.
Page 70
3. That at a great distance from gravitating matter, we
can transform our co-ordinates by mathematical
manipulation so that the interval shall be what it is
in the special theory of relativity; and that this is
approximately true wherever gravitation is not
very powerful.
Each of these postulates requires some explanation.
We saw that a geodesic on a surface is the shortest line that can be
drawn on the surface from one point to another; for example, on the earth
the geodesics are great circles. When we come to space-time, the
mathematics is the same, but the verbal explanations have to be rather
different. In the general theory of relativity, it is only neighboring events
that have a definite interval, independently of the route by which we travel
from one to the other. The interval between distant events depends upon the
route pursued, and has to be calculated by dividing the route into a number
of little bits and adding up the intervals for the various little bits. If the
interval is space-like, a body cannot travel from one event to the other;
therefore when we are considering the way bodies move, we are confined to
time-like intervals. The interval between neighboring events, when it is
time-like, will appear as the time between them for an observer who travels
from the one event to the other. And so the whole interval between two
events will be judged by a person who travels from one to the other to be
what his clocks show to be the time that he has taken on the journey. For
some routes this time will be longer, for others shorter; the more slowly the
man travels, the longer he will think he has been on the journey. This must
not be taken as a platitude. I am not saying that if you travel from London
to Edinburgh you will take longer if you travel more slowly. I am saying
something much more odd. I am saying that if you leave London at 10 a.m.
and arrive in Edinburgh at 6.30 p.m. Greenwich time, the more slowly you
travel the longer you will take—if the time is judged by your watch. This is
a very different statement. From the point of view of a person on the earth,
your journey takes eight and a half hours. But if you had been a ray of light
traveling round the solar system, starting from London at 10 a.m., reflected
from Jupiter to Saturn, and so on, until at last you were reflected back to
Edinburgh and arrived there at 6.30 p.m., you would judge that the journey
had taken you exactly no time. And if you had gone by any circuitous route,
can transform our co-ordinates by mathematical
manipulation so that the interval shall be what it is
in the special theory of relativity; and that this is
approximately true wherever gravitation is not
very powerful.
Each of these postulates requires some explanation.
We saw that a geodesic on a surface is the shortest line that can be
drawn on the surface from one point to another; for example, on the earth
the geodesics are great circles. When we come to space-time, the
mathematics is the same, but the verbal explanations have to be rather
different. In the general theory of relativity, it is only neighboring events
that have a definite interval, independently of the route by which we travel
from one to the other. The interval between distant events depends upon the
route pursued, and has to be calculated by dividing the route into a number
of little bits and adding up the intervals for the various little bits. If the
interval is space-like, a body cannot travel from one event to the other;
therefore when we are considering the way bodies move, we are confined to
time-like intervals. The interval between neighboring events, when it is
time-like, will appear as the time between them for an observer who travels
from the one event to the other. And so the whole interval between two
events will be judged by a person who travels from one to the other to be
what his clocks show to be the time that he has taken on the journey. For
some routes this time will be longer, for others shorter; the more slowly the
man travels, the longer he will think he has been on the journey. This must
not be taken as a platitude. I am not saying that if you travel from London
to Edinburgh you will take longer if you travel more slowly. I am saying
something much more odd. I am saying that if you leave London at 10 a.m.
and arrive in Edinburgh at 6.30 p.m. Greenwich time, the more slowly you
travel the longer you will take—if the time is judged by your watch. This is
a very different statement. From the point of view of a person on the earth,
your journey takes eight and a half hours. But if you had been a ray of light
traveling round the solar system, starting from London at 10 a.m., reflected
from Jupiter to Saturn, and so on, until at last you were reflected back to
Edinburgh and arrived there at 6.30 p.m., you would judge that the journey
had taken you exactly no time. And if you had gone by any circuitous route,
Page 71
which enabled you to arrive in time by traveling fast, the longer your route
the less time you would judge that you had taken; the diminution of time
would be continual as your speed approached that of light. Now I say that
when a body travels, if it is left to itself, it chooses the route which makes
the time between two stages of the journey as long as possible; if it had
traveled from one event to another by any other route, the time, as measured
by its own clocks, would have been shorter. This is a way of saying that
bodies left to themselves do their journeys as slowly as they can; it is a sort
of law of cosmic laziness. Its mathematical expression is that they travel in
geodesics, in which the total interval between any two events on the journey
is greater than by any alternative route. (The fact that it is greater, not less,
is due to the fact that the sort of interval we are considering is more
analogous to time than to distance.) For example, if a person could leave the
earth and travel about for a time and then return, the time between his
departure and return would be less by his clocks than by those on the earth:
the earth, in its journey round the sun, chooses the route which makes the
time of any bit of its course by its clocks longer than the time as judged by
clocks which move by a different route. This is what is meant by saying that
bodies left to themselves move in geodesics in space-time.
We assume that the body considered is not acted upon by
electromagnetic forces. We are concerned at present with the law of
gravitation, not with the effects of electromagnetism. These effects have
been brought into the framework of the general theory of relativity by Weyl,
[5]
but for the present we will ignore his work. The planets, in any case, are
not subject, as wholes, to appreciable electromagnetic forces; it is only
gravitation that has to be considered in accounting for their motions, with
which we are concerned in this chapter.
Our second postulate, that a light ray travels so that the interval between
two parts of it is zero, has the advantage that it does not have to be stated
only for small distances. If each little bit of interval is zero, the sum of them
all is zero, and so even distant parts of the same light ray have a zero
interval. The course of a light ray is also a geodesic according to the
definition. Thus we now have two empirical ways of discovering what are
the geodesics in space-time, namely light rays and bodies moving freely.
Among freely-moving bodies are included all which are not subject to
constraints or to electromagnetic forces, that is to say, the sun, stars, planets
the less time you would judge that you had taken; the diminution of time
would be continual as your speed approached that of light. Now I say that
when a body travels, if it is left to itself, it chooses the route which makes
the time between two stages of the journey as long as possible; if it had
traveled from one event to another by any other route, the time, as measured
by its own clocks, would have been shorter. This is a way of saying that
bodies left to themselves do their journeys as slowly as they can; it is a sort
of law of cosmic laziness. Its mathematical expression is that they travel in
geodesics, in which the total interval between any two events on the journey
is greater than by any alternative route. (The fact that it is greater, not less,
is due to the fact that the sort of interval we are considering is more
analogous to time than to distance.) For example, if a person could leave the
earth and travel about for a time and then return, the time between his
departure and return would be less by his clocks than by those on the earth:
the earth, in its journey round the sun, chooses the route which makes the
time of any bit of its course by its clocks longer than the time as judged by
clocks which move by a different route. This is what is meant by saying that
bodies left to themselves move in geodesics in space-time.
We assume that the body considered is not acted upon by
electromagnetic forces. We are concerned at present with the law of
gravitation, not with the effects of electromagnetism. These effects have
been brought into the framework of the general theory of relativity by Weyl,
[5]
but for the present we will ignore his work. The planets, in any case, are
not subject, as wholes, to appreciable electromagnetic forces; it is only
gravitation that has to be considered in accounting for their motions, with
which we are concerned in this chapter.
Our second postulate, that a light ray travels so that the interval between
two parts of it is zero, has the advantage that it does not have to be stated
only for small distances. If each little bit of interval is zero, the sum of them
all is zero, and so even distant parts of the same light ray have a zero
interval. The course of a light ray is also a geodesic according to the
definition. Thus we now have two empirical ways of discovering what are
the geodesics in space-time, namely light rays and bodies moving freely.
Among freely-moving bodies are included all which are not subject to
constraints or to electromagnetic forces, that is to say, the sun, stars, planets
Page 72
and satellites, and also falling bodies on the earth, at least when they are
falling in a vacuum. When you are standing on the earth, you are subject to
electromagnetic forces: the electrons and protons in the neighborhood of
your feet exert a repulsion on your feet which is just enough to overcome
the earth’s gravitation. This is what prevents you from falling through the
earth, which, solid as it looks, is mostly empty space.
The third postulate, which relates the general to the special theory, is
very useful. It is not necessary for the application of the special theory to a
limited region that there should be no gravitation in the region; it is enough
if the intensity of gravitation is practically the same throughout the region.
This enables us to apply the special theory within any small region. How
small it will have to be, depends upon the neighborhood. On the surface of
the earth, it would have to be small enough for the curvature of the earth to
be negligible. In the spaces between the planets, it need only be small
enough for the attraction of the sun and the planets to be sensibly constant
throughout the region. In the spaces between the stars it might be enormous
—say half the distance from one star to the next—without introducing
measurable inaccuracies.
At a great distance from gravitating matter, we can so choose our co-
ordinates as to obtain a Euclidean space; this is really only another way of
saying that the special theory of relativity applies. In the neighborhood of
matter, although we can make our space Euclidean in any small region, we
cannot do so throughout any region within which gravitation varies sensibly
—at least, if we do, we shall have to abandon the view that bodies move in
geodesics. In the neighborhood of a piece of matter, there is, as it were, a
hill in space-time; this hill grows steeper and steeper as it gets nearer the
top, like the neck of a champagne bottle. It ends in a sheer precipice. Now
by the law of cosmic laziness which we mentioned earlier, a body coming
into the neighborhood of the hill will not attempt to go straight over the top,
but will go round. This is the essence of Einstein’s view of gravitation.
What a body does, it does because of the nature of space-time in its own
neighborhood, not because of some mysterious force emanating from a
distant body.
An analogy will serve to make the point clear. Suppose that on a dark
night a number of men with lanterns were walking in various directions
across a huge plain, and suppose that in one part of the plain there was a hill
falling in a vacuum. When you are standing on the earth, you are subject to
electromagnetic forces: the electrons and protons in the neighborhood of
your feet exert a repulsion on your feet which is just enough to overcome
the earth’s gravitation. This is what prevents you from falling through the
earth, which, solid as it looks, is mostly empty space.
The third postulate, which relates the general to the special theory, is
very useful. It is not necessary for the application of the special theory to a
limited region that there should be no gravitation in the region; it is enough
if the intensity of gravitation is practically the same throughout the region.
This enables us to apply the special theory within any small region. How
small it will have to be, depends upon the neighborhood. On the surface of
the earth, it would have to be small enough for the curvature of the earth to
be negligible. In the spaces between the planets, it need only be small
enough for the attraction of the sun and the planets to be sensibly constant
throughout the region. In the spaces between the stars it might be enormous
—say half the distance from one star to the next—without introducing
measurable inaccuracies.
At a great distance from gravitating matter, we can so choose our co-
ordinates as to obtain a Euclidean space; this is really only another way of
saying that the special theory of relativity applies. In the neighborhood of
matter, although we can make our space Euclidean in any small region, we
cannot do so throughout any region within which gravitation varies sensibly
—at least, if we do, we shall have to abandon the view that bodies move in
geodesics. In the neighborhood of a piece of matter, there is, as it were, a
hill in space-time; this hill grows steeper and steeper as it gets nearer the
top, like the neck of a champagne bottle. It ends in a sheer precipice. Now
by the law of cosmic laziness which we mentioned earlier, a body coming
into the neighborhood of the hill will not attempt to go straight over the top,
but will go round. This is the essence of Einstein’s view of gravitation.
What a body does, it does because of the nature of space-time in its own
neighborhood, not because of some mysterious force emanating from a
distant body.
An analogy will serve to make the point clear. Suppose that on a dark
night a number of men with lanterns were walking in various directions
across a huge plain, and suppose that in one part of the plain there was a hill
Page 73
with a flaring beacon on the top. Our hill is to be such as we have
described, growing steeper as it goes up, and ending in a precipice. I shall
suppose that there are villages dotted about the plain, and the men with
lanterns are walking to and from these various villages. Paths have been
made showing the easiest way from any one village to any other. These
paths will all be more or less curved, to avoid going too far up the hill; they
will be more sharply curved when they pass near the top of the hill than
when they keep some way off from it. Now suppose that you are observing
all this, as best you can, from a place high up in a balloon, so that you
cannot see the ground, but only the lanterns and the beacon. You will not
know that there is a hill, or that the beacon is at the top of it. You will see
that people turn out of the straight course when they approach the beacon,
and that the nearer they come the more they turn aside. You will naturally
attribute this to an effect of the beacon; you may think that it is very hot and
people are afraid of getting burnt. But if you wait for daylight you will see
the hill, and you will find that the beacon merely marks the top of the hill
and does not influence the people with lanterns in any way.
Now in this analogy the beacon corresponds to the sun, the people with
lanterns correspond to the planets and comets, the paths correspond to their
orbits, and the coming of daylight corresponds to the coming of Einstein.
Einstein says that the sun is at the top of a hill, only the hill is in space-time,
not in space. (I advise the reader not to try to picture this, because it is
impossible.) Each body, at each moment, adopts the easiest course open to
it, but owing to the hill the easiest course is not a straight line. Each little bit
of matter is at the top of its own little hill, like the cock on his own dung-
heap. What we call a big bit of matter is a bit which is at the top of a big
hill. The hill is what we know about; the bit of matter at the top is assumed
for convenience. Perhaps there is really no need to assume it, and we could
do with the hill alone, for we can never get to the top of any one else’s hill,
any more than the pugnacious cock can fight the peculiarly irritating bird
that he sees in the looking glass.
I have given only a qualitative description of Einstein’s law of
gravitation; to give its exact quantitative formulation is impossible without
more mathematics than I am permitting myself. The most interesting point
about it is that it makes the law no longer the result of action at a distance:
the sun exerts no force on the planets whatever. Just as geometry has
described, growing steeper as it goes up, and ending in a precipice. I shall
suppose that there are villages dotted about the plain, and the men with
lanterns are walking to and from these various villages. Paths have been
made showing the easiest way from any one village to any other. These
paths will all be more or less curved, to avoid going too far up the hill; they
will be more sharply curved when they pass near the top of the hill than
when they keep some way off from it. Now suppose that you are observing
all this, as best you can, from a place high up in a balloon, so that you
cannot see the ground, but only the lanterns and the beacon. You will not
know that there is a hill, or that the beacon is at the top of it. You will see
that people turn out of the straight course when they approach the beacon,
and that the nearer they come the more they turn aside. You will naturally
attribute this to an effect of the beacon; you may think that it is very hot and
people are afraid of getting burnt. But if you wait for daylight you will see
the hill, and you will find that the beacon merely marks the top of the hill
and does not influence the people with lanterns in any way.
Now in this analogy the beacon corresponds to the sun, the people with
lanterns correspond to the planets and comets, the paths correspond to their
orbits, and the coming of daylight corresponds to the coming of Einstein.
Einstein says that the sun is at the top of a hill, only the hill is in space-time,
not in space. (I advise the reader not to try to picture this, because it is
impossible.) Each body, at each moment, adopts the easiest course open to
it, but owing to the hill the easiest course is not a straight line. Each little bit
of matter is at the top of its own little hill, like the cock on his own dung-
heap. What we call a big bit of matter is a bit which is at the top of a big
hill. The hill is what we know about; the bit of matter at the top is assumed
for convenience. Perhaps there is really no need to assume it, and we could
do with the hill alone, for we can never get to the top of any one else’s hill,
any more than the pugnacious cock can fight the peculiarly irritating bird
that he sees in the looking glass.
I have given only a qualitative description of Einstein’s law of
gravitation; to give its exact quantitative formulation is impossible without
more mathematics than I am permitting myself. The most interesting point
about it is that it makes the law no longer the result of action at a distance:
the sun exerts no force on the planets whatever. Just as geometry has
Page 74
become physics, so, in a sense, physics has become geometry. The law of
gravitation has become the geometrical law that every body pursues the
easiest course from place to place, but this course is affected by the hills
and valleys that are encountered on the road.
gravitation has become the geometrical law that every body pursues the
easiest course from place to place, but this course is affected by the hills
and valleys that are encountered on the road.
Page 75
CHAPTER IX:
PROOFS OF EINSTEIN’S
LAW OF GRAVITATION
T
he reasons for accepting Einstein’s law of gravitation rather than
Newton’s are partly empirical, partly logical. We will begin with the
former.
Einstein’s law of gravitation gives very nearly the same results as
Newton’s, when applied to the calculation of the orbits of the planets and
their satellites. If it did not, it could not be true, since the consequences
deduced from Newton’s law have been found to be almost exactly verified
by observation. When, in 1915, Einstein first published his new law, there
was only one empirical fact to which he could point to show that his theory
was better than Newton’s. This was what is called the “motion of the
perihelion of Mercury.”
The planet Mercury, like the other planets, moves round the sun in an
ellipse, with the sun in one of the foci. At some points of its orbit it is nearer
to the sun than at other points. The point where it is nearest to the sun is
called its “perihelion.” Now it was found by observation that, from one
occasion when Mercury is nearest to the sun until the next, Mercury does
not go exactly once round the sun, but a little bit more. The discrepancy is
very small; it amounts to an angle of forty-two seconds in a century. That is
to say, in each year the planet has to move rather less than half a second of
angle after it has finished a complete revolution from the last perihelion
before it reaches the next perihelion. This very minute discrepancy from
Newtonian theory had puzzled astronomers. There was a calculated effect
due to perturbations caused by the other planets, but this small discrepancy
was the residue after allowing for these perturbations. Einstein’s theory
accounted for this residue, as well as for its absence in the case of the other
planets. (In them it exists, but is too small to be observed.) This was, at first,
his only empirical advantage over Newton.
PROOFS OF EINSTEIN’S
LAW OF GRAVITATION
T
he reasons for accepting Einstein’s law of gravitation rather than
Newton’s are partly empirical, partly logical. We will begin with the
former.
Einstein’s law of gravitation gives very nearly the same results as
Newton’s, when applied to the calculation of the orbits of the planets and
their satellites. If it did not, it could not be true, since the consequences
deduced from Newton’s law have been found to be almost exactly verified
by observation. When, in 1915, Einstein first published his new law, there
was only one empirical fact to which he could point to show that his theory
was better than Newton’s. This was what is called the “motion of the
perihelion of Mercury.”
The planet Mercury, like the other planets, moves round the sun in an
ellipse, with the sun in one of the foci. At some points of its orbit it is nearer
to the sun than at other points. The point where it is nearest to the sun is
called its “perihelion.” Now it was found by observation that, from one
occasion when Mercury is nearest to the sun until the next, Mercury does
not go exactly once round the sun, but a little bit more. The discrepancy is
very small; it amounts to an angle of forty-two seconds in a century. That is
to say, in each year the planet has to move rather less than half a second of
angle after it has finished a complete revolution from the last perihelion
before it reaches the next perihelion. This very minute discrepancy from
Newtonian theory had puzzled astronomers. There was a calculated effect
due to perturbations caused by the other planets, but this small discrepancy
was the residue after allowing for these perturbations. Einstein’s theory
accounted for this residue, as well as for its absence in the case of the other
planets. (In them it exists, but is too small to be observed.) This was, at first,
his only empirical advantage over Newton.
Page 76
His second success was more sensational. According to orthodox
opinion, light in a vacuum ought always to travel in straight lines. Not being
composed of material particles, it ought to be unaffected by gravitation.
However, it was possible, without any serious breach with old ideas, to
admit that, in passing near the sun, light might be deflected out of the
straight path as much as if it were composed of material particles. Einstein,
however, maintained, as a deduction from his law of gravitation, that light
would be deflected twice as much as this. That is to say, if the light of a star
passed very near the sun, Einstein maintained that the ray from the star
would be turned through an angle of just under one and three-quarters
seconds. His opponents were willing to concede half of this amount. Now it
is not every day that a star almost in line with the sun can be seen. This is
only possible during a total eclipse, and not always then, because there may
be no bright stars in the right position. Eddington points out that, from this
point of view, the best day of the year is May 29, because then there are a
number of bright stars close to the sun. It happened by incredible good
fortune that there was a total eclipse of the sun on May 29, 1919—the first
year after the armistice. Two British expeditions photographed the stars
near the sun during the eclipse, and the results confirmed Einstein’s
prediction. Some astronomers who remained doubtful whether sufficient
precautions had been taken to insure accuracy were convinced when their
own observations in a subsequent eclipse gave exactly the same result.
Einstein’s estimate of the amount of the deflection of light by gravitation is
therefore now universally accepted.
The third experimental test is on the whole favorable to Einstein, though
the quantities concerned are so small that it is only just possible to measure
them, and the result is therefore not decisive. But successive investigations
have made it more and more probable that the small effect predicted by
Einstein really occurs. Before explaining the effect in question, a few
preliminary explanations are necessary. The spectrum of an element
consists of certain lines of various shades of light, separated by a prism, and
emitted by the element when it glows. They are the same (to a very close
approximation) whether the element is in the earth or the sun or a star. Each
line is of some definite shade of color, with some definite wave length.
Longer wave lengths are towards the red end of the spectrum, shorter ones
towards the violet end. When the source of light is moving towards you, the
apparent wave lengths grow shorter, just as waves at sea come quicker
opinion, light in a vacuum ought always to travel in straight lines. Not being
composed of material particles, it ought to be unaffected by gravitation.
However, it was possible, without any serious breach with old ideas, to
admit that, in passing near the sun, light might be deflected out of the
straight path as much as if it were composed of material particles. Einstein,
however, maintained, as a deduction from his law of gravitation, that light
would be deflected twice as much as this. That is to say, if the light of a star
passed very near the sun, Einstein maintained that the ray from the star
would be turned through an angle of just under one and three-quarters
seconds. His opponents were willing to concede half of this amount. Now it
is not every day that a star almost in line with the sun can be seen. This is
only possible during a total eclipse, and not always then, because there may
be no bright stars in the right position. Eddington points out that, from this
point of view, the best day of the year is May 29, because then there are a
number of bright stars close to the sun. It happened by incredible good
fortune that there was a total eclipse of the sun on May 29, 1919—the first
year after the armistice. Two British expeditions photographed the stars
near the sun during the eclipse, and the results confirmed Einstein’s
prediction. Some astronomers who remained doubtful whether sufficient
precautions had been taken to insure accuracy were convinced when their
own observations in a subsequent eclipse gave exactly the same result.
Einstein’s estimate of the amount of the deflection of light by gravitation is
therefore now universally accepted.
The third experimental test is on the whole favorable to Einstein, though
the quantities concerned are so small that it is only just possible to measure
them, and the result is therefore not decisive. But successive investigations
have made it more and more probable that the small effect predicted by
Einstein really occurs. Before explaining the effect in question, a few
preliminary explanations are necessary. The spectrum of an element
consists of certain lines of various shades of light, separated by a prism, and
emitted by the element when it glows. They are the same (to a very close
approximation) whether the element is in the earth or the sun or a star. Each
line is of some definite shade of color, with some definite wave length.
Longer wave lengths are towards the red end of the spectrum, shorter ones
towards the violet end. When the source of light is moving towards you, the
apparent wave lengths grow shorter, just as waves at sea come quicker
Page 77
when you are traveling against the wind. When the source of light is
moving away from you, the apparent wave lengths grow longer, for the
same reason. This enables us to know whether the stars are moving towards
us or away from us. If they are moving towards us, all the lines in the
spectrum of an element are moved a little toward violet; if away from us,
toward red. You may notice the analogous effect in sound any day. If you
are in a station and an express comes through whistling, the note of the
whistle seems much more shrill while the train is approaching you than
when it has passed. Probably many people think the note has “really”
changed, but in fact the change in what you hear is only due to the fact that
the train was first approaching and then receding. To people in the train,
there was no change of note. This is not the effect with which Einstein is
concerned. The distance of the sun from the earth does not change much;
for our present purposes, we may regard it as constant. Einstein deduces
from his law of gravitation that any periodic process which takes place in an
atom in the sun (whose gravitation is very intense) must, as measured by
our clocks, take place at a slightly slower rate than it would in a similar
atom on the earth. The “interval” involved will be the same in the sun and
on the earth, but the same interval in different regions does not correspond
to exactly the same time; this is due to the “hilly” character of space-time
which constitutes gravitation. Consequently any given line in the spectrum
ought, when the light comes from the sun, to seem to us a little nearer the
red end of the spectrum than if the light came from a source on the earth.
The effect to be expected is very small—so small that there is still some
slight uncertainty as to whether it exists or not. But it now seems highly
probable that it exists.
No other measurable differences between the consequences of
Einstein’s law and those of Newton’s have hitherto been discovered. But the
above experimental tests are quite sufficient to convince astronomers that,
where Newton and Einstein differ as to the motions of the heavenly bodies,
it is Einstein’s law that gives the right results. Even if the empirical grounds
in favor of Einstein stood alone, they would be conclusive. Whether his law
represents the exact truth or not, it is certainly more nearly exact than
Newton’s, though the inaccuracies in Newton’s were all exceedingly
minute.
moving away from you, the apparent wave lengths grow longer, for the
same reason. This enables us to know whether the stars are moving towards
us or away from us. If they are moving towards us, all the lines in the
spectrum of an element are moved a little toward violet; if away from us,
toward red. You may notice the analogous effect in sound any day. If you
are in a station and an express comes through whistling, the note of the
whistle seems much more shrill while the train is approaching you than
when it has passed. Probably many people think the note has “really”
changed, but in fact the change in what you hear is only due to the fact that
the train was first approaching and then receding. To people in the train,
there was no change of note. This is not the effect with which Einstein is
concerned. The distance of the sun from the earth does not change much;
for our present purposes, we may regard it as constant. Einstein deduces
from his law of gravitation that any periodic process which takes place in an
atom in the sun (whose gravitation is very intense) must, as measured by
our clocks, take place at a slightly slower rate than it would in a similar
atom on the earth. The “interval” involved will be the same in the sun and
on the earth, but the same interval in different regions does not correspond
to exactly the same time; this is due to the “hilly” character of space-time
which constitutes gravitation. Consequently any given line in the spectrum
ought, when the light comes from the sun, to seem to us a little nearer the
red end of the spectrum than if the light came from a source on the earth.
The effect to be expected is very small—so small that there is still some
slight uncertainty as to whether it exists or not. But it now seems highly
probable that it exists.
No other measurable differences between the consequences of
Einstein’s law and those of Newton’s have hitherto been discovered. But the
above experimental tests are quite sufficient to convince astronomers that,
where Newton and Einstein differ as to the motions of the heavenly bodies,
it is Einstein’s law that gives the right results. Even if the empirical grounds
in favor of Einstein stood alone, they would be conclusive. Whether his law
represents the exact truth or not, it is certainly more nearly exact than
Newton’s, though the inaccuracies in Newton’s were all exceedingly
minute.
Page 78
But the considerations which originally led Einstein to his law were not
of this detailed kind. Even the consequence about the perihelion of
Mercury, which could be verified at once from previous observations, could
only be deduced after the theory was complete, and could not form any part
of the original grounds for inventing such a theory. These grounds were of a
more abstract logical character. I do not mean that they were not based upon
observed facts, and I do not mean that they were à priori fantasies such as
philosophers indulged in formerly. What I mean is that they were derived
from certain general characteristics of physical experience, which showed
that Newton must be wrong and that something like Einstein’s law must be
substituted.
The arguments in favor of the relativity of motion are, as we saw in
earlier chapters, quite conclusive. In daily life, when we say that something
moves, we mean that it moves relatively to the earth. In dealing with the
motions of the planets, we consider them as moving relatively to the sun, or
to the center of mass of the solar system. When we say that the solar system
itself is moving, we mean that it is moving relatively to the stars. There is
no physical occurrence which can be called “absolute motion.”
Consequently the laws of physics must be concerned with relative motions,
since these are the only kind that occur.
We now take the relativity of motion in conjunction with the
experimental fact that the velocity of light is the same relatively to one body
as relatively to another, however the two may be moving. This leads us to
the relativity of distances and times. This in turn shows that there is no
objective physical fact which can be called “the distance between two
bodies at a given time,” since the time and the distance will both depend on
the observer. Therefore Newton’s law of gravitation is logically untenable,
since it makes use of “distance at a given time.”
This shows that we cannot rest content with Newton, but it does not
show what we are to put in his place. Here several considerations enter in.
We have in the first place what is called “the equality of gravitational and
inertial mass.” What this means is as follows: When you apply a given
force[6] to a heavy body, you do not give it as much acceleration as you
would to a light body. What is called the “inertial” mass of a body is
measured by the amount of force required to produce a given acceleration.
At a given point of the earth’s surface, the “mass” is proportional to the
of this detailed kind. Even the consequence about the perihelion of
Mercury, which could be verified at once from previous observations, could
only be deduced after the theory was complete, and could not form any part
of the original grounds for inventing such a theory. These grounds were of a
more abstract logical character. I do not mean that they were not based upon
observed facts, and I do not mean that they were à priori fantasies such as
philosophers indulged in formerly. What I mean is that they were derived
from certain general characteristics of physical experience, which showed
that Newton must be wrong and that something like Einstein’s law must be
substituted.
The arguments in favor of the relativity of motion are, as we saw in
earlier chapters, quite conclusive. In daily life, when we say that something
moves, we mean that it moves relatively to the earth. In dealing with the
motions of the planets, we consider them as moving relatively to the sun, or
to the center of mass of the solar system. When we say that the solar system
itself is moving, we mean that it is moving relatively to the stars. There is
no physical occurrence which can be called “absolute motion.”
Consequently the laws of physics must be concerned with relative motions,
since these are the only kind that occur.
We now take the relativity of motion in conjunction with the
experimental fact that the velocity of light is the same relatively to one body
as relatively to another, however the two may be moving. This leads us to
the relativity of distances and times. This in turn shows that there is no
objective physical fact which can be called “the distance between two
bodies at a given time,” since the time and the distance will both depend on
the observer. Therefore Newton’s law of gravitation is logically untenable,
since it makes use of “distance at a given time.”
This shows that we cannot rest content with Newton, but it does not
show what we are to put in his place. Here several considerations enter in.
We have in the first place what is called “the equality of gravitational and
inertial mass.” What this means is as follows: When you apply a given
force[6] to a heavy body, you do not give it as much acceleration as you
would to a light body. What is called the “inertial” mass of a body is
measured by the amount of force required to produce a given acceleration.
At a given point of the earth’s surface, the “mass” is proportional to the
Page 79
“weight.” What is measured by scales is rather the mass than the weight: the
weight is defined as the force with which the earth attracts the body. Now
this force is greater at the poles than at the equator, because at the equator
the rotation of the earth produces a “centrifugal force” which partially
counteracts gravitation. The force of the earth’s attraction is also greater on
the surface of the earth than it is at a great height or at the bottom of a very
deep mine. None of these variations are shown by scales, because they
affect the weights used just as much as the body weighed; but they are
shown if we use a spring balance. The mass does not vary in the course of
these changes of weight.
The “gravitational” mass is differently defined. It is capable of two
meanings. We may mean (1), the way a body responds in a situation where
gravitation has a known intensity, for example, on the surface of the earth,
or on the surface of the sun; or (2), the intensity of the gravitational force
produced by the body, as, for example, the sun produces stronger
gravitational forces than the earth does. Newton says that the force of
gravitation between two bodies is proportional to the product of their
masses. Now let us consider the attraction of different bodies to one and the
same body, say the sun. Then different bodies are attracted by forces which
are proportional to their masses, and which, therefore, produce exactly the
same acceleration in all of them. Thus if we mean “gravitational mass” in
sense (1), that is to say, the way a body responds to gravitation, we find that
“the equality of inertial and gravitational mass,” which sounds formidable,
reduces to this: that in a given gravitational situation, all bodies behave
exactly alike. As regards the surface of the earth, this was one of the first
discoveries of Galileo. Aristotle thought that heavy bodies fall faster than
light ones; Galileo showed that this is not the case, when the resistance of
the air is eliminated. In a vacuum, a feather falls as fast as a lump of lead.
As regards the planets, it was Newton who established the corresponding
facts. At a given distance from the sun, a comet, which has a very small
mass, experiences exactly the same acceleration towards the sun as a planet
experiences at the same distance. Thus the way in which gravitation affects
a body depends only upon where the body is, and in no degree upon the
nature of the body. This suggests that the gravitational effect is a
characteristic of the locality, which is what Einstein makes it.
weight is defined as the force with which the earth attracts the body. Now
this force is greater at the poles than at the equator, because at the equator
the rotation of the earth produces a “centrifugal force” which partially
counteracts gravitation. The force of the earth’s attraction is also greater on
the surface of the earth than it is at a great height or at the bottom of a very
deep mine. None of these variations are shown by scales, because they
affect the weights used just as much as the body weighed; but they are
shown if we use a spring balance. The mass does not vary in the course of
these changes of weight.
The “gravitational” mass is differently defined. It is capable of two
meanings. We may mean (1), the way a body responds in a situation where
gravitation has a known intensity, for example, on the surface of the earth,
or on the surface of the sun; or (2), the intensity of the gravitational force
produced by the body, as, for example, the sun produces stronger
gravitational forces than the earth does. Newton says that the force of
gravitation between two bodies is proportional to the product of their
masses. Now let us consider the attraction of different bodies to one and the
same body, say the sun. Then different bodies are attracted by forces which
are proportional to their masses, and which, therefore, produce exactly the
same acceleration in all of them. Thus if we mean “gravitational mass” in
sense (1), that is to say, the way a body responds to gravitation, we find that
“the equality of inertial and gravitational mass,” which sounds formidable,
reduces to this: that in a given gravitational situation, all bodies behave
exactly alike. As regards the surface of the earth, this was one of the first
discoveries of Galileo. Aristotle thought that heavy bodies fall faster than
light ones; Galileo showed that this is not the case, when the resistance of
the air is eliminated. In a vacuum, a feather falls as fast as a lump of lead.
As regards the planets, it was Newton who established the corresponding
facts. At a given distance from the sun, a comet, which has a very small
mass, experiences exactly the same acceleration towards the sun as a planet
experiences at the same distance. Thus the way in which gravitation affects
a body depends only upon where the body is, and in no degree upon the
nature of the body. This suggests that the gravitational effect is a
characteristic of the locality, which is what Einstein makes it.
Page 80
As for the gravitational mass in sense (2), i.e., the intensity of the force
produced by a body, this is no longer exactly proportional to its inertial
mass. The question involves some rather complicated mathematics, and I
shall not go into it.[7]
We have another indication as to what sort of thing the law of
gravitation must be, if it is to be a characteristic of a neighborhood, as we
have seen reason to suppose that it is. It must be expressed in some law
which is unchanged when we adopt a different kind of co-ordinates. We saw
that we must not, to begin with, regard our co-ordinates as having any
physical significance: they are merely systematic ways of naming different
parts of space-time. Being conventional, they cannot enter into physical
laws. That means to say that, if we have expressed a law correctly in terms
of one set of co-ordinates, it must be expressed by the same formula in
terms of another set of co-ordinates. Or, more exactly, it must be possible to
find a formula which expresses the law, and which is unchanged however
we change the co-ordinates. It is the business of the theory of tensors to deal
with such formulæ. And the theory of tensors shows that there is one
formula which obviously suggests itself as being possibly the law of
gravitation. When this possibility is examined, it is found to give the right
results; it is here that the empirical confirmations come in. But if Einstein’s
law had not been found to agree with experience, we could not have gone
back to Newton’s law. We should have been compelled by logic to seek
some law expressed in terms of “tensors,” and therefore independent of our
choice of co-ordinates. It is impossible without mathematics to explain the
theory of tensors; the non-mathematician must be content to know that it is
the technical method by which we eliminate the conventional element from
our measurements and laws, and thus arrive at physical laws which are
independent of the observer’s point of view. Of this method, Einstein’s law
of gravitation is the most splendid example.
produced by a body, this is no longer exactly proportional to its inertial
mass. The question involves some rather complicated mathematics, and I
shall not go into it.[7]
We have another indication as to what sort of thing the law of
gravitation must be, if it is to be a characteristic of a neighborhood, as we
have seen reason to suppose that it is. It must be expressed in some law
which is unchanged when we adopt a different kind of co-ordinates. We saw
that we must not, to begin with, regard our co-ordinates as having any
physical significance: they are merely systematic ways of naming different
parts of space-time. Being conventional, they cannot enter into physical
laws. That means to say that, if we have expressed a law correctly in terms
of one set of co-ordinates, it must be expressed by the same formula in
terms of another set of co-ordinates. Or, more exactly, it must be possible to
find a formula which expresses the law, and which is unchanged however
we change the co-ordinates. It is the business of the theory of tensors to deal
with such formulæ. And the theory of tensors shows that there is one
formula which obviously suggests itself as being possibly the law of
gravitation. When this possibility is examined, it is found to give the right
results; it is here that the empirical confirmations come in. But if Einstein’s
law had not been found to agree with experience, we could not have gone
back to Newton’s law. We should have been compelled by logic to seek
some law expressed in terms of “tensors,” and therefore independent of our
choice of co-ordinates. It is impossible without mathematics to explain the
theory of tensors; the non-mathematician must be content to know that it is
the technical method by which we eliminate the conventional element from
our measurements and laws, and thus arrive at physical laws which are
independent of the observer’s point of view. Of this method, Einstein’s law
of gravitation is the most splendid example.
Page 81
CHAPTER X:
MASS, MOMENTUM, ENERGY
AND ACTION
T
he pursuit of quantitative precision is as arduous as it is important.
Physical measurements are made with extraordinary exactitude; if they
were made less carefully, such minute discrepancies as form the
experimental data for the theory of relativity could never be revealed.
Mathematical physics, before the coming of relativity, used a set of
conceptions which were supposed to be as precise as physical
measurements, but it has turned out that they were logically defective, and
that this defectiveness showed itself in very small deviations from
expectations based upon calculation. In this chapter I want to show how the
fundamental ideas of pre-relativity physics are affected, and what
modifications they have had to undergo.
We have already had occasion to speak of mass. For purposes of daily
life, mass is much the same as weight; the usual measures of weight—
ounces, grams, etc.—are really measures of mass. But as soon as we begin
to make accurate measurements, we are compelled to distinguish between
mass and weight. Two different methods of weighing are in common use,
one, that of scales, the other that of the spring balance. When you go a
journey and your luggage is weighed, it is not put on scales, but on a spring;
the weight depresses the spring a certain amount, and the result is indicated
by a needle on a dial. The same principle is used in automatic machines for
finding your weight. The spring balance shows weight, but scales show
mass. So long as you stay in one part of the world, the difference does not
matter; but if you test two weighing machines of different kinds in a
number of different places, you will find, if they are accurate, that their
results do not always agree. Scales will give the same result anywhere, but a
spring balance will not. That is to say, if you have a lump of lead weighing
ten pounds by the scales, it will also weigh ten pounds by scales in any
other part of the world. But if it weighs ten pounds by a spring balance in
London, it will weigh more at the North Pole, less at the equator, less high
MASS, MOMENTUM, ENERGY
AND ACTION
T
he pursuit of quantitative precision is as arduous as it is important.
Physical measurements are made with extraordinary exactitude; if they
were made less carefully, such minute discrepancies as form the
experimental data for the theory of relativity could never be revealed.
Mathematical physics, before the coming of relativity, used a set of
conceptions which were supposed to be as precise as physical
measurements, but it has turned out that they were logically defective, and
that this defectiveness showed itself in very small deviations from
expectations based upon calculation. In this chapter I want to show how the
fundamental ideas of pre-relativity physics are affected, and what
modifications they have had to undergo.
We have already had occasion to speak of mass. For purposes of daily
life, mass is much the same as weight; the usual measures of weight—
ounces, grams, etc.—are really measures of mass. But as soon as we begin
to make accurate measurements, we are compelled to distinguish between
mass and weight. Two different methods of weighing are in common use,
one, that of scales, the other that of the spring balance. When you go a
journey and your luggage is weighed, it is not put on scales, but on a spring;
the weight depresses the spring a certain amount, and the result is indicated
by a needle on a dial. The same principle is used in automatic machines for
finding your weight. The spring balance shows weight, but scales show
mass. So long as you stay in one part of the world, the difference does not
matter; but if you test two weighing machines of different kinds in a
number of different places, you will find, if they are accurate, that their
results do not always agree. Scales will give the same result anywhere, but a
spring balance will not. That is to say, if you have a lump of lead weighing
ten pounds by the scales, it will also weigh ten pounds by scales in any
other part of the world. But if it weighs ten pounds by a spring balance in
London, it will weigh more at the North Pole, less at the equator, less high
Page 82
up in an aeroplane, and less at the bottom of a coal mine, if it is weighed in
all those places on the same spring balance. The fact is that the two
instruments measure quite different quantities. The scales measure what
may be called (apart from refinements which will concern us presently)
“quantity of matter.” There is the same “quantity of matter” in a pound of
feathers as in a pound of lead. Standard “weights,” which are really
standard “masses,” will measure the amount of mass in any substance put
into the opposite scales. But “weight” is a properly due to the earth’s
gravitation: It is the amount of the force by which the earth attracts a body.
This force varies from place to place. In the first place, anywhere outside
the earth the attraction varies inversely as the square of the distance from
the center of the earth; it is therefore less at great heights. In the second
place, when you go down a coal mine, part of the earth is above you, and
attracts matter upwards instead of downwards, so that the net attraction
downwards is less than on the surface of the earth. In the third place, owing
to the rotation of the earth, there is what is called a “centrifugal force,”
which acts against gravitation. This is greatest at the equator, because there
the rotation of the earth involves the fastest motion; at the poles it does not
exist, because they are on the axis of rotation. For all these reasons, the
force with which a given body is attracted to the earth is measureably
different at different places. It is this force that is measured by a spring
balance; that is why a spring balance gives different results in different
places. In the case of scales, the standard “weights” are altered just as much
as the body to be weighed, so that the result is the same everywhere; but the
result is the “mass,” not the “weight.” A standard “weight” has the same
mass everywhere, but not the same “weight”; it is in fact a unit of mass, not
of weight. For theoretical purposes, mass, which is almost invariable for a
given body, is much more important than weight, which varies according to
circumstances. Mass may be regarded, to begin with, as “quantity of
matter”; we shall see that this view is not strictly correct, but it will serve as
a starting point for subsequent refinements.
For theoretical purposes, a mass is defined as being determined by the
amount of force required to produce a given acceleration: The more
massive a body is, the greater will be the force required to alter its velocity
by a given amount in a given time. It takes a more powerful engine to make
a long train attain a speed of ten miles an hour at the end of the first half-
minute, than it does to make a short train do so. Or we may have
all those places on the same spring balance. The fact is that the two
instruments measure quite different quantities. The scales measure what
may be called (apart from refinements which will concern us presently)
“quantity of matter.” There is the same “quantity of matter” in a pound of
feathers as in a pound of lead. Standard “weights,” which are really
standard “masses,” will measure the amount of mass in any substance put
into the opposite scales. But “weight” is a properly due to the earth’s
gravitation: It is the amount of the force by which the earth attracts a body.
This force varies from place to place. In the first place, anywhere outside
the earth the attraction varies inversely as the square of the distance from
the center of the earth; it is therefore less at great heights. In the second
place, when you go down a coal mine, part of the earth is above you, and
attracts matter upwards instead of downwards, so that the net attraction
downwards is less than on the surface of the earth. In the third place, owing
to the rotation of the earth, there is what is called a “centrifugal force,”
which acts against gravitation. This is greatest at the equator, because there
the rotation of the earth involves the fastest motion; at the poles it does not
exist, because they are on the axis of rotation. For all these reasons, the
force with which a given body is attracted to the earth is measureably
different at different places. It is this force that is measured by a spring
balance; that is why a spring balance gives different results in different
places. In the case of scales, the standard “weights” are altered just as much
as the body to be weighed, so that the result is the same everywhere; but the
result is the “mass,” not the “weight.” A standard “weight” has the same
mass everywhere, but not the same “weight”; it is in fact a unit of mass, not
of weight. For theoretical purposes, mass, which is almost invariable for a
given body, is much more important than weight, which varies according to
circumstances. Mass may be regarded, to begin with, as “quantity of
matter”; we shall see that this view is not strictly correct, but it will serve as
a starting point for subsequent refinements.
For theoretical purposes, a mass is defined as being determined by the
amount of force required to produce a given acceleration: The more
massive a body is, the greater will be the force required to alter its velocity
by a given amount in a given time. It takes a more powerful engine to make
a long train attain a speed of ten miles an hour at the end of the first half-
minute, than it does to make a short train do so. Or we may have
Page 83
circumstances where the force is the same for a number of different bodies;
in that case, if we can measure the accelerations produced in them, we can
tell the ratios of their masses: the greater the mass, the smaller the
acceleration. We may take, in illustration of this method, an example which
is important in connection with relativity. Radio-active bodies emit beta-
particles (electrons) with enormous velocities. We can observe their path by
making them travel through water vapor and form a cloud as they go. We
can at the same time subject them to known electric and magnetic forces,
and observe how much they are bent out of a straight line by these forces.
This makes it possible to compare their masses. It is found that the faster
they travel, the greater is their mass, as measured by the stationary
observer; the increase is greatest as applied to their mass as measured by the
effect of a force in the line of motion. In regard to forces at right angles to
the line of motion, there is a change of mass with velocity in the same
proportion as the changes of length and time. It is known otherwise that,
apart from the effect of motion, all electrons have the same mass.
All this was known before the theory of relativity was invented, but it
showed that the traditional conception of mass had not quite the
definiteness that had been ascribed to it. Mass used to be regarded as
“quantity of matter,” and supposed to be quite invariable. Now mass was
found to be relative to the observer, like length and time, and to be altered
by motion in exactly the same proportion. However, this could be remedied.
We could take the “proper mass,” the mass as measured by an observer who
shares the motion of the body. This was easily inferred from the measured
mass, by taking the same proportion as in the case of lengths and times.
But there is a more curious fact, and that is, that after we have made this
correction we still have not obtained a quantity which is at all times exactly
the same for the same body. When a body absorbs energy—for example, by
growing hotter—its “proper mass” increases slightly. The increase is very
slight, since it is measured by dividing the increase of energy by the square
of the velocity of light. On the other hand, when a body parts with energy it
loses mass. The most notable case of this is that four hydrogen atoms can
come together to make one helium atom, but a helium atom has rather less
than four times the mass of one hydrogen atom.
We have thus two kinds of mass, neither of which quite fulfils the old
ideal. The mass as measured by an observer who is in motion relative to the
in that case, if we can measure the accelerations produced in them, we can
tell the ratios of their masses: the greater the mass, the smaller the
acceleration. We may take, in illustration of this method, an example which
is important in connection with relativity. Radio-active bodies emit beta-
particles (electrons) with enormous velocities. We can observe their path by
making them travel through water vapor and form a cloud as they go. We
can at the same time subject them to known electric and magnetic forces,
and observe how much they are bent out of a straight line by these forces.
This makes it possible to compare their masses. It is found that the faster
they travel, the greater is their mass, as measured by the stationary
observer; the increase is greatest as applied to their mass as measured by the
effect of a force in the line of motion. In regard to forces at right angles to
the line of motion, there is a change of mass with velocity in the same
proportion as the changes of length and time. It is known otherwise that,
apart from the effect of motion, all electrons have the same mass.
All this was known before the theory of relativity was invented, but it
showed that the traditional conception of mass had not quite the
definiteness that had been ascribed to it. Mass used to be regarded as
“quantity of matter,” and supposed to be quite invariable. Now mass was
found to be relative to the observer, like length and time, and to be altered
by motion in exactly the same proportion. However, this could be remedied.
We could take the “proper mass,” the mass as measured by an observer who
shares the motion of the body. This was easily inferred from the measured
mass, by taking the same proportion as in the case of lengths and times.
But there is a more curious fact, and that is, that after we have made this
correction we still have not obtained a quantity which is at all times exactly
the same for the same body. When a body absorbs energy—for example, by
growing hotter—its “proper mass” increases slightly. The increase is very
slight, since it is measured by dividing the increase of energy by the square
of the velocity of light. On the other hand, when a body parts with energy it
loses mass. The most notable case of this is that four hydrogen atoms can
come together to make one helium atom, but a helium atom has rather less
than four times the mass of one hydrogen atom.
We have thus two kinds of mass, neither of which quite fulfils the old
ideal. The mass as measured by an observer who is in motion relative to the
Page 84
body in question is a relative quantity, and has no physical significance as a
property of the body. The “proper mass” is a genuine property of the body,
not dependent upon the observer; but it, also, is not strictly constant. As we
shall see shortly, the notion of mass becomes absorbed into the notion of
energy; it represents, so to speak, the energy which the body expends
internally, as opposed to that which it displays to the outer world.
Conservation of mass, conservation of momentum, and conservation of
energy were the great principles of classical mechanics. Let us next
consider conservation of momentum.
The momentum of a body in a given direction is its velocity in that
direction multiplied by its mass. Thus a heavy body moving slowly may
have the same momentum as a light body moving fast. When a number of
bodies interact in any way, for instance by collisions, or by mutual
gravitation, so long as no outside influences come in, the total momentum
of all the bodies in any direction remains unchanged. This law remains true
in the theory of relativity. For different observers, the mass will be different,
but so will the velocity; these two differences neutralize each other, and it
turns out that the principle still remains true.
The momentum of a body is different in different directions. The
ordinary way of measuring it is to take the velocity in a given direction (as
measured by the observer) and multiply it by the mass (as measured by the
observer). Now the velocity in a given direction is the distance traveled in
that direction in unit time. Suppose we take instead the distance traveled in
that direction while the body moves through unit “interval.” (In ordinary
cases, this is only a very slight change, because, for velocities considerably
less than that of light, interval is very nearly equal to lapse of time.) And
suppose that instead of the mass as measured by the observer we take the
proper mass. These two changes increase the velocity and diminish the
mass, both in, the same proportion. Thus the momentum remains the same,
but the quantities that vary according to the observer have been replaced by
quantities which are fixed independently of the observer—with the
exception of the distance traveled by the body in the given direction.
When we substitute space-time for time, we find that the measured mass
(as opposed to the proper mass) is a quantity of the same kind as the
momentum in a given direction; it might be called the momentum in the
property of the body. The “proper mass” is a genuine property of the body,
not dependent upon the observer; but it, also, is not strictly constant. As we
shall see shortly, the notion of mass becomes absorbed into the notion of
energy; it represents, so to speak, the energy which the body expends
internally, as opposed to that which it displays to the outer world.
Conservation of mass, conservation of momentum, and conservation of
energy were the great principles of classical mechanics. Let us next
consider conservation of momentum.
The momentum of a body in a given direction is its velocity in that
direction multiplied by its mass. Thus a heavy body moving slowly may
have the same momentum as a light body moving fast. When a number of
bodies interact in any way, for instance by collisions, or by mutual
gravitation, so long as no outside influences come in, the total momentum
of all the bodies in any direction remains unchanged. This law remains true
in the theory of relativity. For different observers, the mass will be different,
but so will the velocity; these two differences neutralize each other, and it
turns out that the principle still remains true.
The momentum of a body is different in different directions. The
ordinary way of measuring it is to take the velocity in a given direction (as
measured by the observer) and multiply it by the mass (as measured by the
observer). Now the velocity in a given direction is the distance traveled in
that direction in unit time. Suppose we take instead the distance traveled in
that direction while the body moves through unit “interval.” (In ordinary
cases, this is only a very slight change, because, for velocities considerably
less than that of light, interval is very nearly equal to lapse of time.) And
suppose that instead of the mass as measured by the observer we take the
proper mass. These two changes increase the velocity and diminish the
mass, both in, the same proportion. Thus the momentum remains the same,
but the quantities that vary according to the observer have been replaced by
quantities which are fixed independently of the observer—with the
exception of the distance traveled by the body in the given direction.
When we substitute space-time for time, we find that the measured mass
(as opposed to the proper mass) is a quantity of the same kind as the
momentum in a given direction; it might be called the momentum in the
Page 85
time direction. The measured mass is obtained by multiplying the invariant
mass by the time traversed in traveling through unit interval; the momentum
is obtained by multiplying the same invariant mass by the distance
traversed (in the given direction) in traveling through unit interval. From a
space-time point of view, these naturally belong together.
Although the measured mass of a body depends upon the way the
observer is moving relatively to the body, it is none the less a very
important quantity. For any given observer, the measured mass of the whole
physical universe is constant.[8] The proper mass of all the bodies in the
world is not necessarily the same at one time as at another, so that in this
respect the measured mass has an advantage. The conservation of measured
mass is the same thing as the conservation of energy. This may seem
surprising, since at first sight mass and energy are very different things. But
it has turned out that energy is the same thing as measured mass. To explain
how this comes about is not easy; nevertheless we will make the attempt.
In popular talk, “mass” and “energy” do not mean at all the same thing.
We associate “mass” with the idea of a fat man in a chair, very slow to
move, while “energy” suggests a thin person full of hustle and “pep.”
Popular talk associates “mass” and “inertia,” but its view of inertia is one-
sided: it includes slowness in beginning to move, but not slowness in
stopping, which is equally involved. All these terms have technical
meanings in physics, which are only more or less analogous to the
meanings of the terms in popular talk. For the present, we are concerned
with the technical meaning of “energy.”
Throughout the latter half of the nineteenth century, a great deal was
made of the “conservation of energy,” or the “persistence of force,” as
Herbert Spencer preferred to call it. This principle was not easy to state in a
simple way, because of the different forms of energy; but the essential point
was that energy is never created or destroyed, though it can be transformed
from one kind into another. The principle acquired its position through
Joule’s discovery of “the mechanical equivalent of heat,” which showed
that there was a constant proportion between the work required to produce a
given amount of heat and the work required to raise a given weight through
a given height: in fact, the same sort of work could be utilized for either
purpose according to the mechanism. When heat was found to consist in
motion of molecules, it was seen to be natural that it should be analogous to
mass by the time traversed in traveling through unit interval; the momentum
is obtained by multiplying the same invariant mass by the distance
traversed (in the given direction) in traveling through unit interval. From a
space-time point of view, these naturally belong together.
Although the measured mass of a body depends upon the way the
observer is moving relatively to the body, it is none the less a very
important quantity. For any given observer, the measured mass of the whole
physical universe is constant.[8] The proper mass of all the bodies in the
world is not necessarily the same at one time as at another, so that in this
respect the measured mass has an advantage. The conservation of measured
mass is the same thing as the conservation of energy. This may seem
surprising, since at first sight mass and energy are very different things. But
it has turned out that energy is the same thing as measured mass. To explain
how this comes about is not easy; nevertheless we will make the attempt.
In popular talk, “mass” and “energy” do not mean at all the same thing.
We associate “mass” with the idea of a fat man in a chair, very slow to
move, while “energy” suggests a thin person full of hustle and “pep.”
Popular talk associates “mass” and “inertia,” but its view of inertia is one-
sided: it includes slowness in beginning to move, but not slowness in
stopping, which is equally involved. All these terms have technical
meanings in physics, which are only more or less analogous to the
meanings of the terms in popular talk. For the present, we are concerned
with the technical meaning of “energy.”
Throughout the latter half of the nineteenth century, a great deal was
made of the “conservation of energy,” or the “persistence of force,” as
Herbert Spencer preferred to call it. This principle was not easy to state in a
simple way, because of the different forms of energy; but the essential point
was that energy is never created or destroyed, though it can be transformed
from one kind into another. The principle acquired its position through
Joule’s discovery of “the mechanical equivalent of heat,” which showed
that there was a constant proportion between the work required to produce a
given amount of heat and the work required to raise a given weight through
a given height: in fact, the same sort of work could be utilized for either
purpose according to the mechanism. When heat was found to consist in
motion of molecules, it was seen to be natural that it should be analogous to
Page 86
other forms of energy. Broadly speaking, by the help of a certain amount of
theory, all forms of energy were reduced to two, which were called
respectively “kinetic” and “potential.” These were defined as follows:
The kinetic energy of a particle is half the mass multiplied by the square
of the velocity. The kinetic energy of a number of particles is the sum of the
kinetic energies of the separate particles.
The potential energy is more difficult to define. It represents any state of
strain, which can only be preserved by the application of force. To take the
easiest case: If a weight is lifted to a height and kept suspended, it has
potential energy, because, if left to itself, it will fall. Its potential energy is
equal to the kinetic energy which it would acquire in falling through the
same distance through which it was lifted. Similarly when a comet goes
round the sun in a very eccentric orbit, it moves much faster when it is near
the sun than when it is far from it, so that its kinetic energy is much greater
when it is near the sun. On the other hand, its potential energy is greatest
when it is farthest from the sun, because it is then like the stone which has
been lifted to a height. The sum of the kinetic and potential energies of the
comet is constant, unless it suffers collisions or loses matter by forming a
tail. We can determine accurately the change of potential energy in passing
from one position to another, but the total amount of it is to a certain extent
arbitrary, since we can fix the zero level where we like. For example, the
potential energy of our stone may be taken to be the kinetic energy it would
acquire in falling to the surface of the earth, or what it would acquire in
falling down a well to the center of the earth, or any assigned lesser
distance. It does not matter which we take, so long as we stick to our
decision. We are concerned with a profit-and-loss account, which is
unaffected by the amount of the assets with which we start.
Both the kinetic and the potential energies of a given set of bodies will
be different for different observers. In classical dynamics, the kinetic energy
differed according to the state of motion of the observer, but only by a
constant amount; the potential energy did not differ at all. Consequently, for
each observer, the total energy was constant—assuming always that the
observers concerned were moving in straight lines with uniform velocities,
or, if not, were able to refer their motions to bodies which were so moving.
But in relativity dynamics the matter becomes more complicated. We
cannot profitably adapt the idea of potential energy to the theory of
theory, all forms of energy were reduced to two, which were called
respectively “kinetic” and “potential.” These were defined as follows:
The kinetic energy of a particle is half the mass multiplied by the square
of the velocity. The kinetic energy of a number of particles is the sum of the
kinetic energies of the separate particles.
The potential energy is more difficult to define. It represents any state of
strain, which can only be preserved by the application of force. To take the
easiest case: If a weight is lifted to a height and kept suspended, it has
potential energy, because, if left to itself, it will fall. Its potential energy is
equal to the kinetic energy which it would acquire in falling through the
same distance through which it was lifted. Similarly when a comet goes
round the sun in a very eccentric orbit, it moves much faster when it is near
the sun than when it is far from it, so that its kinetic energy is much greater
when it is near the sun. On the other hand, its potential energy is greatest
when it is farthest from the sun, because it is then like the stone which has
been lifted to a height. The sum of the kinetic and potential energies of the
comet is constant, unless it suffers collisions or loses matter by forming a
tail. We can determine accurately the change of potential energy in passing
from one position to another, but the total amount of it is to a certain extent
arbitrary, since we can fix the zero level where we like. For example, the
potential energy of our stone may be taken to be the kinetic energy it would
acquire in falling to the surface of the earth, or what it would acquire in
falling down a well to the center of the earth, or any assigned lesser
distance. It does not matter which we take, so long as we stick to our
decision. We are concerned with a profit-and-loss account, which is
unaffected by the amount of the assets with which we start.
Both the kinetic and the potential energies of a given set of bodies will
be different for different observers. In classical dynamics, the kinetic energy
differed according to the state of motion of the observer, but only by a
constant amount; the potential energy did not differ at all. Consequently, for
each observer, the total energy was constant—assuming always that the
observers concerned were moving in straight lines with uniform velocities,
or, if not, were able to refer their motions to bodies which were so moving.
But in relativity dynamics the matter becomes more complicated. We
cannot profitably adapt the idea of potential energy to the theory of
Page 87
relativity, and therefore the conservation of energy, in a strict sense, cannot
be maintained. But we obtain a property, closely analogous to conservation,
which applies to kinetic energy alone. As Eddington puts it: the kinetic
energy is not always strictly conserved, and the classical theory therefore
introduces a supplementary quantity, the potential energy, so that the sum of
the two is strictly conserved. The relativity treatment, on the other hand,
discovers another formula, analogous to the one expressing conservation,
which holds always for the kinetic energy. “The relativity treatment adheres
to the physical quantity and modifies the law; the classical treatment
adheres to the law and modifies the physical quantity.” The new formula, he
continues, may be spoken of “as the law of conservation of energy and
momentum, because, though it is not formally a law of conservation, it
expresses exactly the phenomena which classical mechanics attributes to
conservation.”[9] It is only in this modified and less rigorous sense that the
conservation of energy remains true.
What is meant by “conservation” in practice is not exactly what it
means in theory. In theory we say that a quantity is conserved when the
amount of it in the world is the same at any one time as at any other. But in
practice we cannot survey the whole world, so we have to mean something
more manageable. We mean that, taking any given region, if the amount of
the quantity in the region has changed, it is because some of the quantity
has passed across the boundary of the region. If there were no births and
deaths, population would be conserved; in that case the population of a
country could only change by emigration or immigration, that is to say, by
passing across the boundaries. We might be unable to take an accurate
census of China or Central Africa, and, therefore, we might not be able to
ascertain the total population of the world. But we should be justified in
assuming it to be constant if, wherever statistics were possible, the
population never changed except through people crossing the frontiers. In
fact, of course, population is not conserved. A physiologist of my
acquaintance once put four mice into a thermos. Some hours later, when he
went to take them out, there were eleven of them. But mass is not subject to
these fluctuations: the mass of the eleven mice at the end of the time was no
greater than the mass of the four at the beginning.
This brings us back to the problem for the sake of which we have been
discussing energy. We stated that, in relativity theory, measured mass and
be maintained. But we obtain a property, closely analogous to conservation,
which applies to kinetic energy alone. As Eddington puts it: the kinetic
energy is not always strictly conserved, and the classical theory therefore
introduces a supplementary quantity, the potential energy, so that the sum of
the two is strictly conserved. The relativity treatment, on the other hand,
discovers another formula, analogous to the one expressing conservation,
which holds always for the kinetic energy. “The relativity treatment adheres
to the physical quantity and modifies the law; the classical treatment
adheres to the law and modifies the physical quantity.” The new formula, he
continues, may be spoken of “as the law of conservation of energy and
momentum, because, though it is not formally a law of conservation, it
expresses exactly the phenomena which classical mechanics attributes to
conservation.”[9] It is only in this modified and less rigorous sense that the
conservation of energy remains true.
What is meant by “conservation” in practice is not exactly what it
means in theory. In theory we say that a quantity is conserved when the
amount of it in the world is the same at any one time as at any other. But in
practice we cannot survey the whole world, so we have to mean something
more manageable. We mean that, taking any given region, if the amount of
the quantity in the region has changed, it is because some of the quantity
has passed across the boundary of the region. If there were no births and
deaths, population would be conserved; in that case the population of a
country could only change by emigration or immigration, that is to say, by
passing across the boundaries. We might be unable to take an accurate
census of China or Central Africa, and, therefore, we might not be able to
ascertain the total population of the world. But we should be justified in
assuming it to be constant if, wherever statistics were possible, the
population never changed except through people crossing the frontiers. In
fact, of course, population is not conserved. A physiologist of my
acquaintance once put four mice into a thermos. Some hours later, when he
went to take them out, there were eleven of them. But mass is not subject to
these fluctuations: the mass of the eleven mice at the end of the time was no
greater than the mass of the four at the beginning.
This brings us back to the problem for the sake of which we have been
discussing energy. We stated that, in relativity theory, measured mass and
Page 88
energy are regarded as the same thing, and we undertook to explain why. It
is now time to embark upon this explanation. But here, as at the end of
Chapter VI, the totally unmathematical reader will do well to skip, and
begin again at the following paragraph.
Let us take the velocity of light as the unit of velocity; this is always
convenient in relativity theory. Let m be the proper mass of a particle, v its
velocity relative to the observer. Then its measured mass will be
m
———
√(1 - v²)
while its kinetic energy, according to the usual formula, will be
½ mv²
As we saw before, energy only occurs in a profit-and-loss account, so
that we can add any constant quantity to it that we like. We may therefore
take the energy to be
m + ½ mv²
Now if v is a small fraction of the velocity of light,
m + ½ mv²
is almost exactly equal to
m
———
√(1 - v²)
Consequently, for velocities such as large bodies have, the energy and
the measured mass turn out to be indistinguishable within the limits of
accuracy attainable. In fact, it is better to alter our definition of energy, and
take it to be
is now time to embark upon this explanation. But here, as at the end of
Chapter VI, the totally unmathematical reader will do well to skip, and
begin again at the following paragraph.
Let us take the velocity of light as the unit of velocity; this is always
convenient in relativity theory. Let m be the proper mass of a particle, v its
velocity relative to the observer. Then its measured mass will be
m
———
√(1 - v²)
while its kinetic energy, according to the usual formula, will be
½ mv²
As we saw before, energy only occurs in a profit-and-loss account, so
that we can add any constant quantity to it that we like. We may therefore
take the energy to be
m + ½ mv²
Now if v is a small fraction of the velocity of light,
m + ½ mv²
is almost exactly equal to
m
———
√(1 - v²)
Consequently, for velocities such as large bodies have, the energy and
the measured mass turn out to be indistinguishable within the limits of
accuracy attainable. In fact, it is better to alter our definition of energy, and
take it to be
Page 89
m
———
√(1 - v²)
because this is the quantity for which the law analogous to conservation
holds. And when the velocity is very great, it gives a better measure of
energy than the traditional formula. The traditional formula must therefore
be regarded as an approximation, of which the new formula gives the exact
version. In this way, energy and measured mass become identified.
I come now to the notion of “action,” which is less familiar to the
general public than energy, but has become more important in relativity
physics, as well as in the theory of quanta.[10] (The quantum is a small
amount of action.) The word “action” is used to denote energy multiplied
by time. That is to say, if there is one unit of energy in a system, it will exert
one unit of action in a second, 100 units of action in 100 seconds, and so
on; a system which has 100 units of energy will exert 100 units of action in
a second, and 10,000 in 100 seconds, and so on. “Action” is thus, in a loose
sense, a measure of how much has been accomplished: it is increased both
by displaying more energy and by working for a longer time. Since energy
is the same thing as measured mass, we may also take action to be
measured mass multiplied by time. In classical mechanics, the “density” of
matter in any region is the mass divided by the volume; that is to say, if you
know the density in a small region, you discover the total amount of matter
by multiplying the density by the volume of the small region. In relativity
mechanics, we always want to substitute space-time for space; therefore a
“region” must no longer be taken to be merely a volume, but a volume
lasting for a time; a small region will be a small volume lasting for a small
time. It follows that, given the density, a small region in the new sense
contains, not a small mass merely, but a small mass multiplied by a small
time, that is to say, a small amount of “action.” This explains why it is to be
expected that “action” will prove of fundamental importance in relativity
mechanics. And so in fact it is.
All the laws of dynamics have been put together into one principle,
called “The Principle of Least Action.” This states that, in passing from one
state to another, a body chooses a route involving less action than any
———
√(1 - v²)
because this is the quantity for which the law analogous to conservation
holds. And when the velocity is very great, it gives a better measure of
energy than the traditional formula. The traditional formula must therefore
be regarded as an approximation, of which the new formula gives the exact
version. In this way, energy and measured mass become identified.
I come now to the notion of “action,” which is less familiar to the
general public than energy, but has become more important in relativity
physics, as well as in the theory of quanta.[10] (The quantum is a small
amount of action.) The word “action” is used to denote energy multiplied
by time. That is to say, if there is one unit of energy in a system, it will exert
one unit of action in a second, 100 units of action in 100 seconds, and so
on; a system which has 100 units of energy will exert 100 units of action in
a second, and 10,000 in 100 seconds, and so on. “Action” is thus, in a loose
sense, a measure of how much has been accomplished: it is increased both
by displaying more energy and by working for a longer time. Since energy
is the same thing as measured mass, we may also take action to be
measured mass multiplied by time. In classical mechanics, the “density” of
matter in any region is the mass divided by the volume; that is to say, if you
know the density in a small region, you discover the total amount of matter
by multiplying the density by the volume of the small region. In relativity
mechanics, we always want to substitute space-time for space; therefore a
“region” must no longer be taken to be merely a volume, but a volume
lasting for a time; a small region will be a small volume lasting for a small
time. It follows that, given the density, a small region in the new sense
contains, not a small mass merely, but a small mass multiplied by a small
time, that is to say, a small amount of “action.” This explains why it is to be
expected that “action” will prove of fundamental importance in relativity
mechanics. And so in fact it is.
All the laws of dynamics have been put together into one principle,
called “The Principle of Least Action.” This states that, in passing from one
state to another, a body chooses a route involving less action than any
Page 90
slightly different route—again a law of cosmic laziness. The principle is
subject to certain limitations, which have been pointed out by Eddington,[11]
but it remains one of the most comprehensive ways of stating the purely
formal part of mechanics. The fact that the quantum is a unit of action
seems to show that action is also fundamental in the empirical structure of
the world. But at present there is no bridge connecting the quantum with the
theory of relativity.
subject to certain limitations, which have been pointed out by Eddington,[11]
but it remains one of the most comprehensive ways of stating the purely
formal part of mechanics. The fact that the quantum is a unit of action
seems to show that action is also fundamental in the empirical structure of
the world. But at present there is no bridge connecting the quantum with the
theory of relativity.
Page 91
CHAPTER XI:
IS THE UNIVERSE FINITE?
W e have been dealing hitherto with matters that must be regarded as
acquired scientific results—not that they will never be found to need
improvement, but that further progress must be built upon them, as
Einstein is built upon Newton. Science does not aim at establishing
immutable truths and eternal dogmas: its aim is to approach truth by
successive approximations, without claiming that at any stage final and
complete accuracy has been achieved. There is a difference, however,
between results which are pretty certainly in the line of advance, and
speculations which may or may not prove to be well founded. Some very
interesting speculations are connected with the theory of relativity, and we
shall consider certain of them. But it must not be supposed that we are
dealing with theories having the same solidity as those with which we have
been concerned hitherto.
One of the most fascinating of the speculations to which I have been
alluding is the suggestion that the universe may be of finite extent. Two
somewhat different finite universes have been constructed, one by Einstein,
the other by De Sitter. Before considering their differences, we will discuss
what they have in common.
There are, to begin with, certain reasons for thinking that the total
amount of matter in the universe is limited. If this were not the case, the
gravitational effects of enormously distant matter would make the kind of
world in which we live impossible. We must therefore suppose that there is
some definite number of electrons and protons in the world: theoretically, a
complete census would be possible. These are all contained within a certain
finite region; whatever space lies outside that region is, so to speak, waste,
like unfurnished rooms in a house too large for its inhabitants. This seems
futile, but in former days no one knew of any alternative possibility. It was
obviously impossible to conceive of an edge to space, and therefore, it was
thought, space must be infinite.
IS THE UNIVERSE FINITE?
W e have been dealing hitherto with matters that must be regarded as
acquired scientific results—not that they will never be found to need
improvement, but that further progress must be built upon them, as
Einstein is built upon Newton. Science does not aim at establishing
immutable truths and eternal dogmas: its aim is to approach truth by
successive approximations, without claiming that at any stage final and
complete accuracy has been achieved. There is a difference, however,
between results which are pretty certainly in the line of advance, and
speculations which may or may not prove to be well founded. Some very
interesting speculations are connected with the theory of relativity, and we
shall consider certain of them. But it must not be supposed that we are
dealing with theories having the same solidity as those with which we have
been concerned hitherto.
One of the most fascinating of the speculations to which I have been
alluding is the suggestion that the universe may be of finite extent. Two
somewhat different finite universes have been constructed, one by Einstein,
the other by De Sitter. Before considering their differences, we will discuss
what they have in common.
There are, to begin with, certain reasons for thinking that the total
amount of matter in the universe is limited. If this were not the case, the
gravitational effects of enormously distant matter would make the kind of
world in which we live impossible. We must therefore suppose that there is
some definite number of electrons and protons in the world: theoretically, a
complete census would be possible. These are all contained within a certain
finite region; whatever space lies outside that region is, so to speak, waste,
like unfurnished rooms in a house too large for its inhabitants. This seems
futile, but in former days no one knew of any alternative possibility. It was
obviously impossible to conceive of an edge to space, and therefore, it was
thought, space must be infinite.
Page 92
Non-Euclidean geometry, however, showed other possibilities. The
surface of a sphere has no boundary, yet it is not infinite. In traveling round
the earth, we never reach “the edge of the world,” and yet the earth is not
infinite. The surface of the earth is contained in three-dimensional space,
but there is no reason in logic why three-dimensional space should not be
constructed on an analogous plan. What we imagine to be straight lines
going on for ever will then be like great circles on a sphere: they will
ultimately return to their starting point. There will not be in the universe
anything straighter than these great circles; the Euclidean straight line may
remain as a beautiful dream, but not as a possibility in the actual world. In
particular, light rays in empty space will travel in what are really great
circles. If we could make measurements with sufficient accuracy, we should
be able to infer this state of affairs even from a small part of space, because
the sum of the angles of a triangle would always be greater than two right
angles, and the excess would be proportional to the size of the triangle. The
suggestion we have to consider is the suggestion that our universe may be
spherical in this sense.
The reader must not confuse this suggestion with the non-Euclidean
character of space upon which the new law of gravitation depends. The
latter is concerned with small regions such as the solar system. The
departures from flatness which it notices are like hills and valleys on the
surface of the earth, local irregularities, not characteristics of the whole. We
are now concerned with the possible curvature of the universe as a whole,
not with the occasional ups and downs due to the sun and the stars. It is
suggested that on the average, and in regions remote from matter, the
universe is not quite flat, but has a slight curvature, analogous, in three
dimensions, to the curvature of a sphere in two dimensions.
It is important to realize, in the first place, that there is not the slightest
reason à priori why this should not be the case. People unaccustomed to
non-Euclidean geometry may feel that, even if such a thing be logically
possible, the world simply cannot be so odd as all that. We all have a
tendency to think that the world must conform to our prejudices. The
opposite view involves some effort of thought, and most people would die
sooner than think—in fact, they do so. But the fact that a spherical universe
seems odd to people who have been brought up on Euclidean prejudices is
no evidence that it is impossible. There is no law of nature to the effect that
surface of a sphere has no boundary, yet it is not infinite. In traveling round
the earth, we never reach “the edge of the world,” and yet the earth is not
infinite. The surface of the earth is contained in three-dimensional space,
but there is no reason in logic why three-dimensional space should not be
constructed on an analogous plan. What we imagine to be straight lines
going on for ever will then be like great circles on a sphere: they will
ultimately return to their starting point. There will not be in the universe
anything straighter than these great circles; the Euclidean straight line may
remain as a beautiful dream, but not as a possibility in the actual world. In
particular, light rays in empty space will travel in what are really great
circles. If we could make measurements with sufficient accuracy, we should
be able to infer this state of affairs even from a small part of space, because
the sum of the angles of a triangle would always be greater than two right
angles, and the excess would be proportional to the size of the triangle. The
suggestion we have to consider is the suggestion that our universe may be
spherical in this sense.
The reader must not confuse this suggestion with the non-Euclidean
character of space upon which the new law of gravitation depends. The
latter is concerned with small regions such as the solar system. The
departures from flatness which it notices are like hills and valleys on the
surface of the earth, local irregularities, not characteristics of the whole. We
are now concerned with the possible curvature of the universe as a whole,
not with the occasional ups and downs due to the sun and the stars. It is
suggested that on the average, and in regions remote from matter, the
universe is not quite flat, but has a slight curvature, analogous, in three
dimensions, to the curvature of a sphere in two dimensions.
It is important to realize, in the first place, that there is not the slightest
reason à priori why this should not be the case. People unaccustomed to
non-Euclidean geometry may feel that, even if such a thing be logically
possible, the world simply cannot be so odd as all that. We all have a
tendency to think that the world must conform to our prejudices. The
opposite view involves some effort of thought, and most people would die
sooner than think—in fact, they do so. But the fact that a spherical universe
seems odd to people who have been brought up on Euclidean prejudices is
no evidence that it is impossible. There is no law of nature to the effect that
Page 93
what is taught at school must be true. We cannot therefore dismiss the
hypothesis of a spherical universe as in any degree less worthy of
examination than any other. We have to ask ourselves the same two
questions as we should in any other case, namely: (1) Are the facts
consistent with this hypothesis? (2) Is this hypothesis the only one with
which the facts are consistent?
With regard to the first question, the answer is undoubtedly in the
affirmative. All the known facts are perfectly consistent with the hypothesis
of a spherical universe. A very slight modification of the law of gravitation
—a modification suggested by Einstein himself—leads to a spherical space,
without producing any measurable differences in a small region such as the
solar system. The known stars are all within a certain distance from us.
There is nothing whatever in the stellar universe as we know it to show that
space must be infinite. There can therefore be no doubt whatever that, so far
as our present knowledge goes, the hypothesis of a finite universe may be
true.
But when we ask whether the hypothesis of a finite universe must be
true, the answer is different. It is obvious, on general grounds, that we
cannot, from what we know, draw conclusive inferences as to the totality of
things. A very slight change in the Newtonian formula for gravitation would
prevent masses beyond the limits of the visible universe from having
appreciable effects if they existed, and would therefore destroy our reason
for supposing that they do not exist. All arguments as to regions which are
too distant to be observed depend upon extending to them the laws which
hold in our part of the world, and upon assuming that there is not, in these
laws, some inaccuracy which is inappreciable for observable distances, but
fatal to inferences in which very much greater distances are involved. We
cannot, therefore, say that the universe must be finite. We can say that it
may be, and we can even say a little more than this. We can say that a finite
universe fits in better with the laws that hold in the part we know, and that
awkward adjustments of the laws have to be made in order to allow the
universe to be infinite. From the point of view of choosing the best
framework into which to fit what we know—best, I mean, from a logico-
æsthetic point of view—there is no doubt that the hypothesis of a finite
universe is preferable. This, I think, is the extent of what can be said in its
favor.
hypothesis of a spherical universe as in any degree less worthy of
examination than any other. We have to ask ourselves the same two
questions as we should in any other case, namely: (1) Are the facts
consistent with this hypothesis? (2) Is this hypothesis the only one with
which the facts are consistent?
With regard to the first question, the answer is undoubtedly in the
affirmative. All the known facts are perfectly consistent with the hypothesis
of a spherical universe. A very slight modification of the law of gravitation
—a modification suggested by Einstein himself—leads to a spherical space,
without producing any measurable differences in a small region such as the
solar system. The known stars are all within a certain distance from us.
There is nothing whatever in the stellar universe as we know it to show that
space must be infinite. There can therefore be no doubt whatever that, so far
as our present knowledge goes, the hypothesis of a finite universe may be
true.
But when we ask whether the hypothesis of a finite universe must be
true, the answer is different. It is obvious, on general grounds, that we
cannot, from what we know, draw conclusive inferences as to the totality of
things. A very slight change in the Newtonian formula for gravitation would
prevent masses beyond the limits of the visible universe from having
appreciable effects if they existed, and would therefore destroy our reason
for supposing that they do not exist. All arguments as to regions which are
too distant to be observed depend upon extending to them the laws which
hold in our part of the world, and upon assuming that there is not, in these
laws, some inaccuracy which is inappreciable for observable distances, but
fatal to inferences in which very much greater distances are involved. We
cannot, therefore, say that the universe must be finite. We can say that it
may be, and we can even say a little more than this. We can say that a finite
universe fits in better with the laws that hold in the part we know, and that
awkward adjustments of the laws have to be made in order to allow the
universe to be infinite. From the point of view of choosing the best
framework into which to fit what we know—best, I mean, from a logico-
æsthetic point of view—there is no doubt that the hypothesis of a finite
universe is preferable. This, I think, is the extent of what can be said in its
favor.
Page 94
Let us now see what the two finite universes are like. The difference
between them is that in Einstein’s world it is only space that is queer,
whereas in De Sitter’s time is queer too. Consequently Einstein’s world is
less puzzling, and we will describe it first.
In Einstein’s world, light travels round the whole universe in a time
which is supposed to be something like a thousand million years. The odd
thing is that all the rays of light which start (say) from the sun will meet
again, after their enormous journey, in the place where the sun was when
they started. The case is exactly analogous to that of a number of travelers
who set out from London to go round the world in great circles, all traveling
at the same rate in different aeroplanes. One starts due north, passes the
North Pole, then the South Pole, and finally comes home. Another starts due
south, reaches the South Pole first and then the North Pole. Another starts
westward, but he must not continue to travel due west, because then he
would not be traveling on a great circle. Another starts eastward, and so on.
They all meet in the antipodes of London, and then they all meet again in
London. Now if instead of aeronauts going round the earth you take rays of
light going round the universe, the same sort of thing happens: they all meet
first at the antipodes of their starting point, and then meet again at their
starting point. That means to say that a person who is near the antipodes of
the place where the sun was about five hundred million years ago will see
what is apparently a body as bright as the sun then was (except for the small
amount of light that has been stopped on the way by opaque bodies), and
having the same shape and size. And a person who is near where the sun
was a thousand million years ago will see what is apparently a body just
like what the sun was a thousand million years ago. And the same applies to
the antipodes of the sun fifteen hundred million years ago, and to the place
of the sun two thousand million years ago, and so on. This series only ends
when it carries us back to a time before the sun existed.
But all these suns are only ghosts; that is to say, you could pass through
them without experiencing resistance, and they do not exert gravitation.
They are, in fact, like images in a mirror: they exist only for the sense of
sight, not for any other sense. It is rather disturbing to reflect that, if this
theory is true, any number of the objects we see in the heavens may be
merely ghosts. They are like ghosts in their habit of revisiting the scenes of
their past life. Suppose a star had exploded at a certain place, as stars
between them is that in Einstein’s world it is only space that is queer,
whereas in De Sitter’s time is queer too. Consequently Einstein’s world is
less puzzling, and we will describe it first.
In Einstein’s world, light travels round the whole universe in a time
which is supposed to be something like a thousand million years. The odd
thing is that all the rays of light which start (say) from the sun will meet
again, after their enormous journey, in the place where the sun was when
they started. The case is exactly analogous to that of a number of travelers
who set out from London to go round the world in great circles, all traveling
at the same rate in different aeroplanes. One starts due north, passes the
North Pole, then the South Pole, and finally comes home. Another starts due
south, reaches the South Pole first and then the North Pole. Another starts
westward, but he must not continue to travel due west, because then he
would not be traveling on a great circle. Another starts eastward, and so on.
They all meet in the antipodes of London, and then they all meet again in
London. Now if instead of aeronauts going round the earth you take rays of
light going round the universe, the same sort of thing happens: they all meet
first at the antipodes of their starting point, and then meet again at their
starting point. That means to say that a person who is near the antipodes of
the place where the sun was about five hundred million years ago will see
what is apparently a body as bright as the sun then was (except for the small
amount of light that has been stopped on the way by opaque bodies), and
having the same shape and size. And a person who is near where the sun
was a thousand million years ago will see what is apparently a body just
like what the sun was a thousand million years ago. And the same applies to
the antipodes of the sun fifteen hundred million years ago, and to the place
of the sun two thousand million years ago, and so on. This series only ends
when it carries us back to a time before the sun existed.
But all these suns are only ghosts; that is to say, you could pass through
them without experiencing resistance, and they do not exert gravitation.
They are, in fact, like images in a mirror: they exist only for the sense of
sight, not for any other sense. It is rather disturbing to reflect that, if this
theory is true, any number of the objects we see in the heavens may be
merely ghosts. They are like ghosts in their habit of revisiting the scenes of
their past life. Suppose a star had exploded at a certain place, as stars
Page 95
sometimes will. Every thousand million years its ghost would return to the
scene of the disaster and explode again in the same place. There is,
however, considerable doubt whether rays of light could perform the
journey with sufficient accuracy to produce a clear image. Some would be
stopped by matter on the way, some would be turned out of the straight
course by passing near heavy bodies, as in the eclipse observations
described in Chapter IX, and for one reason or another their return would
not be punctual and exact.
There are various reasons for doubting whether Einstein’s universe can
be quite right.[12] Some of these are rather complicated. But there is one
objection which is easily appreciated: in Einstein’s theory, absolute space
and time re-enter by another door. The ghostly sun is formed in the “place”
where it was a thousand million years ago. Both the “place” and the period
of time are in a sense absolute. We saw as early as Chapter I that “place” is
a vague and popular notion, incapable of scientific precision. It seems
hardly worth while to go through such a vast intellectual labor if the errors
we set out to correct are to reappear at the end.
De Sitter’s world is even odder than Einstein’s, because time goes mad
as well as space. I despair of explaining, in non-mathematical language, the
particular form of lunacy with which time is afflicted, but some of its
manifestations can be described. An observer in this world, if he observes a
number of clocks, each of which is perfectly accurate from its own point of
view, will think that distant clocks are going slow as compared with those
in his neighborhood. They will seem to go slower and slower, until, at a
distance of one quarter of the circumference of the universe, they will seem
to have stopped altogether. That region will seem to our observer a sort of
lotus land, where nothing is ever done. He will not be able to have any
cognizance of things farther off, because no light waves can get across the
boundary. Not that there is any real boundary: the people who live in what
our observer takes to be lotus land live just as bustling a life as he does, but
get the impression that he is eternally standing still. As a matter of fact, you
would never become aware of the lotus land, because it would take an
infinite time for light to travel from it to you. You could become aware of
places just short of it, but it would remain itself always just beyond your
ken. There will not be the ghostly suns of Einstein’s world, because light
cannot travel so far.
scene of the disaster and explode again in the same place. There is,
however, considerable doubt whether rays of light could perform the
journey with sufficient accuracy to produce a clear image. Some would be
stopped by matter on the way, some would be turned out of the straight
course by passing near heavy bodies, as in the eclipse observations
described in Chapter IX, and for one reason or another their return would
not be punctual and exact.
There are various reasons for doubting whether Einstein’s universe can
be quite right.[12] Some of these are rather complicated. But there is one
objection which is easily appreciated: in Einstein’s theory, absolute space
and time re-enter by another door. The ghostly sun is formed in the “place”
where it was a thousand million years ago. Both the “place” and the period
of time are in a sense absolute. We saw as early as Chapter I that “place” is
a vague and popular notion, incapable of scientific precision. It seems
hardly worth while to go through such a vast intellectual labor if the errors
we set out to correct are to reappear at the end.
De Sitter’s world is even odder than Einstein’s, because time goes mad
as well as space. I despair of explaining, in non-mathematical language, the
particular form of lunacy with which time is afflicted, but some of its
manifestations can be described. An observer in this world, if he observes a
number of clocks, each of which is perfectly accurate from its own point of
view, will think that distant clocks are going slow as compared with those
in his neighborhood. They will seem to go slower and slower, until, at a
distance of one quarter of the circumference of the universe, they will seem
to have stopped altogether. That region will seem to our observer a sort of
lotus land, where nothing is ever done. He will not be able to have any
cognizance of things farther off, because no light waves can get across the
boundary. Not that there is any real boundary: the people who live in what
our observer takes to be lotus land live just as bustling a life as he does, but
get the impression that he is eternally standing still. As a matter of fact, you
would never become aware of the lotus land, because it would take an
infinite time for light to travel from it to you. You could become aware of
places just short of it, but it would remain itself always just beyond your
ken. There will not be the ghostly suns of Einstein’s world, because light
cannot travel so far.
Page 96
One of the oddest things about this state of affairs is that empirical
evidence for or against it is possible, and that there is actually some slight
evidence in its favor. If all “clocks” are slowed down at a great distance
from the observer, this will apply to the periodic motions of atoms, and
therefore to the light which they emit. Consequently all rays of light emitted
by distant objects ought, when they reach us, to look rather more red or less
violet than when they started. This can be tested by the spectroscope. We
can compare a known line, as it appears in the spectrum of a spiral nebula,
with the same line as it appears in a terrestrial laboratory. We find, as a
matter of fact, that in a large majority of spiral nebulæ there is a
considerable displacement of spectral lines towards the red. The spiral
nebulæ are the most distant objects we can see: Eddington states that their
distances “may perhaps be of the order of a million light-years.” (A light-
year is the distance light travels in a year.) The usual interpretation of a
shifting of spectral lines towards the red is that it is a “Doppler effect,” due
to the fact that the source of light is moving away from us. But one would
expect to find the nebulæ just as often moving towards us as moving away
from us, if nothing operated but the law of chances. If the world is such as
De Sitter says it is, the spectral lines of the spiral nebulæ will be displaced
towards the red owing to the slowing down of distant clocks, even if in fact
they are not moving away from us. This, for what it is worth, is an argument
in favor of De Sitter.
The same facts afford another argument in favor of De Sitter, for
another reason. If, at a given moment, a body is at rest relatively to the
observer, and at a distance from him, it will (in the absence of counteracting
causes) not remain at rest from his point of view, but will begin to move
away from him, and will continue to move away faster and faster; the
further it is from him, the more its retreat will be accelerated. For bodies
which are not too distant from each other, gravitation may overcome this
tendency; but as this tendency increases with the distance, while gravitation
diminishes, we should expect to find very distant bodies receding from us if
De Sitter’s theory is right. Thus we have two reasons for the displacement
of spectral lines in spiral nebulæ: one, the slowing down of time; the other,
the movement away from us which we should expect at distances too great
for gravitation to be sensible. However, it cannot be said that the argument,
on either ground, is very strong. Eddington gives a list of forty-one spiral
nebulæ, of which five have their spectral lines shifted towards the violet,
evidence for or against it is possible, and that there is actually some slight
evidence in its favor. If all “clocks” are slowed down at a great distance
from the observer, this will apply to the periodic motions of atoms, and
therefore to the light which they emit. Consequently all rays of light emitted
by distant objects ought, when they reach us, to look rather more red or less
violet than when they started. This can be tested by the spectroscope. We
can compare a known line, as it appears in the spectrum of a spiral nebula,
with the same line as it appears in a terrestrial laboratory. We find, as a
matter of fact, that in a large majority of spiral nebulæ there is a
considerable displacement of spectral lines towards the red. The spiral
nebulæ are the most distant objects we can see: Eddington states that their
distances “may perhaps be of the order of a million light-years.” (A light-
year is the distance light travels in a year.) The usual interpretation of a
shifting of spectral lines towards the red is that it is a “Doppler effect,” due
to the fact that the source of light is moving away from us. But one would
expect to find the nebulæ just as often moving towards us as moving away
from us, if nothing operated but the law of chances. If the world is such as
De Sitter says it is, the spectral lines of the spiral nebulæ will be displaced
towards the red owing to the slowing down of distant clocks, even if in fact
they are not moving away from us. This, for what it is worth, is an argument
in favor of De Sitter.
The same facts afford another argument in favor of De Sitter, for
another reason. If, at a given moment, a body is at rest relatively to the
observer, and at a distance from him, it will (in the absence of counteracting
causes) not remain at rest from his point of view, but will begin to move
away from him, and will continue to move away faster and faster; the
further it is from him, the more its retreat will be accelerated. For bodies
which are not too distant from each other, gravitation may overcome this
tendency; but as this tendency increases with the distance, while gravitation
diminishes, we should expect to find very distant bodies receding from us if
De Sitter’s theory is right. Thus we have two reasons for the displacement
of spectral lines in spiral nebulæ: one, the slowing down of time; the other,
the movement away from us which we should expect at distances too great
for gravitation to be sensible. However, it cannot be said that the argument,
on either ground, is very strong. Eddington gives a list of forty-one spiral
nebulæ, of which five have their spectral lines shifted towards the violet,
Page 97
not towards the red. Thus the material is neither very copious nor quite
harmonious.
Einstein’s and De Sitter’s hypotheses do not exhaust the possibilities of
a finite world: they are merely the two simplest forms of such a world.
There are arguments against each, and it hardly seems probable that either
is quite true. But it does seem probable that something more or less
analogous is true. If the universe is finite, it is theoretically conceivable that
there should be a complete inventory of it. We may be coming to the end of
what physics can do in the way of stretching the imagination and
systematizing the world. The period since Galileo has been essentially the
period of physics, as the age of the Greeks was the period of geometry. It
may be that physics will lose its attractions through success: if the
fundamental laws of physics come to be fully known, adventurous and
inquiring intellects will turn to other fields. This may alter profoundly the
whole texture of human life, since our present absorption in machinery and
industrialism is the reflection in the practical world of the theorist’s interest
in physical laws. But such speculations are even more rash than those of De
Sitter, and I do not wish to lay any stress upon them.
harmonious.
Einstein’s and De Sitter’s hypotheses do not exhaust the possibilities of
a finite world: they are merely the two simplest forms of such a world.
There are arguments against each, and it hardly seems probable that either
is quite true. But it does seem probable that something more or less
analogous is true. If the universe is finite, it is theoretically conceivable that
there should be a complete inventory of it. We may be coming to the end of
what physics can do in the way of stretching the imagination and
systematizing the world. The period since Galileo has been essentially the
period of physics, as the age of the Greeks was the period of geometry. It
may be that physics will lose its attractions through success: if the
fundamental laws of physics come to be fully known, adventurous and
inquiring intellects will turn to other fields. This may alter profoundly the
whole texture of human life, since our present absorption in machinery and
industrialism is the reflection in the practical world of the theorist’s interest
in physical laws. But such speculations are even more rash than those of De
Sitter, and I do not wish to lay any stress upon them.
Page 98
CHAPTER XII:
CONVENTIONS AND NATURAL LAWS
O ne of the most difficult matters in all controversy is to distinguish
disputes about words from disputes about facts: it ought not to be
difficult, but in practice it is. This is quite as true in physics as in other
subjects. In the seventeenth century there was a terrific debate as to what
“force” is; to us now, it was obviously a debate as to how the word “force”
should be defined, but at the time it was thought to be much more. One of
the purposes of the method of tensors, which is employed in the
mathematics of relativity, is to eliminate what is purely verbal (in an
extended sense) in physical laws. It is of course obvious that what depends
on the choice of co-ordinates is “verbal” in the sense concerned. A man
punting walks along the boat, but keeps a constant position with reference
to the river bed so long as he does not pick up his pole. The Lilliputians
might debate endlessly whether he is walking or standing still: the debate
would be as to words, not as to facts. If we choose co-ordinates fixed
relatively to the boat, he is walking; if we choose co-ordinates fixed
relatively to the river bed, he is standing still. We want to express physical
laws in such a way that it shall be obvious when we are expressing the same
law by reference to two different systems of co-ordinates, so that we shall
not be misled into supposing we have different laws when we only have one
law in different words. This is accomplished by the method of tensors.
Some laws which seem plausible in one language cannot be translated into
another; these are impossible as laws of nature. The laws that can be
translated into any co-ordinate language have certain characteristics: this is
a substantial help in looking for such laws of nature as the theory of
relativity can admit to be possible. Combined with what we know of the
actual motions of bodies, it enables us to decide what must be the correct
expression of the law of gravitation: logic and experience combine in equal
proportions in obtaining this expression.
But the problem of arriving at genuine laws of nature is not to be solved
by the method of tensors alone; a good, deal of careful thought is wanted in
CONVENTIONS AND NATURAL LAWS
O ne of the most difficult matters in all controversy is to distinguish
disputes about words from disputes about facts: it ought not to be
difficult, but in practice it is. This is quite as true in physics as in other
subjects. In the seventeenth century there was a terrific debate as to what
“force” is; to us now, it was obviously a debate as to how the word “force”
should be defined, but at the time it was thought to be much more. One of
the purposes of the method of tensors, which is employed in the
mathematics of relativity, is to eliminate what is purely verbal (in an
extended sense) in physical laws. It is of course obvious that what depends
on the choice of co-ordinates is “verbal” in the sense concerned. A man
punting walks along the boat, but keeps a constant position with reference
to the river bed so long as he does not pick up his pole. The Lilliputians
might debate endlessly whether he is walking or standing still: the debate
would be as to words, not as to facts. If we choose co-ordinates fixed
relatively to the boat, he is walking; if we choose co-ordinates fixed
relatively to the river bed, he is standing still. We want to express physical
laws in such a way that it shall be obvious when we are expressing the same
law by reference to two different systems of co-ordinates, so that we shall
not be misled into supposing we have different laws when we only have one
law in different words. This is accomplished by the method of tensors.
Some laws which seem plausible in one language cannot be translated into
another; these are impossible as laws of nature. The laws that can be
translated into any co-ordinate language have certain characteristics: this is
a substantial help in looking for such laws of nature as the theory of
relativity can admit to be possible. Combined with what we know of the
actual motions of bodies, it enables us to decide what must be the correct
expression of the law of gravitation: logic and experience combine in equal
proportions in obtaining this expression.
But the problem of arriving at genuine laws of nature is not to be solved
by the method of tensors alone; a good, deal of careful thought is wanted in
Page 99
addition. Some of this has been done, especially by Eddington; much
remains to be done.
To take a simple illustration: Suppose, as in the hypothesis of the
Fitzgerald contraction, that lengths in one direction were shorter than in
another. Let us assume that a foot rule pointing north is only half as long as
the same foot rule pointing east, and that this is equally true of all other
bodies. Does such an hypothesis have any meaning? If you have a fishing
rod fifteen feet long when it is pointing west, and you then turn it to the
north, it will still measure fifteen feet, because your foot rule will have
shrunk too. It won’t “look” any shorter, because your eye will have been
affected in the same way. If you are to find out the change, it cannot be by
ordinary measurement; it must be by some such method as the Michelson-
Morley experiment, in which the velocity of light is used to measure
lengths. Then you still have to decide whether it is simpler to suppose a
change of length or a change in the velocity of light. The experimental fact
would be that light takes longer to traverse what your foot rule declares to
be a given distance in one direction than in another—or, as in the
Michelson-Morley experiment, that it ought to take longer but doesn’t. You
can adjust your measures to such a fact in various ways; in any way you
choose to adopt, there will be an element of convention. This element of
convention survives in the laws that you arrive at after you have made your
decision as to measures, and often it takes subtle and elusive forms. To
eliminate the element of convention is, in fact, extraordinarily difficult; the
more the subject is studied, the greater the difficulty is seen to be.
A more important example is the question of the size and shape of the
electron. We find experimentally that all electrons are the same size, and
that they are symmetrical in all directions. How far is this a genuine fact
ascertained by experiment, and how far is it a result of our conventions of
measurement? We have here a number of different comparisons to make:
(1) between different directions in regard to one electron at one time; (2) in
regard to one electron at different times; (3) in regard to two electrons at the
same time. We can then arrive at the comparison of two electrons at
different times, by combining (2) and (3). We may dismiss any hypothesis
which would affect all electrons equally; for example, it would be useless to
suppose that in one region of space-time they were all larger than in
another. Such a change would affect our measuring appliances just as much
remains to be done.
To take a simple illustration: Suppose, as in the hypothesis of the
Fitzgerald contraction, that lengths in one direction were shorter than in
another. Let us assume that a foot rule pointing north is only half as long as
the same foot rule pointing east, and that this is equally true of all other
bodies. Does such an hypothesis have any meaning? If you have a fishing
rod fifteen feet long when it is pointing west, and you then turn it to the
north, it will still measure fifteen feet, because your foot rule will have
shrunk too. It won’t “look” any shorter, because your eye will have been
affected in the same way. If you are to find out the change, it cannot be by
ordinary measurement; it must be by some such method as the Michelson-
Morley experiment, in which the velocity of light is used to measure
lengths. Then you still have to decide whether it is simpler to suppose a
change of length or a change in the velocity of light. The experimental fact
would be that light takes longer to traverse what your foot rule declares to
be a given distance in one direction than in another—or, as in the
Michelson-Morley experiment, that it ought to take longer but doesn’t. You
can adjust your measures to such a fact in various ways; in any way you
choose to adopt, there will be an element of convention. This element of
convention survives in the laws that you arrive at after you have made your
decision as to measures, and often it takes subtle and elusive forms. To
eliminate the element of convention is, in fact, extraordinarily difficult; the
more the subject is studied, the greater the difficulty is seen to be.
A more important example is the question of the size and shape of the
electron. We find experimentally that all electrons are the same size, and
that they are symmetrical in all directions. How far is this a genuine fact
ascertained by experiment, and how far is it a result of our conventions of
measurement? We have here a number of different comparisons to make:
(1) between different directions in regard to one electron at one time; (2) in
regard to one electron at different times; (3) in regard to two electrons at the
same time. We can then arrive at the comparison of two electrons at
different times, by combining (2) and (3). We may dismiss any hypothesis
which would affect all electrons equally; for example, it would be useless to
suppose that in one region of space-time they were all larger than in
another. Such a change would affect our measuring appliances just as much
Page 100
as the things measured, and would therefore produce no discoverable
phenomena. This is as much as to say that it would be no change at all. But
the fact that two electrons have the same mass, for instance, cannot be
regarded as purely conventional. Given sufficient minuteness and accuracy,
we could compare the effects of two different electrons upon a third; if they
were equal under like circumstances, we should be able to infer equality in
a not purely conventional sense. The question of the symmetry of the forces
exerted by an electron—i.e., that these forces depend only upon the distance
from the electron, and not upon the direction—is more complicated.
Eddington finally comes to the conclusion that this, too, is a matter of
convention. The argument is difficult and I have not fully understood it; but
I feel some hesitation in accepting it as valid.
Eddington describes the process concerned in the more advanced
portions of the theory of relativity as “world-building.” The structure to be
built is the physical world as we know it; the economical architect tries to
construct it with the smallest possible amount of material. This is a question
for logic and mathematics. The greater our technical skill in these two
subjects, the more real building we shall do, and the less we shall be content
with mere heaps of stones. But before we can use in our building the stones
that nature provides, we have to hew them into the right shapes: this is all
part of the process of budding. In order that this may be possible, the raw
material must have some structure (which we may conceive as analogous to
the grain in timber), but almost any structure will do. By successive
mathematical refinements, we whittle away our initial requirements until
they amount to very little. Given this necessary minimum of structure in the
raw material, we find that we can construct from it a mathematical
expression which will have the properties that are needed for describing the
world we perceive—in particular, the properties of conservation which are
characteristic of momentum and energy (or mass). Our raw material
consisted merely of events; but when we find that we can build out of it
something which, as measured, will seem to be never created or destroyed,
it seems not surprising that we should come to believe in “bodies.” These
are really mere mathematical constructions out of events, but owing to their
permanence they are practically important, and our senses (which were
presumably developed by biological needs) are adapted for noticing them,
rather than the crude continuum of events which is theoretically more
fundamental. From this point of view, it is astonishing how little of the real
phenomena. This is as much as to say that it would be no change at all. But
the fact that two electrons have the same mass, for instance, cannot be
regarded as purely conventional. Given sufficient minuteness and accuracy,
we could compare the effects of two different electrons upon a third; if they
were equal under like circumstances, we should be able to infer equality in
a not purely conventional sense. The question of the symmetry of the forces
exerted by an electron—i.e., that these forces depend only upon the distance
from the electron, and not upon the direction—is more complicated.
Eddington finally comes to the conclusion that this, too, is a matter of
convention. The argument is difficult and I have not fully understood it; but
I feel some hesitation in accepting it as valid.
Eddington describes the process concerned in the more advanced
portions of the theory of relativity as “world-building.” The structure to be
built is the physical world as we know it; the economical architect tries to
construct it with the smallest possible amount of material. This is a question
for logic and mathematics. The greater our technical skill in these two
subjects, the more real building we shall do, and the less we shall be content
with mere heaps of stones. But before we can use in our building the stones
that nature provides, we have to hew them into the right shapes: this is all
part of the process of budding. In order that this may be possible, the raw
material must have some structure (which we may conceive as analogous to
the grain in timber), but almost any structure will do. By successive
mathematical refinements, we whittle away our initial requirements until
they amount to very little. Given this necessary minimum of structure in the
raw material, we find that we can construct from it a mathematical
expression which will have the properties that are needed for describing the
world we perceive—in particular, the properties of conservation which are
characteristic of momentum and energy (or mass). Our raw material
consisted merely of events; but when we find that we can build out of it
something which, as measured, will seem to be never created or destroyed,
it seems not surprising that we should come to believe in “bodies.” These
are really mere mathematical constructions out of events, but owing to their
permanence they are practically important, and our senses (which were
presumably developed by biological needs) are adapted for noticing them,
rather than the crude continuum of events which is theoretically more
fundamental. From this point of view, it is astonishing how little of the real
Page 101
world is revealed by physical science: our knowledge is limited, not only by
the conventional element, but also by the selectiveness of our perceptual
apparatus.
We assume that there is an “interval” between two events, in the sense
explained in Chapter VII, but we no longer assume that we can
unambiguously compare the length of an interval in one region with the
length of an interval in another. It is assumed by Weyl, who introduced this
limitation, that we can compare a number of small intervals which all start
from the same point; also that, in a very small journey, our measuring rod
will not alter its length much, so that there will only be a small error if we
compare lengths in neighboring places by the usual methods. Weyl found
that, by diminishing our assumptions as to interval in this way, it was
possible to bring electromagnetism and gravitation into one system. The
mathematics of Weyl’s theory is complicated, and I shall not attempt to
explain it. For the present, I am concerned with a different consequence of
his theory. If lengths in different regions cannot be compared directly, there
is an element of convention in the indirect comparisons which we actually
make. This element will be at first unrecognized, but will be such as to
simplify to the utmost the expression of the laws of nature. In particular,
conditions of symmetry may be entirely created by conventions as to
measurement, and there is no reason to suppose that they represent any
property of the real world. The law of gravitation itself, according to
Eddington, may be regarded as expressing conventions of measurement.
“The conventions of measurement,” he says, “introduce an isotropy[13] and
homogeneity into measured space which need not originally have any
counterpart in the relation-structure which is being surveyed. This isotropy
and homogeneity is exactly expressed by Einstein’s law of gravitation.”[14]
The limitations of knowledge introduced by the selectiveness of our
perceptual apparatus may be illustrated by the indestructibility of matter.
This has been gradually discovered by experiment, and seemed a well-
founded empirical law of nature. Now it turns out that, from our original
space-time continuum, we can construct a mathematical expression which
will have properties causing it to appear indestructible. The statement that
matter is indestructible then ceases to be a proposition of physics, and
becomes instead a proposition of linguistics and psychology. As a
proposition of linguistics: “Matter” is the name of the mathematical
the conventional element, but also by the selectiveness of our perceptual
apparatus.
We assume that there is an “interval” between two events, in the sense
explained in Chapter VII, but we no longer assume that we can
unambiguously compare the length of an interval in one region with the
length of an interval in another. It is assumed by Weyl, who introduced this
limitation, that we can compare a number of small intervals which all start
from the same point; also that, in a very small journey, our measuring rod
will not alter its length much, so that there will only be a small error if we
compare lengths in neighboring places by the usual methods. Weyl found
that, by diminishing our assumptions as to interval in this way, it was
possible to bring electromagnetism and gravitation into one system. The
mathematics of Weyl’s theory is complicated, and I shall not attempt to
explain it. For the present, I am concerned with a different consequence of
his theory. If lengths in different regions cannot be compared directly, there
is an element of convention in the indirect comparisons which we actually
make. This element will be at first unrecognized, but will be such as to
simplify to the utmost the expression of the laws of nature. In particular,
conditions of symmetry may be entirely created by conventions as to
measurement, and there is no reason to suppose that they represent any
property of the real world. The law of gravitation itself, according to
Eddington, may be regarded as expressing conventions of measurement.
“The conventions of measurement,” he says, “introduce an isotropy[13] and
homogeneity into measured space which need not originally have any
counterpart in the relation-structure which is being surveyed. This isotropy
and homogeneity is exactly expressed by Einstein’s law of gravitation.”[14]
The limitations of knowledge introduced by the selectiveness of our
perceptual apparatus may be illustrated by the indestructibility of matter.
This has been gradually discovered by experiment, and seemed a well-
founded empirical law of nature. Now it turns out that, from our original
space-time continuum, we can construct a mathematical expression which
will have properties causing it to appear indestructible. The statement that
matter is indestructible then ceases to be a proposition of physics, and
becomes instead a proposition of linguistics and psychology. As a
proposition of linguistics: “Matter” is the name of the mathematical
Page 102
expression in question. As a proposition of psychology: Our senses are such
that we notice what is roughly the mathematical expression in question, and
we are led nearer and nearer to it as we refine upon our crude perceptions
by scientific observation. This is much less than physicists used to think
they knew about matter.
The reader may say: What then is left of physics? What do we really
know about the world of matter? Here we may distinguish three
departments of physics. There is first what is included within the theory of
relativity, generalized as widely as possible. Next, there are laws which
cannot be brought within the scope of relativity. Thirdly, there is what may
be called geography. Let us consider each of these in turn.
The theory of relativity, apart from convention, tells us that the events in
the universe have a four-dimensional order, and that, between any two
events which are near together in this order, there is a relation called
“interval,” which is capable of being measured if suitable precautions are
taken. We make also an assumption as to what happens when a little
measuring rod is carried round a closed circuit in a certain manner; the
consequences of this assumption are such as to make it highly probable that
it is true. Beyond this, there is little in the theory of relativity that can be
regarded as physical laws. There is a great deal of mathematics, showing
that certain mathematically-constructed quantities must behave like the
things we perceive; and there is a suggestion of a bridge between
psychology and physics in the theory that these mathematically-constructed
quantities are what our senses are adapted for perceiving. But neither of
these things is physics in the strict sense.
The part of physics which cannot, at present, be brought within the
scope of relativity is large and important. There is nothing in relativity to
show why there should be electrons and protons; relativity cannot give any
reason why matter should exist in little lumps. With this goes the whole
theory of the structure of the atom. The theory of quanta also is quite
outside the scope of relativity. Relativity is, in a sense, the most extreme
application of what may be called next-to-next methods. Gravitation is no
longer regarded as due to the effect of the sun upon a planet, but as
expressing characteristics of the region in which the planet happens to be.
Distance, which used to be thought to have a definite meaning however far
apart two points might be, is now only definite for neighboring points. The
that we notice what is roughly the mathematical expression in question, and
we are led nearer and nearer to it as we refine upon our crude perceptions
by scientific observation. This is much less than physicists used to think
they knew about matter.
The reader may say: What then is left of physics? What do we really
know about the world of matter? Here we may distinguish three
departments of physics. There is first what is included within the theory of
relativity, generalized as widely as possible. Next, there are laws which
cannot be brought within the scope of relativity. Thirdly, there is what may
be called geography. Let us consider each of these in turn.
The theory of relativity, apart from convention, tells us that the events in
the universe have a four-dimensional order, and that, between any two
events which are near together in this order, there is a relation called
“interval,” which is capable of being measured if suitable precautions are
taken. We make also an assumption as to what happens when a little
measuring rod is carried round a closed circuit in a certain manner; the
consequences of this assumption are such as to make it highly probable that
it is true. Beyond this, there is little in the theory of relativity that can be
regarded as physical laws. There is a great deal of mathematics, showing
that certain mathematically-constructed quantities must behave like the
things we perceive; and there is a suggestion of a bridge between
psychology and physics in the theory that these mathematically-constructed
quantities are what our senses are adapted for perceiving. But neither of
these things is physics in the strict sense.
The part of physics which cannot, at present, be brought within the
scope of relativity is large and important. There is nothing in relativity to
show why there should be electrons and protons; relativity cannot give any
reason why matter should exist in little lumps. With this goes the whole
theory of the structure of the atom. The theory of quanta also is quite
outside the scope of relativity. Relativity is, in a sense, the most extreme
application of what may be called next-to-next methods. Gravitation is no
longer regarded as due to the effect of the sun upon a planet, but as
expressing characteristics of the region in which the planet happens to be.
Distance, which used to be thought to have a definite meaning however far
apart two points might be, is now only definite for neighboring points. The
Page 103
distance between widely separated places depends upon the route chosen.
We may, it is true, define the distance as the geodesic distance, but that can
only be estimated by adding up little bits, that is to say, by the method we
use in estimating the length of a curve. What applies to distance applies
equally to the straight line. There is nothing in the actual world having
exactly the properties that straight lines were supposed to have; the nearest
approach is the track of a light ray. Straight lines have to be replaced by
geodesics, which are defined by what they do at each point, not all at once,
like Euclidean straight lines. Measurement, in Weyl’s theory, suffers the
same fate. We can only use a measuring rod to give lengths in one place:
when we move it to another region, there is no knowing how it will alter.
We do assume, however, that, if it alters, it alters bit by bit, gradually,
continuously, and not by sudden jumps. Perhaps this assumption is
unjustified. It belongs to the general outlook of relativity, which is that of
continuity. No doubt it is owing to this outlook that relativity is unable to
account for the discontinuities in physics, such as quanta, electrons and
protons. Perhaps relativity will conquer these domains when it learns to
dispense with the assumption of continuity.
Finally we come to geography, in which I include history. The
separation of history from geography rests upon the separation of time from
space; when we amalgamate the two in space-time, we need one word to
describe the combination of geography and history. For the sake of
simplicity, I shall use the one word geography in this extended sense.
Geography, in this sense, includes everything that, as a matter of crude
fact, distinguishes one part of space-time from another. One part is occupied
by the sun, one by the earth; the intermediate regions contain light waves,
but no matter (apart from a very little here and there). There is a certain
degree of theoretical connection between different geographical facts; to
establish this is the purpose of physical laws. It is thought that a sufficient
knowledge of the geographical facts of the solar system throughout any
finite time, however short, would enable an ideally competent physicist to
predict the future of the solar system so long as it remained remote from
other stars. We are already in a position to calculate the large facts about the
solar system backwards and forwards for vast periods of time. But in all
such calculations we need a basis of crude fact. The facts are
interconnected, but facts can only be inferred from other facts, not from
We may, it is true, define the distance as the geodesic distance, but that can
only be estimated by adding up little bits, that is to say, by the method we
use in estimating the length of a curve. What applies to distance applies
equally to the straight line. There is nothing in the actual world having
exactly the properties that straight lines were supposed to have; the nearest
approach is the track of a light ray. Straight lines have to be replaced by
geodesics, which are defined by what they do at each point, not all at once,
like Euclidean straight lines. Measurement, in Weyl’s theory, suffers the
same fate. We can only use a measuring rod to give lengths in one place:
when we move it to another region, there is no knowing how it will alter.
We do assume, however, that, if it alters, it alters bit by bit, gradually,
continuously, and not by sudden jumps. Perhaps this assumption is
unjustified. It belongs to the general outlook of relativity, which is that of
continuity. No doubt it is owing to this outlook that relativity is unable to
account for the discontinuities in physics, such as quanta, electrons and
protons. Perhaps relativity will conquer these domains when it learns to
dispense with the assumption of continuity.
Finally we come to geography, in which I include history. The
separation of history from geography rests upon the separation of time from
space; when we amalgamate the two in space-time, we need one word to
describe the combination of geography and history. For the sake of
simplicity, I shall use the one word geography in this extended sense.
Geography, in this sense, includes everything that, as a matter of crude
fact, distinguishes one part of space-time from another. One part is occupied
by the sun, one by the earth; the intermediate regions contain light waves,
but no matter (apart from a very little here and there). There is a certain
degree of theoretical connection between different geographical facts; to
establish this is the purpose of physical laws. It is thought that a sufficient
knowledge of the geographical facts of the solar system throughout any
finite time, however short, would enable an ideally competent physicist to
predict the future of the solar system so long as it remained remote from
other stars. We are already in a position to calculate the large facts about the
solar system backwards and forwards for vast periods of time. But in all
such calculations we need a basis of crude fact. The facts are
interconnected, but facts can only be inferred from other facts, not from
Page 104
general laws alone. Thus the facts of geography have a certain independent
status in physics. No amount of physical laws will enable us to infer a
physical fact unless we know other facts as data for our inference. And here
when I speak of “facts” I am thinking of particular facts of geography, in
the extended sense in which I am using the term.
In the theory of relativity, we are concerned with structure, not with the
material of which the structure is composed. In geography, on the other
hand, the material is relevant. If there is to be any difference between one
place and another, there must either be differences between the material in
one place and that in another, or places where there is material and places
where there is none. The former of these alternatives seems the more
satisfactory. We might try to say: There are electrons and protons, and the
rest is empty. But in the “empty” regions there are light waves, so that we
cannot say nothing happens in them. Some people maintain that the light
waves take place in the ether, others are content to say simply that they take
place; but in any case events are occurring where there are light waves. That
is all that we can really say for the places where there is matter, since matter
has turned out to be a mathematical construction built out of events. We
may say, therefore, that there are events everywhere in space-time, but they
must be of a somewhat different kind according as we are dealing with a
region where there is an electron or proton or with the sort of region we
should ordinarily call empty. But as to the intrinsic nature of these events
we can know nothing, except when they happen to be events in our own
lives. Our own perceptions and feelings must be part of the crude material
of events which physics arranges into a pattern—or rather, which physics
finds to be arranged in a pattern. As regards events which do not form part
of our own lives, physics tells us the pattern of them, but is quite unable to
tell us what they are like in themselves. Nor does it seem possible that this
should be discovered by any other method.
status in physics. No amount of physical laws will enable us to infer a
physical fact unless we know other facts as data for our inference. And here
when I speak of “facts” I am thinking of particular facts of geography, in
the extended sense in which I am using the term.
In the theory of relativity, we are concerned with structure, not with the
material of which the structure is composed. In geography, on the other
hand, the material is relevant. If there is to be any difference between one
place and another, there must either be differences between the material in
one place and that in another, or places where there is material and places
where there is none. The former of these alternatives seems the more
satisfactory. We might try to say: There are electrons and protons, and the
rest is empty. But in the “empty” regions there are light waves, so that we
cannot say nothing happens in them. Some people maintain that the light
waves take place in the ether, others are content to say simply that they take
place; but in any case events are occurring where there are light waves. That
is all that we can really say for the places where there is matter, since matter
has turned out to be a mathematical construction built out of events. We
may say, therefore, that there are events everywhere in space-time, but they
must be of a somewhat different kind according as we are dealing with a
region where there is an electron or proton or with the sort of region we
should ordinarily call empty. But as to the intrinsic nature of these events
we can know nothing, except when they happen to be events in our own
lives. Our own perceptions and feelings must be part of the crude material
of events which physics arranges into a pattern—or rather, which physics
finds to be arranged in a pattern. As regards events which do not form part
of our own lives, physics tells us the pattern of them, but is quite unable to
tell us what they are like in themselves. Nor does it seem possible that this
should be discovered by any other method.
Page 105
CHAPTER XIII:
THE ABOLITION OF “FORCE”
I n the Newtonian system, bodies under the action of no forces move in
straight lines with uniform velocity; when bodies do not move in this
way, their change of motion is ascribed to a “force.” Some forces seem
intelligible to our imagination: those exerted by a rope or string, by bodies
colliding, or by any kind of obvious pushing or pulling. As explained in an
earlier chapter, our apparent imaginative understanding of these processes is
quite fallacious; all that it really means is that past experience enables us to
foresee more or less what is going to happen without the need of
mathematical calculations. But the “forces” involved in gravitation and in
the less familiar forms of electrical action do not seem in this way “natural”
to our imagination. It seems odd that the earth can float in the void: the
natural thing to suppose is that it must fall. That is why it has to be
supported on an elephant, and the elephant on a tortoise, according to some
early speculators. The Newtonian theory, in addition to action at a distance,
introduced two other imaginative novelties. The first was, that gravitation is
not always and essentially directed what we should call “downwards,” i.e.,
towards the center of the earth. The second was, that a body going round
and round in a circle with uniform velocity is not “moving uniformly” in
the sense in which that phrase is applied to the motion of bodies under no
forces, but is perpetually being turned out of the straight course towards the
center of the circle, which requires a force pulling it in that direction. Hence
Newton arrived at the view that the planets are attracted to the sun by a
force, which is called gravitation.
This whole point of view, as we have seen, is superseded by relativity.
There are no longer such things as “straight lines” in the old geometrical
sense. There are “straightest lines,” or geodesics, but these involve time as
well as space. A light ray passing through the solar system does not describe
the same orbit as a comet, from a geometrical point of view; nevertheless
each moves in a geodesic. The whole imaginative picture is changed. A poet
might say that water runs down hill because it is attracted to the sea, but a
THE ABOLITION OF “FORCE”
I n the Newtonian system, bodies under the action of no forces move in
straight lines with uniform velocity; when bodies do not move in this
way, their change of motion is ascribed to a “force.” Some forces seem
intelligible to our imagination: those exerted by a rope or string, by bodies
colliding, or by any kind of obvious pushing or pulling. As explained in an
earlier chapter, our apparent imaginative understanding of these processes is
quite fallacious; all that it really means is that past experience enables us to
foresee more or less what is going to happen without the need of
mathematical calculations. But the “forces” involved in gravitation and in
the less familiar forms of electrical action do not seem in this way “natural”
to our imagination. It seems odd that the earth can float in the void: the
natural thing to suppose is that it must fall. That is why it has to be
supported on an elephant, and the elephant on a tortoise, according to some
early speculators. The Newtonian theory, in addition to action at a distance,
introduced two other imaginative novelties. The first was, that gravitation is
not always and essentially directed what we should call “downwards,” i.e.,
towards the center of the earth. The second was, that a body going round
and round in a circle with uniform velocity is not “moving uniformly” in
the sense in which that phrase is applied to the motion of bodies under no
forces, but is perpetually being turned out of the straight course towards the
center of the circle, which requires a force pulling it in that direction. Hence
Newton arrived at the view that the planets are attracted to the sun by a
force, which is called gravitation.
This whole point of view, as we have seen, is superseded by relativity.
There are no longer such things as “straight lines” in the old geometrical
sense. There are “straightest lines,” or geodesics, but these involve time as
well as space. A light ray passing through the solar system does not describe
the same orbit as a comet, from a geometrical point of view; nevertheless
each moves in a geodesic. The whole imaginative picture is changed. A poet
might say that water runs down hill because it is attracted to the sea, but a
Page 106
physicist or an ordinary mortal would say that it moves as it does, at each
point, because of the nature of the ground at that point, without regard to
what lies ahead of it. Just as the sea does not cause the water to run towards
it, so the sun does not cause the planets to move round it. The planets move
round the sun because that is the easiest thing to do—in the technical sense
of “least action.” It is the easiest thing to do because of the nature of the
region in which they are, not because of an influence emanating from the
sun.
The supposed necessity of attributing gravitation to a “force” attracting
the planets towards the sun has arisen from the determination to preserve
Euclidean geometry at all costs. If we suppose that our space is Euclidean,
when in fact it is not, we shall have to call in physics to rectify the errors of
our geometry. We shall find bodies not moving in what we insist upon
regarding as straight lines, and we shall demand a cause for this behavior.
Eddington has stated this matter with admirable lucidity. He supposes a
physicist who has assumed the formula for interval which is used in the
special theory of relativity—a formula which still supposes that the
observer’s space is Euclidean. He continues:
Since intervals can be compared by experimental
methods, he ought soon to discover that his (formula for the
interval) cannot be reconciled with observational results, and
so realize his mistake. But the mind does not so readily get
rid of an obsession. It is more likely that our observer will
continue in his opinion, and attribute the discrepancy of the
observations to some influence which is present and affects
the behavior of his test-bodies. He will, so to speak,
introduce a supernatural agency which he can blame for the
consequences of his mistake.... The name given to any
agency which causes deviation from uniform motion in a
straight line is force according to the Newtonian definition
of force. Hence the agency invoked through our observer’s
mistake is described as a “field of force.”... A field of force
represents the discrepancy between the naturalgeometry of a
co-ordinate system and the abstractgeometry arbitrarily
ascribed to it.[15]
point, because of the nature of the ground at that point, without regard to
what lies ahead of it. Just as the sea does not cause the water to run towards
it, so the sun does not cause the planets to move round it. The planets move
round the sun because that is the easiest thing to do—in the technical sense
of “least action.” It is the easiest thing to do because of the nature of the
region in which they are, not because of an influence emanating from the
sun.
The supposed necessity of attributing gravitation to a “force” attracting
the planets towards the sun has arisen from the determination to preserve
Euclidean geometry at all costs. If we suppose that our space is Euclidean,
when in fact it is not, we shall have to call in physics to rectify the errors of
our geometry. We shall find bodies not moving in what we insist upon
regarding as straight lines, and we shall demand a cause for this behavior.
Eddington has stated this matter with admirable lucidity. He supposes a
physicist who has assumed the formula for interval which is used in the
special theory of relativity—a formula which still supposes that the
observer’s space is Euclidean. He continues:
Since intervals can be compared by experimental
methods, he ought soon to discover that his (formula for the
interval) cannot be reconciled with observational results, and
so realize his mistake. But the mind does not so readily get
rid of an obsession. It is more likely that our observer will
continue in his opinion, and attribute the discrepancy of the
observations to some influence which is present and affects
the behavior of his test-bodies. He will, so to speak,
introduce a supernatural agency which he can blame for the
consequences of his mistake.... The name given to any
agency which causes deviation from uniform motion in a
straight line is force according to the Newtonian definition
of force. Hence the agency invoked through our observer’s
mistake is described as a “field of force.”... A field of force
represents the discrepancy between the naturalgeometry of a
co-ordinate system and the abstractgeometry arbitrarily
ascribed to it.[15]
Page 107
If people were to learn to conceive the world in the new way, without
the old notion of “force,” it would alter not only their physical imagination,
but probably also their morals and politics. The latter effect would be quite
illogical, but is none the less probable on that account. In Newton’s theory
of the solar system, the sun seems like a monarch whose behests the planets
have to obey. In Einstein’s world there is more individualism and less
government than in Newton’s. There is also far less hustle: we have seen
that laziness is the fundamental law of Einstein’s universe. The word
“dynamic” has come to mean, in newspaper language, “energetic and
forceful”; but if it meant “illustrating the principles of dynamics,” it ought
to be applied to the people in hot climates who sit under banana trees
waiting for the fruit to drop into their mouths. I hope that journalists, in
future, when they speak of a “dynamic personality,” will mean a person
who does what is least trouble at the moment, without thinking of remote
consequences. If I can contribute to this result, I shall not have written in
vain.
It has been customary for people to draw arguments from the laws of
nature as to what we ought to do. Such arguments seem to me a mistake: to
imitate nature may be merely slavish. But if nature, as portrayed by
Einstein, is to be our model, it would seem that the anarchists will have the
best of the argument. The physical universe is orderly, not because there is a
central government, but because every body minds its own business. No
two particles of matter ever come into contact; when they get too close,
they both move off. If a man were had up for knocking another man down,
he would be scientifically correct in pleading that he had never touched
him. What happened was that there was a hill in space-time in the region of
the other man’s nose, and it fell down the hill.
The abolition of “force” seems to be connected with the substitution of
sight for touch as the source of physical ideas, as explained in Chapter I.
When an image in a looking glass moves, we do not think that something
has pushed it. In places where there are two large mirrors opposite to each
other, you may see innumerable reflections of the same object. Suppose a
gentleman in a top-hat is standing between the mirrors, there may be twenty
or thirty top-hats in the reflections. Suppose now somebody comes and
knocks off the gentleman’s hat with a stick: all the other twenty or thirty
top-hats will tumble down at the same moment. We think that a force is
the old notion of “force,” it would alter not only their physical imagination,
but probably also their morals and politics. The latter effect would be quite
illogical, but is none the less probable on that account. In Newton’s theory
of the solar system, the sun seems like a monarch whose behests the planets
have to obey. In Einstein’s world there is more individualism and less
government than in Newton’s. There is also far less hustle: we have seen
that laziness is the fundamental law of Einstein’s universe. The word
“dynamic” has come to mean, in newspaper language, “energetic and
forceful”; but if it meant “illustrating the principles of dynamics,” it ought
to be applied to the people in hot climates who sit under banana trees
waiting for the fruit to drop into their mouths. I hope that journalists, in
future, when they speak of a “dynamic personality,” will mean a person
who does what is least trouble at the moment, without thinking of remote
consequences. If I can contribute to this result, I shall not have written in
vain.
It has been customary for people to draw arguments from the laws of
nature as to what we ought to do. Such arguments seem to me a mistake: to
imitate nature may be merely slavish. But if nature, as portrayed by
Einstein, is to be our model, it would seem that the anarchists will have the
best of the argument. The physical universe is orderly, not because there is a
central government, but because every body minds its own business. No
two particles of matter ever come into contact; when they get too close,
they both move off. If a man were had up for knocking another man down,
he would be scientifically correct in pleading that he had never touched
him. What happened was that there was a hill in space-time in the region of
the other man’s nose, and it fell down the hill.
The abolition of “force” seems to be connected with the substitution of
sight for touch as the source of physical ideas, as explained in Chapter I.
When an image in a looking glass moves, we do not think that something
has pushed it. In places where there are two large mirrors opposite to each
other, you may see innumerable reflections of the same object. Suppose a
gentleman in a top-hat is standing between the mirrors, there may be twenty
or thirty top-hats in the reflections. Suppose now somebody comes and
knocks off the gentleman’s hat with a stick: all the other twenty or thirty
top-hats will tumble down at the same moment. We think that a force is
Page 108
needed to knock off the “real” top-hat, but we think the remaining twenty or
thirty tumble off, so to speak, of themselves, or out of a mere passion for
imitation. Let us try to think out this matter a little more seriously.
Obviously something happens when an image in a looking glass moves.
From the point of view of sight, the event seems just as real as if it were not
in a mirror. But nothing has happened from the point of view of touch or
hearing. When the “real” top-hat falls, it makes a noise; the twenty or thirty
reflections fall without a sound. If it falls on your toe, you feel it; but we
believe that the twenty or thirty people in the mirrors feel nothing, though
top-hats fall on their toes too. But all this is equally true of the astronomical
world. It makes no noise, because sound cannot travel across a vacuum. So
far as we know, it causes no “feelings,” because there is no one on the spot
to “feel” it. The astronomical world, therefore, seems hardly more “real” or
“solid” than the world in the looking glass, and has just as little need of
“force” to make it move.
The reader may feel that I am indulging in idle sophistry. “After all,” he
may say, “the image in the mirror is the reflection of something solid, and
the top-hat in the mirror only falls off because of the force applied to the
real top-hat. The top-hat in the mirror cannot indulge in behavior of its own;
it has to copy the real one. This shows how different the image is from the
sun and the planets, because they are not obliged to be perpetually imitating
a prototype. So you had better give up pretending that an image is just as
real as one of the heavenly bodies.”
There is, of course, some truth in this; the point is to discover exactly
what truth. In the first place, images are not “imaginary.” When you see an
image, certain perfectly real light waves reach your eye; and if you hang a
cloth over the mirror, these light waves cease to exist. There is, however, a
purely optical difference between an “image” and a “real” thing. The optical
difference is bound up with this question of imitation. When you hang a
cloth over the mirror, it makes no difference to the “real” object; but when
you move the “real” object away, the image vanishes also. This makes us
say that the light rays which make the image are only reflected at the
surface of the mirror, and do not really come from a point behind it, but
from the “real” object. We have here an example of a general principle of
great importance. Most of the events in the world are not isolated
occurrences, but members of groups of more or less similar events, which
thirty tumble off, so to speak, of themselves, or out of a mere passion for
imitation. Let us try to think out this matter a little more seriously.
Obviously something happens when an image in a looking glass moves.
From the point of view of sight, the event seems just as real as if it were not
in a mirror. But nothing has happened from the point of view of touch or
hearing. When the “real” top-hat falls, it makes a noise; the twenty or thirty
reflections fall without a sound. If it falls on your toe, you feel it; but we
believe that the twenty or thirty people in the mirrors feel nothing, though
top-hats fall on their toes too. But all this is equally true of the astronomical
world. It makes no noise, because sound cannot travel across a vacuum. So
far as we know, it causes no “feelings,” because there is no one on the spot
to “feel” it. The astronomical world, therefore, seems hardly more “real” or
“solid” than the world in the looking glass, and has just as little need of
“force” to make it move.
The reader may feel that I am indulging in idle sophistry. “After all,” he
may say, “the image in the mirror is the reflection of something solid, and
the top-hat in the mirror only falls off because of the force applied to the
real top-hat. The top-hat in the mirror cannot indulge in behavior of its own;
it has to copy the real one. This shows how different the image is from the
sun and the planets, because they are not obliged to be perpetually imitating
a prototype. So you had better give up pretending that an image is just as
real as one of the heavenly bodies.”
There is, of course, some truth in this; the point is to discover exactly
what truth. In the first place, images are not “imaginary.” When you see an
image, certain perfectly real light waves reach your eye; and if you hang a
cloth over the mirror, these light waves cease to exist. There is, however, a
purely optical difference between an “image” and a “real” thing. The optical
difference is bound up with this question of imitation. When you hang a
cloth over the mirror, it makes no difference to the “real” object; but when
you move the “real” object away, the image vanishes also. This makes us
say that the light rays which make the image are only reflected at the
surface of the mirror, and do not really come from a point behind it, but
from the “real” object. We have here an example of a general principle of
great importance. Most of the events in the world are not isolated
occurrences, but members of groups of more or less similar events, which
Page 109
are such that each group is connected in an assignable manner with a certain
small region of space-time. This is the case with the light rays which make
us see both the object and its reflection in the mirror: they all emanate from
the object as a center. If you put an opaque globe round the object at a
certain distance, the object and its reflection are invisible at any point
outside the globe. We have seen that gravitation, although no longer
regarded as an action at a distance, is still connected with a center: there is,
so to speak, a hill symmetrically arranged about its summit, and the summit
is the place where we conceive the body to be which is connected with the
gravitational field we are considering. For simplicity, common sense lumps
together all the events which form one group in the above sense. When two
people see the same object, two different events occur, but they are events
belonging to one group and connected with the same center. Just the same
applies when two people (as we say) hear the same noise. And so the
reflection in a mirror is less “real” than the object reflected, even from an
optical point of view, because light rays do not spread in all directions from
the place where the image seems to be, but only in directions in front of the
mirror, and only so long as the object reflected remains in position. This
illustrates the usefulness of grouping connected events about a center in the
way we have been considering.
When we examine the changes in such a group of objects, we find that
they are of two kinds: there are those which affect only some member of the
group, and those which make connected alterations in all the members of
the group. If you put a candle in front of a mirror, and then hang black cloth
over the mirror, you alter only the reflection of the candle as seen from
various places. If you shut your eyes, you alter its appearance to you, but
not its appearance elsewhere. If you put a red globe round it at a distance of
a foot, you alter its appearance at any distance greater than a foot, but not at
any distance less than a foot. In all these cases, you do not regard the candle
itself as having changed; in fact, in all of them, you find that there are
groups of changes connected with a different center or with a number of
different centers. When you shut your eyes, for instance, your eyes, not the
candle, look different to any other observer: the center of the changes that
occur is in your eyes. But when you blow out the candle, its appearance
everywhere is changed; in this case you say that the change has happened to
the candle. The changes that happen to an object are those that affect the
whole group of events which center about the object. All this is only an
small region of space-time. This is the case with the light rays which make
us see both the object and its reflection in the mirror: they all emanate from
the object as a center. If you put an opaque globe round the object at a
certain distance, the object and its reflection are invisible at any point
outside the globe. We have seen that gravitation, although no longer
regarded as an action at a distance, is still connected with a center: there is,
so to speak, a hill symmetrically arranged about its summit, and the summit
is the place where we conceive the body to be which is connected with the
gravitational field we are considering. For simplicity, common sense lumps
together all the events which form one group in the above sense. When two
people see the same object, two different events occur, but they are events
belonging to one group and connected with the same center. Just the same
applies when two people (as we say) hear the same noise. And so the
reflection in a mirror is less “real” than the object reflected, even from an
optical point of view, because light rays do not spread in all directions from
the place where the image seems to be, but only in directions in front of the
mirror, and only so long as the object reflected remains in position. This
illustrates the usefulness of grouping connected events about a center in the
way we have been considering.
When we examine the changes in such a group of objects, we find that
they are of two kinds: there are those which affect only some member of the
group, and those which make connected alterations in all the members of
the group. If you put a candle in front of a mirror, and then hang black cloth
over the mirror, you alter only the reflection of the candle as seen from
various places. If you shut your eyes, you alter its appearance to you, but
not its appearance elsewhere. If you put a red globe round it at a distance of
a foot, you alter its appearance at any distance greater than a foot, but not at
any distance less than a foot. In all these cases, you do not regard the candle
itself as having changed; in fact, in all of them, you find that there are
groups of changes connected with a different center or with a number of
different centers. When you shut your eyes, for instance, your eyes, not the
candle, look different to any other observer: the center of the changes that
occur is in your eyes. But when you blow out the candle, its appearance
everywhere is changed; in this case you say that the change has happened to
the candle. The changes that happen to an object are those that affect the
whole group of events which center about the object. All this is only an
Page 110
interpretation of common sense, and an attempt to explain what we mean by
saying that the image of the candle in the mirror is less “real” than the
candle. There is no connected group of events situated all round the place
where the image seems to be, and changes in the image center about the
candle, not about a point behind the mirror. This gives a perfectly verifiable
meaning to the statement that the image is “only” a reflection. And at the
same time it enables us to regard the heavenly bodies, although we can only
see and not touch them, as more “real” than an image in a looking glass.
We can now begin to interpret the common sense notion of one body
having an “effect” upon another, which we must do if we are really to
understand what is meant by the abolition of “force.” Suppose you come
into a dark room and switch on the electric light: the appearance of
everything in the room is changed. Since everything in the room is visible
because it reflects the electric light, this case is really analogous to that of
the image in the mirror; the electric light is the center from which all the
changes emanate. In this case, the “effect” is explained by what we have
already said. The more important case is when the effect is a movement.
Suppose you let loose a tiger in the middle of a Bank Holiday crowd: they
would all move, and the tiger would be the center of their various
movements. A person who could see the people but not the tiger would infer
that there was something repulsive at that point. We say in this case that the
tiger has an effect upon the people, and we might describe the tiger’s action
upon them as of the nature of a repulsive force. We know, however, that
they fly because of something which happens to them, not merely because
the tiger is where he is. They fly because they can see and hear him, that is
to say, because certain waves reach their eyes and ears. If these waves could
be made to reach them without there being any tiger, they would fly just as
fast, because the neighborhood would seem to them just as unpleasant.
Let us now apply similar considerations to the sun’s gravitation. The
“force” exerted by the sun only differs from that exerted by the tiger in
being attractive instead of repulsive. Instead of acting through waves of
light or sound, the sun acquires its apparent power through the fact that
there are modifications of space-time all round the sun. Like the noise of
the tiger, they are more intense near their source; as we travel away they
grow less and less. To say that the sun “causes” these modifications of
space-time is to add nothing to our knowledge. What we know is that the
saying that the image of the candle in the mirror is less “real” than the
candle. There is no connected group of events situated all round the place
where the image seems to be, and changes in the image center about the
candle, not about a point behind the mirror. This gives a perfectly verifiable
meaning to the statement that the image is “only” a reflection. And at the
same time it enables us to regard the heavenly bodies, although we can only
see and not touch them, as more “real” than an image in a looking glass.
We can now begin to interpret the common sense notion of one body
having an “effect” upon another, which we must do if we are really to
understand what is meant by the abolition of “force.” Suppose you come
into a dark room and switch on the electric light: the appearance of
everything in the room is changed. Since everything in the room is visible
because it reflects the electric light, this case is really analogous to that of
the image in the mirror; the electric light is the center from which all the
changes emanate. In this case, the “effect” is explained by what we have
already said. The more important case is when the effect is a movement.
Suppose you let loose a tiger in the middle of a Bank Holiday crowd: they
would all move, and the tiger would be the center of their various
movements. A person who could see the people but not the tiger would infer
that there was something repulsive at that point. We say in this case that the
tiger has an effect upon the people, and we might describe the tiger’s action
upon them as of the nature of a repulsive force. We know, however, that
they fly because of something which happens to them, not merely because
the tiger is where he is. They fly because they can see and hear him, that is
to say, because certain waves reach their eyes and ears. If these waves could
be made to reach them without there being any tiger, they would fly just as
fast, because the neighborhood would seem to them just as unpleasant.
Let us now apply similar considerations to the sun’s gravitation. The
“force” exerted by the sun only differs from that exerted by the tiger in
being attractive instead of repulsive. Instead of acting through waves of
light or sound, the sun acquires its apparent power through the fact that
there are modifications of space-time all round the sun. Like the noise of
the tiger, they are more intense near their source; as we travel away they
grow less and less. To say that the sun “causes” these modifications of
space-time is to add nothing to our knowledge. What we know is that the
Page 111
modifications proceed according to a certain rule, and that they are grouped
symmetrically about the sun as center. The language of cause and effect
adds only a number of quite irrelevant imaginings, connected with will,
muscular tension, and such matters. What we can more or less ascertain is
merely the formula according to which space-time is modified by the
presence of gravitating matter. More correctly: we can ascertain what kind
of space-time is the presence of gravitating matter. When space-time is not
accurately Euclidean in a certain region, but has a non-Euclidean character
which grows more and more marked as we approach a certain center, and
when, further, the departure from Euclid obeys a certain law, we describe
this state of affairs briefly by saying that there is gravitating matter at the
center. But this is only a compendious account of what we know. What we
know is about the places where the gravitating matter is not, not about the
place where it is. The language of cause and effect (of which “force” is a
particular case) is thus merely a convenient shorthand for certain purposes;
it does not represent anything that is genuinely to be found in the physical
world.
And how about matter? Is matter also no more than a convenient
shorthand? This question, however, being a large one, demands a separate
chapter.
symmetrically about the sun as center. The language of cause and effect
adds only a number of quite irrelevant imaginings, connected with will,
muscular tension, and such matters. What we can more or less ascertain is
merely the formula according to which space-time is modified by the
presence of gravitating matter. More correctly: we can ascertain what kind
of space-time is the presence of gravitating matter. When space-time is not
accurately Euclidean in a certain region, but has a non-Euclidean character
which grows more and more marked as we approach a certain center, and
when, further, the departure from Euclid obeys a certain law, we describe
this state of affairs briefly by saying that there is gravitating matter at the
center. But this is only a compendious account of what we know. What we
know is about the places where the gravitating matter is not, not about the
place where it is. The language of cause and effect (of which “force” is a
particular case) is thus merely a convenient shorthand for certain purposes;
it does not represent anything that is genuinely to be found in the physical
world.
And how about matter? Is matter also no more than a convenient
shorthand? This question, however, being a large one, demands a separate
chapter.
Page 112
CHAPTER XIV:
WHAT IS MATTER?
T he question “What is matter?” is of the kind that is asked by
metaphysicians, and answered in vast books of incredible obscurity.
But I am not asking the question as metaphysician: I am asking it as a
person who wants to find out what is the moral of modern physics, and
more especially of the theory of relativity. It is obvious from what we have
learned of that theory that matter cannot be conceived quite as it used to be.
I think we can now say more or less what the new conception must be.
There were two traditional conceptions of matter, both of which have
had advocates ever since scientific speculation began. There were the
atomists, who thought that matter consisted of tiny lumps which could
never be divided; these were supposed to hit each other and then bounce off
in various ways. After Newton, they were no longer supposed actually to
come into contact with each other, but to attract and repel each other, and
move in orbits round each other. Then there were those who thought that
there is matter of some kind everywhere, and that a true vacuum is
impossible. Descartes held this view, and attributed the motions of the
planets to vortices in the ether. The Newtonian theory of gravitation caused
the view that there is matter everywhere to fall into discredit, the more so as
light was thought by Newton and his disciples to be due to actual particles
traveling from the source of the light. But when this view of light was
disproved, and it was shown that light consisted of waves, the ether was
revived so that there should be something to undulate. The ether became
still more respectable when it was found to play the same part in
electromagnetic phenomena as in the propagation of light. It was even
hoped that atoms might turn out to be a mode of motion of the ether. At this
stage, the atomic view of matter was, on the whole, getting the worst of it.
Leaving relativity aside for the moment, modern physics has provided
proof of the atomic structure of ordinary matter, while not disproving the
arguments in favor of the ether, to which no such structure is attributed. The
result was a sort of compromise between the two views, the one applying to
WHAT IS MATTER?
T he question “What is matter?” is of the kind that is asked by
metaphysicians, and answered in vast books of incredible obscurity.
But I am not asking the question as metaphysician: I am asking it as a
person who wants to find out what is the moral of modern physics, and
more especially of the theory of relativity. It is obvious from what we have
learned of that theory that matter cannot be conceived quite as it used to be.
I think we can now say more or less what the new conception must be.
There were two traditional conceptions of matter, both of which have
had advocates ever since scientific speculation began. There were the
atomists, who thought that matter consisted of tiny lumps which could
never be divided; these were supposed to hit each other and then bounce off
in various ways. After Newton, they were no longer supposed actually to
come into contact with each other, but to attract and repel each other, and
move in orbits round each other. Then there were those who thought that
there is matter of some kind everywhere, and that a true vacuum is
impossible. Descartes held this view, and attributed the motions of the
planets to vortices in the ether. The Newtonian theory of gravitation caused
the view that there is matter everywhere to fall into discredit, the more so as
light was thought by Newton and his disciples to be due to actual particles
traveling from the source of the light. But when this view of light was
disproved, and it was shown that light consisted of waves, the ether was
revived so that there should be something to undulate. The ether became
still more respectable when it was found to play the same part in
electromagnetic phenomena as in the propagation of light. It was even
hoped that atoms might turn out to be a mode of motion of the ether. At this
stage, the atomic view of matter was, on the whole, getting the worst of it.
Leaving relativity aside for the moment, modern physics has provided
proof of the atomic structure of ordinary matter, while not disproving the
arguments in favor of the ether, to which no such structure is attributed. The
result was a sort of compromise between the two views, the one applying to
Page 113
what was called “gross” matter, the other to the ether. There can be no
doubt about electrons and protons, though, as we shall see shortly, they
need not be conceived as atoms were conceived traditionally. As for the
ether, its status is very curious: many physicists still maintain that, without
it, the propagation of light and other electromagnetic waves would be
inconceivable, but except in this way it is difficult to see what purpose it
serves. The truth is, I think, that relativity demands the abandonment of the
old conception of “matter,” which is infected by the metaphysics associated
with “substance,” and represents a point of view not really necessary in
dealing with phenomena. This is what we must now investigate.
In the old view, a piece of matter was something which survived all
through time, while never being at more than one place at a given time. This
way of looking at things is obviously connected with the complete
separation of space and time in which people formerly believed. When we
substitute space-time for space and time, we shall naturally expect to derive
the physical world from constituents which are as limited in time as in
space. Such constituents are what we call “events.” An event does not
persist and move, like the traditional piece of matter; it merely exists for its
little moment and then ceases. A piece of matter will thus be resolved into a
series of events. Just as, in the old view, an extended body was composed of
a number of particles, so, now, each particle, being extended in time, must
be regarded as composed of what we may call “event-particles.” The whole
series of these events makes up the whole history of the particle, and the
particle is regarded as being its history, not some metaphysical entity to
which the events happen. This view is rendered necessary by the fact that
relativity compels us to place time and space more on a level than they were
in the older physics.
This abstract requirement must be brought into relation with the known
facts of the physical world. Now what are the known facts? Let us take it as
conceded that light consists of waves traveling with the received velocity.
We then know a great deal about what goes on in the parts of space-time
where there is no matter; we know, that is to say, that there are periodic
occurrences (light waves) obeying certain laws. These light waves start
from atoms, and the modern theory of the structure of the atoms enables us
to know a great deal about the circumstances under which they start, and
the reasons which determine their wave lengths. We can find out not only
doubt about electrons and protons, though, as we shall see shortly, they
need not be conceived as atoms were conceived traditionally. As for the
ether, its status is very curious: many physicists still maintain that, without
it, the propagation of light and other electromagnetic waves would be
inconceivable, but except in this way it is difficult to see what purpose it
serves. The truth is, I think, that relativity demands the abandonment of the
old conception of “matter,” which is infected by the metaphysics associated
with “substance,” and represents a point of view not really necessary in
dealing with phenomena. This is what we must now investigate.
In the old view, a piece of matter was something which survived all
through time, while never being at more than one place at a given time. This
way of looking at things is obviously connected with the complete
separation of space and time in which people formerly believed. When we
substitute space-time for space and time, we shall naturally expect to derive
the physical world from constituents which are as limited in time as in
space. Such constituents are what we call “events.” An event does not
persist and move, like the traditional piece of matter; it merely exists for its
little moment and then ceases. A piece of matter will thus be resolved into a
series of events. Just as, in the old view, an extended body was composed of
a number of particles, so, now, each particle, being extended in time, must
be regarded as composed of what we may call “event-particles.” The whole
series of these events makes up the whole history of the particle, and the
particle is regarded as being its history, not some metaphysical entity to
which the events happen. This view is rendered necessary by the fact that
relativity compels us to place time and space more on a level than they were
in the older physics.
This abstract requirement must be brought into relation with the known
facts of the physical world. Now what are the known facts? Let us take it as
conceded that light consists of waves traveling with the received velocity.
We then know a great deal about what goes on in the parts of space-time
where there is no matter; we know, that is to say, that there are periodic
occurrences (light waves) obeying certain laws. These light waves start
from atoms, and the modern theory of the structure of the atoms enables us
to know a great deal about the circumstances under which they start, and
the reasons which determine their wave lengths. We can find out not only
Page 114
how one light wave travels, but how its source moves relatively to
ourselves. But when I say this I am assuming that we can recognise a source
of light as the same at two slightly different times. This is, however, the
very thing which had to be investigated.
We saw, in the preceding chapter, how a group of connected events can
be formed, all related to each other by a law, and all ranged about a center
in space-time. Such a group of events will be the arrival, at various places,
of the light waves emitted by a brief flash of light. We do not need to
suppose that anything particular is happening at the center; certainly we do
not need to suppose that we know what is happening there. What we know
is that, as a matter of geometry, the group of events in question are ranged
about a center, like widening ripples on a pool when a fly has touched it.
We can hypothetically invent an occurrence which is to have happened at
the center, and set forth the laws by which the consequent disturbance is
transmitted. This hypothetical occurrence will then appear to common sense
as the “cause” of the disturbance. It will also count as one event in the
biography of the particle of matter which is supposed to occupy the center
of the disturbance.
Now we find not only that one light wave travels outward from a center
according to a certain law, but also that, in general, it is followed by other
closely similar light waves. The sun, for example, does not change its
appearance suddenly; even if a cloud passes across it during a high wind,
the transition is gradual, though swift. In this way a group of occurrences
connected with a center at one point of space-time is brought into relation
with other very similar groups whose centers are at neighboring points of
space-time. For each of these other groups common sense invents similar
hypothetical occurrences to occupy their centers, and says that all these
hypothetical occurrences are part of one history; that is to say, it invents a
hypothetical “particle” to which the hypothetical occurrences are to have
occurred. It is only by this double use of hypothesis, perfectly unnecessary
in each case, that we arrive at anything that can be called “matter” in the old
sense of the word.
If we are to avoid unnecessary hypotheses, we shall say that an electron
at a given moment is the various disturbances in the surrounding medium
which, in ordinary language, would be said to be “caused” by it. But we
shall not take these disturbances at what is, for us, the moment in question,
ourselves. But when I say this I am assuming that we can recognise a source
of light as the same at two slightly different times. This is, however, the
very thing which had to be investigated.
We saw, in the preceding chapter, how a group of connected events can
be formed, all related to each other by a law, and all ranged about a center
in space-time. Such a group of events will be the arrival, at various places,
of the light waves emitted by a brief flash of light. We do not need to
suppose that anything particular is happening at the center; certainly we do
not need to suppose that we know what is happening there. What we know
is that, as a matter of geometry, the group of events in question are ranged
about a center, like widening ripples on a pool when a fly has touched it.
We can hypothetically invent an occurrence which is to have happened at
the center, and set forth the laws by which the consequent disturbance is
transmitted. This hypothetical occurrence will then appear to common sense
as the “cause” of the disturbance. It will also count as one event in the
biography of the particle of matter which is supposed to occupy the center
of the disturbance.
Now we find not only that one light wave travels outward from a center
according to a certain law, but also that, in general, it is followed by other
closely similar light waves. The sun, for example, does not change its
appearance suddenly; even if a cloud passes across it during a high wind,
the transition is gradual, though swift. In this way a group of occurrences
connected with a center at one point of space-time is brought into relation
with other very similar groups whose centers are at neighboring points of
space-time. For each of these other groups common sense invents similar
hypothetical occurrences to occupy their centers, and says that all these
hypothetical occurrences are part of one history; that is to say, it invents a
hypothetical “particle” to which the hypothetical occurrences are to have
occurred. It is only by this double use of hypothesis, perfectly unnecessary
in each case, that we arrive at anything that can be called “matter” in the old
sense of the word.
If we are to avoid unnecessary hypotheses, we shall say that an electron
at a given moment is the various disturbances in the surrounding medium
which, in ordinary language, would be said to be “caused” by it. But we
shall not take these disturbances at what is, for us, the moment in question,
Page 115
since that would make them depend upon the observer; we shall instead
travel outward from the electron with the velocity of light, and take the
disturbance we find in each place as we reach it. The closely similar set of
disturbances, with very nearly the same center, which is found existing
slightly earlier or slightly later, will be defined as being the electron at a
slightly earlier or slightly later moment. In this way, we preserve all the
laws of physics, without having recourse to unnecessary hypotheses or
inferred entities, and we remain in harmony with the general principle of
economy which has enabled the theory of relativity to clear away so much
useless lumber.
Common sense imagines that when it sees a table it sees a table. This is
a gross delusion. When common sense sees a table, certain light waves
reach its eyes, and these are of a sort which, in its previous experience, has
been associated with certain sensations of touch, as well as with other
people’s testimony that they also saw the table. But none of this ever
brought us to the table itself. The light waves caused occurrences in our
eyes, and these caused occurrences in the optic nerve, and these in turn
caused occurrences in the brain. Any one of these, happening without the
usual preliminaries, would have caused us to have the sensations we call
“seeing the table,” even if there had been no table. (Of course, if matter in
general is to be interpreted as a group of occurrences, this must apply also
to the eye, the optic nerve, and the brain.) As to the sense of touch when we
press the table with our fingers, that is an electric disturbance in the
electrons and protons of our finger tips, produced, according to modern
physics, by the proximity of the electrons and protons in the table. If the
same disturbance in our finger tips arose in any other way, we should have
the same sensations, in spite of there being no table. The testimony of
others is obviously a second-hand affair. A witness in a law court, if asked
whether he had seen some occurrence, would not be allowed to reply that
he believed so because of the testimony of others to that effect. In any case,
testimony consists of sound waves and demands psychological as well as
physical interpretation; its connection with the object is therefore very
indirect. For all these reasons, when we say that a man “sees a table,” we
use a highly abbreviated form of expression, concealing complicated and
difficult inferences, the validity of which may well be open to question.
travel outward from the electron with the velocity of light, and take the
disturbance we find in each place as we reach it. The closely similar set of
disturbances, with very nearly the same center, which is found existing
slightly earlier or slightly later, will be defined as being the electron at a
slightly earlier or slightly later moment. In this way, we preserve all the
laws of physics, without having recourse to unnecessary hypotheses or
inferred entities, and we remain in harmony with the general principle of
economy which has enabled the theory of relativity to clear away so much
useless lumber.
Common sense imagines that when it sees a table it sees a table. This is
a gross delusion. When common sense sees a table, certain light waves
reach its eyes, and these are of a sort which, in its previous experience, has
been associated with certain sensations of touch, as well as with other
people’s testimony that they also saw the table. But none of this ever
brought us to the table itself. The light waves caused occurrences in our
eyes, and these caused occurrences in the optic nerve, and these in turn
caused occurrences in the brain. Any one of these, happening without the
usual preliminaries, would have caused us to have the sensations we call
“seeing the table,” even if there had been no table. (Of course, if matter in
general is to be interpreted as a group of occurrences, this must apply also
to the eye, the optic nerve, and the brain.) As to the sense of touch when we
press the table with our fingers, that is an electric disturbance in the
electrons and protons of our finger tips, produced, according to modern
physics, by the proximity of the electrons and protons in the table. If the
same disturbance in our finger tips arose in any other way, we should have
the same sensations, in spite of there being no table. The testimony of
others is obviously a second-hand affair. A witness in a law court, if asked
whether he had seen some occurrence, would not be allowed to reply that
he believed so because of the testimony of others to that effect. In any case,
testimony consists of sound waves and demands psychological as well as
physical interpretation; its connection with the object is therefore very
indirect. For all these reasons, when we say that a man “sees a table,” we
use a highly abbreviated form of expression, concealing complicated and
difficult inferences, the validity of which may well be open to question.
Page 116
But we are in danger of becoming entangled in psychological questions,
which we must avoid if we can. Let us therefore return to the purely
physical point of view.
What I wish to suggest may be put as follows. Everything that occurs
elsewhere, owing to the existence of an electron, can be explored
experimentally, at least in theory, unless it occurs in certain concealed ways.
But what occurs within the electron (if anything occurs there) it is
absolutely impossible to know: there is no conceivable apparatus by which
we could obtain even a glimpse of it. An electron is known by its “effects.”
But the word “effects” belongs to a view of causation which will not fit
modern physics, and in particular will not fit relativity. All that we have a
right to say is that certain groups of occurrences happen together, that is to
say, in neighboring parts of space-time. A given observer will regard one
member of the group as earlier than the other, but another observer may
judge the time order differently. And even when the time order is the same
for all observers, all that we really have is a connection between the two
events, which works equally backwards and forwards. It is not true that the
past determines the future in some sense other than that in which the future
determines the past: the apparent difference is only due to our ignorance,
because we know less about the future than about the past. This is a mere
accident: there might be beings who would remember the future and have to
infer the past. The feelings of such beings in these matters would be the
exact opposite of our own, but no more fallacious.
The moral of this is that, if an electron is only known by its “effects,”
there is no reason to suppose that anything exists except the “effects.” In so
far as these “effects” consist of light waves and other electromagnetic
disturbances, we may say that what is called “empty space” consists of
regions where these disturbances are propagated freely. Every such
disturbance, we find, has a center, and when we get very near the center
(though still at a finite distance from it) we find that the law of propagation
of the disturbance ceases to be valid. This region within which the law does
not hold is called “matter”; it will be an electron or proton according to
circumstances. The region so defined is found to move relatively to other
such regions, and its movements follow the known laws of dynamics. So
far, this theory provides for electromagnetic phenomena and the motions of
matter; and it does so without assuming that “matter” is anything but
which we must avoid if we can. Let us therefore return to the purely
physical point of view.
What I wish to suggest may be put as follows. Everything that occurs
elsewhere, owing to the existence of an electron, can be explored
experimentally, at least in theory, unless it occurs in certain concealed ways.
But what occurs within the electron (if anything occurs there) it is
absolutely impossible to know: there is no conceivable apparatus by which
we could obtain even a glimpse of it. An electron is known by its “effects.”
But the word “effects” belongs to a view of causation which will not fit
modern physics, and in particular will not fit relativity. All that we have a
right to say is that certain groups of occurrences happen together, that is to
say, in neighboring parts of space-time. A given observer will regard one
member of the group as earlier than the other, but another observer may
judge the time order differently. And even when the time order is the same
for all observers, all that we really have is a connection between the two
events, which works equally backwards and forwards. It is not true that the
past determines the future in some sense other than that in which the future
determines the past: the apparent difference is only due to our ignorance,
because we know less about the future than about the past. This is a mere
accident: there might be beings who would remember the future and have to
infer the past. The feelings of such beings in these matters would be the
exact opposite of our own, but no more fallacious.
The moral of this is that, if an electron is only known by its “effects,”
there is no reason to suppose that anything exists except the “effects.” In so
far as these “effects” consist of light waves and other electromagnetic
disturbances, we may say that what is called “empty space” consists of
regions where these disturbances are propagated freely. Every such
disturbance, we find, has a center, and when we get very near the center
(though still at a finite distance from it) we find that the law of propagation
of the disturbance ceases to be valid. This region within which the law does
not hold is called “matter”; it will be an electron or proton according to
circumstances. The region so defined is found to move relatively to other
such regions, and its movements follow the known laws of dynamics. So
far, this theory provides for electromagnetic phenomena and the motions of
matter; and it does so without assuming that “matter” is anything but
Page 117
systems of electromagnetic phenomena. In order to carry out the theory
fully, it would no doubt be necessary to introduce many complications. But
it seems fairly clear that all the facts and laws of physics can be interpreted
without assuming that “matter” is anything more than groups of events,
each event being of the sort which we should naturally regard as “caused”
by the matter in question. This does not involve any change in the symbols
or formulæ of physics: it is merely a question of interpretation of the
symbols.
This latitude in interpretation is a characteristic of mathematical
physics. What we know is certain very abstract logical relations, which we
express in mathematical formulæ; we know also that, at certain points, we
arrive at results which are capable of being tested experimentally. Take, for
example, the eclipse observations by which Einstein’s theory as to the
bending of light was established. The actual observation consisted in the
careful measurement of certain distances on certain photographic plates.
The formulæ which were to be verified were concerned with the course of
light in passing near the sun. Although the part of these formulæ which
gives the observed result must always be interpreted in the same way, the
other part of them may be capable of a great variety of interpretations. The
formulæ giving the motions of the planets are almost exactly the same in
Einstein’s theory as in Newton’s, but the meaning of the formulæ is quite
different. It may be said generally that, in the mathematical treatment of
nature, we can be far more certain that our formulæ are approximately
correct than we can be as to the correctness of this or that interpretation of
them. And so in the case with which this chapter is concerned: the question
as to the nature of an electron or a proton is by no means answered when
we know all that mathematical physics has to say as to the laws of its
motion and the laws of its interaction with the environment. A definite and
conclusive answer to our question is not possible just because a variety of
answers are compatible with the truth of mathematical physics.
Nevertheless some answers are preferable to others, because some have a
greater probability in their favor. We have been seeking, in this chapter, to
define matter so that there must be such a thing if the formulæ of physics
are true. If we had made our definition such as to secure that a particle of
matter should be what one thinks of as substantial, a hard, definite lump, we
should not have been sure that any such thing exists. That is why our
fully, it would no doubt be necessary to introduce many complications. But
it seems fairly clear that all the facts and laws of physics can be interpreted
without assuming that “matter” is anything more than groups of events,
each event being of the sort which we should naturally regard as “caused”
by the matter in question. This does not involve any change in the symbols
or formulæ of physics: it is merely a question of interpretation of the
symbols.
This latitude in interpretation is a characteristic of mathematical
physics. What we know is certain very abstract logical relations, which we
express in mathematical formulæ; we know also that, at certain points, we
arrive at results which are capable of being tested experimentally. Take, for
example, the eclipse observations by which Einstein’s theory as to the
bending of light was established. The actual observation consisted in the
careful measurement of certain distances on certain photographic plates.
The formulæ which were to be verified were concerned with the course of
light in passing near the sun. Although the part of these formulæ which
gives the observed result must always be interpreted in the same way, the
other part of them may be capable of a great variety of interpretations. The
formulæ giving the motions of the planets are almost exactly the same in
Einstein’s theory as in Newton’s, but the meaning of the formulæ is quite
different. It may be said generally that, in the mathematical treatment of
nature, we can be far more certain that our formulæ are approximately
correct than we can be as to the correctness of this or that interpretation of
them. And so in the case with which this chapter is concerned: the question
as to the nature of an electron or a proton is by no means answered when
we know all that mathematical physics has to say as to the laws of its
motion and the laws of its interaction with the environment. A definite and
conclusive answer to our question is not possible just because a variety of
answers are compatible with the truth of mathematical physics.
Nevertheless some answers are preferable to others, because some have a
greater probability in their favor. We have been seeking, in this chapter, to
define matter so that there must be such a thing if the formulæ of physics
are true. If we had made our definition such as to secure that a particle of
matter should be what one thinks of as substantial, a hard, definite lump, we
should not have been sure that any such thing exists. That is why our
Page 118
definition, though it may seem complicated, is preferable from the point of
view of logical economy and scientific caution.
view of logical economy and scientific caution.
Page 119
CHAPTER XV:
PHILOSOPHICAL CONSEQUENCES
T he philosophical consequences of relativity are neither so great nor so
startling as is sometimes thought. It throws very little light on time-
honored controversies, such as that between realism and idealism.
Some people think that it supports Kant’s view that space and time are
“subjective” and are “forms of intuition.” I think such people have been
misled by the way in which writers on relativity speak of “the observer.” It
is natural to suppose that the observer is a human being, or at least a mind;
but he is just as likely to be a photographic plate or a clock. That is to say,
the odd results as to the difference between one “point of view” and another
are concerned with “point of view” in a sense applicable to physical
instruments just as much as to people with perceptions. The “subjectivity”
concerned in the theory of relativity is a physical subjectivity, which would
exist equally if there were no such things as minds or senses in the world.
Moreover, it is a strictly limited subjectivity. The theory does not say
that everything is relative; on the contrary, it gives a technique for
distinguishing what is relative from what belongs to a physical occurrence
in its own right. If we are going to say that the theory supports Kant about
space and time, we shall have to say that it refutes him about space-time. In
my view, neither statement is correct. I see no reason why, on such issues,
philosophers should not all stick to the views they previously held. There
were no conclusive arguments on either side before, and there are none
now; to hold either view shows a dogmatic rather than a scientific temper.
Nevertheless, when the ideas involved in Einstein’s work have become
familiar, as they will when they are taught in schools, certain changes in our
habits of thought are likely to result, and to have great importance in the
long run.
One thing which emerges is that physics tells us much less about the
physical world than we thought it did. Almost all the “great principles” of
traditional physics turn out to be like the “great law” that there are always
three feet to a yard; others turn out to be downright false. The conservation
PHILOSOPHICAL CONSEQUENCES
T he philosophical consequences of relativity are neither so great nor so
startling as is sometimes thought. It throws very little light on time-
honored controversies, such as that between realism and idealism.
Some people think that it supports Kant’s view that space and time are
“subjective” and are “forms of intuition.” I think such people have been
misled by the way in which writers on relativity speak of “the observer.” It
is natural to suppose that the observer is a human being, or at least a mind;
but he is just as likely to be a photographic plate or a clock. That is to say,
the odd results as to the difference between one “point of view” and another
are concerned with “point of view” in a sense applicable to physical
instruments just as much as to people with perceptions. The “subjectivity”
concerned in the theory of relativity is a physical subjectivity, which would
exist equally if there were no such things as minds or senses in the world.
Moreover, it is a strictly limited subjectivity. The theory does not say
that everything is relative; on the contrary, it gives a technique for
distinguishing what is relative from what belongs to a physical occurrence
in its own right. If we are going to say that the theory supports Kant about
space and time, we shall have to say that it refutes him about space-time. In
my view, neither statement is correct. I see no reason why, on such issues,
philosophers should not all stick to the views they previously held. There
were no conclusive arguments on either side before, and there are none
now; to hold either view shows a dogmatic rather than a scientific temper.
Nevertheless, when the ideas involved in Einstein’s work have become
familiar, as they will when they are taught in schools, certain changes in our
habits of thought are likely to result, and to have great importance in the
long run.
One thing which emerges is that physics tells us much less about the
physical world than we thought it did. Almost all the “great principles” of
traditional physics turn out to be like the “great law” that there are always
three feet to a yard; others turn out to be downright false. The conservation
Page 120
of mass may serve to illustrate both these misfortunes to which a “law” is
liable. Mass used to be defined as “quantity of matter,” and as far as
experiment showed it was never increased or diminished. But with the
greater accuracy of modern measurements, curious things were found to
happen. In the first place, the mass as measured was found to increase with
the velocity; this kind of mass was found to be really the same thing as
energy. This kind of mass is not constant for a given body, but the total
amount of it in the universe is conserved, or at least obeys a law very
closely analogous to conservation. This law itself, however, is to be
regarded as a truism, of the nature of the “law” that there are three feet to a
yard; it results from our methods of measurement, and does not express a
genuine property of matter. The other kind of mass, which we may call
“proper mass,” is that which is found to be the mass by an observer moving
with the body. This is the ordinary terrestrial case, where the body we are
weighing is not flying through the air. The “proper mass” of a body is very
nearly constant, but not quite, and the total amount of “proper mass” in the
world is not quite constant. One would suppose that if you have four one-
pound weights, and you put them all together into the scales, they will
together weigh four pounds. This is a fond delusion: they weigh rather less,
though not enough less to be discovered by even the most careful
measurements. In the case of four hydrogen atoms, however, when they are
put together to make one helium atom, the defect is noticeable; the helium
atom weighs measurably less than four separate hydrogen atoms.
Broadly speaking, traditional physics has collapsed into two portions,
truisms and geography. There are, however, newer portions of physics, such
as the theory of quanta, which do not come under this head, but appear to
give genuine knowledge of laws reached by experiment.
The world which the theory of relativity presents to our imagination is
not so much a world of “things” in “motion” as a world of events. It is true
that there are still electrons and protons which persist, but these (as we saw
in the preceding chapter) are really to be conceived as strings of connected
events, like the successive notes of a song. It is events that are the stuff of
relativity physics. Between two events which are not too remote from each
other there is, in the general theory as in the special theory, a measurable
relation called “interval,” which appears to be the physical reality of which
lapse of time and distance in space are two more or less confused
liable. Mass used to be defined as “quantity of matter,” and as far as
experiment showed it was never increased or diminished. But with the
greater accuracy of modern measurements, curious things were found to
happen. In the first place, the mass as measured was found to increase with
the velocity; this kind of mass was found to be really the same thing as
energy. This kind of mass is not constant for a given body, but the total
amount of it in the universe is conserved, or at least obeys a law very
closely analogous to conservation. This law itself, however, is to be
regarded as a truism, of the nature of the “law” that there are three feet to a
yard; it results from our methods of measurement, and does not express a
genuine property of matter. The other kind of mass, which we may call
“proper mass,” is that which is found to be the mass by an observer moving
with the body. This is the ordinary terrestrial case, where the body we are
weighing is not flying through the air. The “proper mass” of a body is very
nearly constant, but not quite, and the total amount of “proper mass” in the
world is not quite constant. One would suppose that if you have four one-
pound weights, and you put them all together into the scales, they will
together weigh four pounds. This is a fond delusion: they weigh rather less,
though not enough less to be discovered by even the most careful
measurements. In the case of four hydrogen atoms, however, when they are
put together to make one helium atom, the defect is noticeable; the helium
atom weighs measurably less than four separate hydrogen atoms.
Broadly speaking, traditional physics has collapsed into two portions,
truisms and geography. There are, however, newer portions of physics, such
as the theory of quanta, which do not come under this head, but appear to
give genuine knowledge of laws reached by experiment.
The world which the theory of relativity presents to our imagination is
not so much a world of “things” in “motion” as a world of events. It is true
that there are still electrons and protons which persist, but these (as we saw
in the preceding chapter) are really to be conceived as strings of connected
events, like the successive notes of a song. It is events that are the stuff of
relativity physics. Between two events which are not too remote from each
other there is, in the general theory as in the special theory, a measurable
relation called “interval,” which appears to be the physical reality of which
lapse of time and distance in space are two more or less confused
Page 121
representations. Between two distant events, there is not any one definite
interval. But there is one way of moving from one event to another which
makes the sum of all the little intervals along the route greater than by any
other route. This route is called a “geodesic,” and it is the route which a
body will choose if left to itself.
The whole of relativity physics is a much more step-by-step matter than
the physics and geometry of former days. Euclid’s straight lines have to be
replaced by light rays, which do not quite come up to Euclid’s standard of
straightness when they pass near the sun or any other very heavy body. The
sum of the angles of a triangle is still thought to be two right angles in very
remote regions of empty space, but not where there is matter in the
neighborhood. We, who cannot leave the earth, are incapable of reaching a
place where Euclid is true. Propositions which used to be proved by
reasoning have now become either conventions, or merely approximate
truths verified by observation.
It is a curious fact—of which relativity is not the only illustration—that,
as reasoning improves, its claims to the power of proving facts grow less
and less. Logic used to be thought to teach us how to draw inferences; now,
it teaches us rather how not to draw inferences. Animals and children are
terribly prone to inference: a horse is surprised beyond measure if you take
an unusual turning. When men began to reason, they tried to justify the
inferences that they had drawn unthinkingly in earlier days. A great deal of
bad philosophy and bad science resulted from this propensity. “Great
principles,” such as the “uniformity of nature,” the “law of universal
causation,” and so on, are attempts to bolster up our belief that what has
often happened before will happen again, which is no better founded than
the horse’s belief that you will take the turning you usually take. It is not
altogether easy to see what is to replace these pseudo-principles in the
practice of science; but perhaps the theory of relativity gives us a glimpse of
the kind of thing we may expect. Causation, in the old sense, no longer has
a place in theoretical physics. There is, of course, something else which
takes its place, but the substitute appears to have a better empirical
foundation than the old principle which it has superseded.
The collapse of the notion of one all-embracing time, in which all
events throughout the universe can be dated, must in the long run affect our
views as to cause and effect, evolution, and many other matters. For
interval. But there is one way of moving from one event to another which
makes the sum of all the little intervals along the route greater than by any
other route. This route is called a “geodesic,” and it is the route which a
body will choose if left to itself.
The whole of relativity physics is a much more step-by-step matter than
the physics and geometry of former days. Euclid’s straight lines have to be
replaced by light rays, which do not quite come up to Euclid’s standard of
straightness when they pass near the sun or any other very heavy body. The
sum of the angles of a triangle is still thought to be two right angles in very
remote regions of empty space, but not where there is matter in the
neighborhood. We, who cannot leave the earth, are incapable of reaching a
place where Euclid is true. Propositions which used to be proved by
reasoning have now become either conventions, or merely approximate
truths verified by observation.
It is a curious fact—of which relativity is not the only illustration—that,
as reasoning improves, its claims to the power of proving facts grow less
and less. Logic used to be thought to teach us how to draw inferences; now,
it teaches us rather how not to draw inferences. Animals and children are
terribly prone to inference: a horse is surprised beyond measure if you take
an unusual turning. When men began to reason, they tried to justify the
inferences that they had drawn unthinkingly in earlier days. A great deal of
bad philosophy and bad science resulted from this propensity. “Great
principles,” such as the “uniformity of nature,” the “law of universal
causation,” and so on, are attempts to bolster up our belief that what has
often happened before will happen again, which is no better founded than
the horse’s belief that you will take the turning you usually take. It is not
altogether easy to see what is to replace these pseudo-principles in the
practice of science; but perhaps the theory of relativity gives us a glimpse of
the kind of thing we may expect. Causation, in the old sense, no longer has
a place in theoretical physics. There is, of course, something else which
takes its place, but the substitute appears to have a better empirical
foundation than the old principle which it has superseded.
The collapse of the notion of one all-embracing time, in which all
events throughout the universe can be dated, must in the long run affect our
views as to cause and effect, evolution, and many other matters. For
Page 122
instance, the question whether, on the whole, there is progress in the
universe, may depend upon our choice of a measure of time. If we choose
one out of a number of equally good clocks, we may find that the universe
is progressing as fast as the most optimistic American thinks it is; if we
choose another equally good clock, we may find that the universe is going
from bad to worse as fast as the most melancholy Slav could imagine. Thus
optimism and pessimism are neither true nor false, but depend upon the
choice of clocks.
The effect of this upon a certain type of emotion is devastating. The
poet speaks of
One far-off divine event
To which the whole creation moves.
But if the event is sufficiently far off, and the creation moves
sufficiently quickly, some parts will judge that the event has already
happened, while others will judge that it is still in the future. This spoils the
poetry. The second line ought to be:
To which some parts of the creation move,
while others move away from it.
But this won’t do. I suggest that an emotion which can be destroyed by
a little mathematics is neither very genuine nor very valuable. But this line
of argument would lead to a criticism of the Victorian Age, which lies
outside my theme.
What we know about the physical world, I repeat, is much more
abstract, than was formerly supposed. Between bodies there are
occurrences, such as light waves; of the laws of these occurrences, we know
something—just so much as can be expressed in mathematical formulæ—
but of their nature we know nothing. Of the bodies themselves, as we saw
in the preceding chapter, we know so little that we cannot even be sure that
they are anything: they may be merely groups of events in other places,
those events which we should naturally regard as their effects. We naturally
interpret the world pictorially; that is to say, we imagine that what goes on
is more or less like what we see. But in fact this likeness can only extend to
certain formal logical properties expressing structure, so that all we can
universe, may depend upon our choice of a measure of time. If we choose
one out of a number of equally good clocks, we may find that the universe
is progressing as fast as the most optimistic American thinks it is; if we
choose another equally good clock, we may find that the universe is going
from bad to worse as fast as the most melancholy Slav could imagine. Thus
optimism and pessimism are neither true nor false, but depend upon the
choice of clocks.
The effect of this upon a certain type of emotion is devastating. The
poet speaks of
One far-off divine event
To which the whole creation moves.
But if the event is sufficiently far off, and the creation moves
sufficiently quickly, some parts will judge that the event has already
happened, while others will judge that it is still in the future. This spoils the
poetry. The second line ought to be:
To which some parts of the creation move,
while others move away from it.
But this won’t do. I suggest that an emotion which can be destroyed by
a little mathematics is neither very genuine nor very valuable. But this line
of argument would lead to a criticism of the Victorian Age, which lies
outside my theme.
What we know about the physical world, I repeat, is much more
abstract, than was formerly supposed. Between bodies there are
occurrences, such as light waves; of the laws of these occurrences, we know
something—just so much as can be expressed in mathematical formulæ—
but of their nature we know nothing. Of the bodies themselves, as we saw
in the preceding chapter, we know so little that we cannot even be sure that
they are anything: they may be merely groups of events in other places,
those events which we should naturally regard as their effects. We naturally
interpret the world pictorially; that is to say, we imagine that what goes on
is more or less like what we see. But in fact this likeness can only extend to
certain formal logical properties expressing structure, so that all we can
Page 123
know is certain general characteristics of its changes. Perhaps an illustration
may make the matter clear. Between a piece of orchestral music as played,
and the same piece of music as printed in the score, there is a certain
resemblance, which may be described as a resemblance in structure. The
resemblance is of such a sort that, when you know the rules, you can infer
the music from the score or the score from the music. But suppose you had
been stone deaf from birth, but had lived among musical people. You could
understand, if you had learned to speak and to do lip-reading, that the
musical scores represented something quite different from themselves in
intrinsic quality, though similar in structure.[16] The value of music would
be completely unimaginable to you, but you could infer all its mathematical
characteristics, since they are the same as those of the score. Now our
knowledge of nature is something like this. We can read the scores, and
infer just so much as our stone-deaf person could have inferred about
music. But we have not the advantages which he derived from association
with musical people. We cannot know whether the music represented by the
scores is beautiful or hideous; perhaps, in the last analysis, we cannot be
quite sure that the scores represent anything but themselves. But this is a
doubt which the physicist, in his professional capacity, cannot permit
himself to entertain.
Assuming the utmost that can be claimed for physics, it does not tell us
what it is that changes, or what are its various states; it only tells us such
things as that changes follow each other periodically, or spread with a
certain speed. Even now we are probably not at the end of the process of
stripping away what is merely imagination, in order to reach the core of true
scientific knowledge. The theory of relativity has accomplished a very great
deal in this respect, and in doing so has taken us nearer and nearer to bare
structure, which is the mathematician’s goal—not because it is the only
thing in which he is interested as a human being, but because it is the only
thing that he can express in mathematical formulæ. But far as we have
traveled in the direction of abstraction, it may be that we shall have to travel
further still.
In the preceding chapter, I suggested what may be called a minimum
definition of matter, that is to say, one in which matter has, so to speak, as
little “substance” as is compatible with the truth of physics. In adopting a
definition of this kind, we are playing for safety: our tenuous matter will
may make the matter clear. Between a piece of orchestral music as played,
and the same piece of music as printed in the score, there is a certain
resemblance, which may be described as a resemblance in structure. The
resemblance is of such a sort that, when you know the rules, you can infer
the music from the score or the score from the music. But suppose you had
been stone deaf from birth, but had lived among musical people. You could
understand, if you had learned to speak and to do lip-reading, that the
musical scores represented something quite different from themselves in
intrinsic quality, though similar in structure.[16] The value of music would
be completely unimaginable to you, but you could infer all its mathematical
characteristics, since they are the same as those of the score. Now our
knowledge of nature is something like this. We can read the scores, and
infer just so much as our stone-deaf person could have inferred about
music. But we have not the advantages which he derived from association
with musical people. We cannot know whether the music represented by the
scores is beautiful or hideous; perhaps, in the last analysis, we cannot be
quite sure that the scores represent anything but themselves. But this is a
doubt which the physicist, in his professional capacity, cannot permit
himself to entertain.
Assuming the utmost that can be claimed for physics, it does not tell us
what it is that changes, or what are its various states; it only tells us such
things as that changes follow each other periodically, or spread with a
certain speed. Even now we are probably not at the end of the process of
stripping away what is merely imagination, in order to reach the core of true
scientific knowledge. The theory of relativity has accomplished a very great
deal in this respect, and in doing so has taken us nearer and nearer to bare
structure, which is the mathematician’s goal—not because it is the only
thing in which he is interested as a human being, but because it is the only
thing that he can express in mathematical formulæ. But far as we have
traveled in the direction of abstraction, it may be that we shall have to travel
further still.
In the preceding chapter, I suggested what may be called a minimum
definition of matter, that is to say, one in which matter has, so to speak, as
little “substance” as is compatible with the truth of physics. In adopting a
definition of this kind, we are playing for safety: our tenuous matter will
Page 124
exist, even if something more beefy also exists. We tried to make our
definition of matter, like Isabella’s gruel in Jane Austen, “thin, but not too
thin.” We shall, however, fall into error if we assert positively that matter is
nothing more than this. Leibniz thought that a piece of matter is really a
colony of souls. There is nothing to show that he was wrong, though there is
also nothing to show that he was right: we know no more about it either
way than we do about the flora and fauna of Mars.
To the non-mathematical mind, the abstract character of our physical
knowledge may seem unsatisfactory. From an artistic or imaginative point
of view, it is perhaps regrettable, but from a practical point of view it is of
no consequence. Abstraction, difficult as it is, is the source of practical
power. A financier, whose dealings with the world are more abstract than
those of any other “practical” man, is also more powerful than any other
practical man. He can deal in wheat or cotton without needing ever to have
seen either: all he needs to know is whether they will go up or down. This is
abstract mathematical knowledge, at least as compared to the knowledge of
the agriculturist. Similarly the physicist, who knows nothing of matter
except certain laws of its movements, nevertheless knows enough to enable
him to manipulate it. After working through whole strings of equations, in
which the symbols stand for things whose intrinsic nature can never be
known to us, he arrives at last at a result which can be interpreted in terms
of our own perceptions, and utilized to bring about desired effects in our
own lives. What we know about matter, abstract and schematic as it is, is
enough, in principle, to tell us the rules according to which it produces
perceptions and feelings in ourselves; and it is upon these rules that the
practical uses of physics depend.
The final conclusion is that we know very little, and yet it is astonishing
that we know so much, and still more astonishing that so little knowledge
can give us so much power.
THE END
Footnotes:
definition of matter, like Isabella’s gruel in Jane Austen, “thin, but not too
thin.” We shall, however, fall into error if we assert positively that matter is
nothing more than this. Leibniz thought that a piece of matter is really a
colony of souls. There is nothing to show that he was wrong, though there is
also nothing to show that he was right: we know no more about it either
way than we do about the flora and fauna of Mars.
To the non-mathematical mind, the abstract character of our physical
knowledge may seem unsatisfactory. From an artistic or imaginative point
of view, it is perhaps regrettable, but from a practical point of view it is of
no consequence. Abstraction, difficult as it is, is the source of practical
power. A financier, whose dealings with the world are more abstract than
those of any other “practical” man, is also more powerful than any other
practical man. He can deal in wheat or cotton without needing ever to have
seen either: all he needs to know is whether they will go up or down. This is
abstract mathematical knowledge, at least as compared to the knowledge of
the agriculturist. Similarly the physicist, who knows nothing of matter
except certain laws of its movements, nevertheless knows enough to enable
him to manipulate it. After working through whole strings of equations, in
which the symbols stand for things whose intrinsic nature can never be
known to us, he arrives at last at a result which can be interpreted in terms
of our own perceptions, and utilized to bring about desired effects in our
own lives. What we know about matter, abstract and schematic as it is, is
enough, in principle, to tell us the rules according to which it produces
perceptions and feelings in ourselves; and it is upon these rules that the
practical uses of physics depend.
The final conclusion is that we know very little, and yet it is astonishing
that we know so much, and still more astonishing that so little knowledge
can give us so much power.
THE END
Footnotes:
Page 125
[1] A contemporary Chinese ode, after giving the day of the year correctly,
proceeds:
“For the moon to be eclipsed
Is but an ordinary matter.
Now that the sun has been eclipsed,
How bad it is.”
[2] I shall define “interval” in a moment.
[3] So long as he has no considerable acceleration. The treatment of acceleration
belongs to the general theory of relativity.
[4] This does not mean that its velocity is increasing, but that it is changing its
direction. The only sort of motion which is called “unaccelerated” is motion with
uniform velocity in a straight line.
[5] See his Space, Time, Matter, Methuen, 1922.
[6] Although “force” is no longer to be regarded as one of the fundamental
concepts of dynamics, but only as a convenient way of speaking, it can still be
employed, like “sunrise” and “sunset,” provided we realize what we mean. Often
it would require very roundabout expressions to avoid the term “force.”
[7] See Eddington, The Mathematical Theory of Relativity, Cambridge
University Press, 2d edition, p. 128.
[8] This is subject to the explanations given below as regards conservation of
energy.
[9] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, p. 135.
[10] On this subject, see the present author’s A.B.C. of Atoms, chaps. vi and xiii.
[11] Op. cit. § 60.
[12] See Eddington, Space, Time and Gravitation, p. 162ff.
[13] “Isotropy” means being similar in all directions—e.g., that a foot rule is as
long when it points north as when it points east.
[14] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, p. 238.
[15] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, pp. 37-38. Italics in the original.
[16] For the definition of “structure,” see the present author’s Introduction to
Mathematical Philosophy.
Transcriber’s Notes:
The cover image was created by the transcriber, and is in the public domain.
The illustrations have been moved so that they do not break up paragraphs and so
that they are next to the text they illustrate.
proceeds:
“For the moon to be eclipsed
Is but an ordinary matter.
Now that the sun has been eclipsed,
How bad it is.”
[2] I shall define “interval” in a moment.
[3] So long as he has no considerable acceleration. The treatment of acceleration
belongs to the general theory of relativity.
[4] This does not mean that its velocity is increasing, but that it is changing its
direction. The only sort of motion which is called “unaccelerated” is motion with
uniform velocity in a straight line.
[5] See his Space, Time, Matter, Methuen, 1922.
[6] Although “force” is no longer to be regarded as one of the fundamental
concepts of dynamics, but only as a convenient way of speaking, it can still be
employed, like “sunrise” and “sunset,” provided we realize what we mean. Often
it would require very roundabout expressions to avoid the term “force.”
[7] See Eddington, The Mathematical Theory of Relativity, Cambridge
University Press, 2d edition, p. 128.
[8] This is subject to the explanations given below as regards conservation of
energy.
[9] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, p. 135.
[10] On this subject, see the present author’s A.B.C. of Atoms, chaps. vi and xiii.
[11] Op. cit. § 60.
[12] See Eddington, Space, Time and Gravitation, p. 162ff.
[13] “Isotropy” means being similar in all directions—e.g., that a foot rule is as
long when it points north as when it points east.
[14] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, p. 238.
[15] Mathematical Theory of Relativity, pp. 37-38. Italics in the original.
[16] For the definition of “structure,” see the present author’s Introduction to
Mathematical Philosophy.
Transcriber’s Notes:
The cover image was created by the transcriber, and is in the public domain.
The illustrations have been moved so that they do not break up paragraphs and so
that they are next to the text they illustrate.
Page 126
Typographical and punctuation errors have been silently corrected.
Page 127
*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE A B C OF
RELATIVITY ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
RELATIVITY ***
Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will
be renamed.
Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright
law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works,
so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United
States without permission and without paying copyright royalties.
Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license,
apply to copying and distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic
works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ concept and
trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not
be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following the terms of
the trademark license, including paying royalties for use of the Project
Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for copies of this
eBook, complying with the trademark license is very easy. You may
use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation of derivative
works, reports, performances and research. Project Gutenberg eBooks
may be modified and printed and given away—you may do practically
ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected by U.S.
copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark license,
especially commercial redistribution.
START: FULL LICENSE
Page 128
THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG™ LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work (or
any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project
Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg License available with this file or online at
www.gutenberg.org/license.
Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing
Project Gutenberg electronic works
1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg electronic
work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to and accept
all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg electronic works in your possession. If
you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project Gutenberg
electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the terms of this
agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or entity to whom
you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people
who agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See
paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg electronic
works. See paragraph 1.E below.
1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the
Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the
Page 129
collection of Project Gutenberg electronic works. Nearly all the
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
individual works in the collection are in the public domain in the
United States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in
the United States and you are located in the United States, we do not
claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing,
displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as
all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope
that you will support the Project Gutenberg mission of promoting free
access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg works
in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the Project
Gutenberg name associated with the work. You can easily comply with
the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the same format
with its attached full Project Gutenberg License when you share it
without charge with others.
1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are
in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States,
check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this
agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing,
distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any
other Project Gutenberg work. The Foundation makes no
representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any
country other than the United States.
1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg work (any work on which
the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the phrase
“Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed,
viewed, copied or distributed:
This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States
and most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no
restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it
under the terms of the Project Gutenberg™ License included with
Page 130
this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the
country where you are located before using this eBook.
1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is derived
from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not contain a
notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the copyright
holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in the United
States without paying any fees or charges. If you are redistributing or
providing access to a work with the phrase “Project Gutenberg”
associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply either with
the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or obtain
permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg
trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any
additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms
will be linked to the Project Gutenberg License for all works posted
with the permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of
this work.
1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg.
1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg License.
1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including
any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide
access to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg work in a format
other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official
Page 131
version posted on the official Project Gutenberg website
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense
to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of
obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain
Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the
full Project Gutenberg License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg electronic works provided
that:
• You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from the
use of Project Gutenberg works calculated using the method you
already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed to the
owner of the Project Gutenberg trademark, but he has agreed to donate
royalties under this paragraph to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid within 60 days
following each date on which you prepare (or are legally required to
prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty payments should be clearly
marked as such and sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation at the address specified in Section 4, “Information about
donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.”
• You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he does
not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ License. You
must require such a user to return or destroy all copies of the works
possessed in a physical medium and discontinue all use of and all
access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ works.
• You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of
receipt of the work.
Page 132
• You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
of Project Gutenberg™ works.
1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg™
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set forth
in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from the
Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of the
Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set forth in
Section 3 below.
1.F.
1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend
considerable effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and
proofread works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the
Project Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project
Gutenberg™ electronic works, and the medium on which they may be
stored, may contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete,
inaccurate or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other
intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or
other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or
cannot be read by your equipment.
1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES -
Except for the “Right of Replacement or Refund” described in
paragraph 1.F.3, the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation,
the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party
distributing a Project Gutenberg™ electronic work under this
agreement, disclaim all liability to you for damages, costs and
expenses, including legal fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO
REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, BREACH
OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE
FOUNDATION, THE TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY
DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT,
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES
Page 133
EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
DAMAGE.
1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you
discover a defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it,
you can receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by
sending a written explanation to the person you received the work
from. If you received the work on a physical medium, you must return
the medium with your written explanation. The person or entity that
provided you with the defective work may elect to provide a
replacement copy in lieu of a refund. If you received the work
electronically, the person or entity providing it to you may choose to
give you a second opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu
of a refund. If the second copy is also defective, you may demand a
refund in writing without further opportunities to fix the problem.
1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth in
paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO
OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. If
any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the law
of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the
Foundation, the trademark owner, any agent or employee of the
Foundation, anyone providing copies of Project Gutenberg™
electronic works in accordance with this agreement, and any
volunteers associated with the production, promotion and distribution
of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works, harmless from all liability,
costs and expenses, including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly
from any of the following which you do or cause to occur: (a)
Page 134
distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg work, (b) alteration,
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
modification, or additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg work,
and (c) any Defect you cause.
Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project
Gutenberg
Project Gutenberg is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of
computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It
exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations
from people in all walks of life.
Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg’s goals
and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg collection will remain freely
available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure and
permanent future for Project Gutenberg and future generations. To
learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 and
the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org.
Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation
The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the state
of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal Revenue
Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification number is
64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by U.S.
federal laws and your state’s laws.
The Foundation’s business office is located at 41 Watchung Plaza
#516, Montclair NJ 07042, USA, +1 (862) 621-9288. Email contact
Page 135
links and up to date contact information can be found at the
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Foundation’s website and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact
Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without
widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small
donations ($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax
exempt status with the IRS.
The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United States.
Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a considerable
effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up with these
requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations where we have
not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND
DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular
state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate.
While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.
International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation
methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To
donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate.
Page 136
Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.
electronic works
Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in
the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not
necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper
edition.
Most people start at our website which has the main PG search facility:
www.gutenberg.org.
This website includes information about Project Gutenberg, including
how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.